CA08104001E

115826-Attachment 115826-Attachment 115826-Attachment 786679 Batch7 unilog cesco-content

2014-09-04

: Pdf 115826-Attachment 115826-Attachment 782114 Batch7 unilog

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 126 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com PIN 0130100, 0120000, 0080300

January 2005

Contents

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage 21.0-1

Sheet 0571

Circuit Breakers &

Trip Units — Low Voltage

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1-1

Power Circuit Breakers — DSII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2-1

Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-1

Microprocessor Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4-1

Enclosed Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5-1

Speciﬁcations

See Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Product Speciﬁcation Guide:

1995 CSI Format: Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS. . . . Section 16475

Power Circuit Breakers — DSII. . . . . . . . . . . Section 16475

Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16475

Microprocessor Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16904

Enclosed Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16476

2004 CSI Format: Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS. . . . Section 26 28 11

Power Circuit Breakers — DSII. . . . . . . . . . . Section 26 28 11

Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . Section 26 28 11

Microprocessor Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 26 28 50

Enclosed Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 26 28 16.11

Low Voltage Circuit Breakers

Home

Index

21.0-2

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Sheet 0572

This page intentionally left blank.

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.1-1

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

General Description

Sheet 0573

Contents

Magnum DS

General Description . . . . . . . 21.1-1

Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1-5

Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1-6

Standard Control Diagram. . . 21.1-6

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1-7

Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1-9

Magnum DS

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS

Breakers are power circuit breakers

designed and engineered speciﬁcally

for use in Magnum DS Low Voltage

Switchgear assemblies applied at nom-

inal voltages of 240, 480 and 600 Vac.

Six continuous ratings — 800 amperes

through 6000 amperes — are covered

by only two physical breaker sizes.

Controls and indicators are functionally

grouped on the front of the breakers and

the through-the-door design means they

are easily viewed and accessible.

Trip Flag

Three Accessory Windows

Digitrip RMS Trip Unit

Contact Status Indicator

(Open or Closed)

 Spring Status Indicator

(Charged or Discharged)

 “Push Off” to Open Breaker Button

 “Push On” to Close Breaker Button

 Manual Charging Handle

 Optional Operations Counter

 Optional “Off” Key Lock

 Padlockable Levering Device

 Color-Coded Breaker Position

Indicators

Magnum DS Breakers are 100% rated,

UL listed, and are built and tested in

an ISO 9000 certiﬁed facility to appli-

cable standards including:

■ANSI C37.13

■NEMA SG3

■ANSI C37.16

■UL 1066

■ANSI C37.17

■CSA 22.2

■ANSI C37.50

Magnum DS Breaker

Magnum DS is also suitable for use in:

■UL 1558 low voltage switchgear.

■UL 891 low voltage switchboards.

■CSA 22.2.31 low voltage assemblies.

Integrally designed breaker steel

cassette for drawout breakers provides

clear indication of connect, test and

disconnect positions.

Faceplate controls facilitate operation

of the breaker, and the three accessory

mounting windows provide for easy

identiﬁcation.

The breaker can be conveniently racked in

or out, stopping at the various positions

with the door closed.

The breaker spring charging handle

is designed with sufﬁcient space for

operation even with a gloved hand.

  



















Home

TOC

Index

21.1-2

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

General Description Sheet 0574

Designed for Easy Access,

Inspection and Minimal

Maintenance

The stored energy mechanism, control

devices, accessories and secondary

contacts are easily accessible by

removing the front cover that is held in

place by four captive screws. This can

only be done when the breaker is in

the disconnect position or removed

from the cell.

The current sensor viewing window on

the rear of the breaker allows for easy

identiﬁcation of the current sensor

mounted inside.

The contact wear indicator eliminates

the need for elaborate testing to

determine if the contact assembly

needs replaced.

Many minor replacement functions

involving the mechanism, control,

and/or accessories can be easily

accomplished.

Two-Step Stored Energy

Mechanism for Manually and

Electrically Operated Breakers

The potential energy is stored in the

mechanism to close the breaker in

ﬁve cycles or less. Sufﬁcient energy

to open the breaker remains available

following the closing operation.

After closing, the charging spring can

be recharged to provide potential

energy for reclosing following a fault,

providing high continuity of service.

This feature allows for the following

sequence: charge – close – recharge –

open – close – open.

On manually operated breakers,

closing springs are charged by hand.

For electrically operated breakers,

springs are charged by an electric

motor but can be manually charged

if no power is available.

Increased Short Time and

Interrupting Ratings

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS

Power Circuit Breakers are available

with short time ratings up to 85,000

amperes rms symmetrical and inter-

rupting ratings up to 100,000 amperes

rms symmetrical. These increased

ratings far exceed ratings previously

available on power circuit breakers.

Internal View of Magnum DS Breaker

This rear view of a Magnum DS drawout

breaker shows the designed-in safety

feature of locating the secondary contacts

away from the primary disconnects.

Positioning of the secondary contact

subassembly is dedicated for installation,

maintenance and testing. Top view shown

with breaker cover removed, bottom of

photo is front of breaker.

Secondary Wiring Points

Field Installable Accessories

(Three Maximum)

Digitrip RMS Trip Unit

Optional Electric Charging Motor

Manual Charging Handle

Padlockable Levering Device

Breaker Position Indicator

Secondary Contacts

Arc Chute Covers

Primary Finger Cluster Disconnects

Current Sensor Window

Rigid Frame Housing













 





Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.1-3

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

General Description

Sheet 0575

Flexible Current Path Increases

Current Carrying Capability

in Less Space

■Multi-ﬁnger contact structure

divides the current ﬂow, increasing

the thermal carrying capability of

the entire current path.

Visual contact wear indicator shows

when contact replacement is necessary.

■Flexible braided current path to the

contact ﬁngers reduces necessary

current carrying space and provides

a smooth connection, eliminating

bolted joints and contact springs.

This design helps increase breaker

service life by reducing localized

heat buildup and mechanical

stress inherent in conventional

bolted joints.

Figure 21.1-1. Cross-Section of Magnum DS

Heel-Toe Contact

Unlike conventional power breaker

designs utilizing separate arcing

and main current carrying contacts,

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS

Circuit Breakers perform both func-

tions on different parts of the same

contact ﬁnger. Each ﬁnger has a

mov-

ing main contact (heel) and a moving

arcing contact (toe). A complete mov-

able contact is merely the combination

of a number of individual ﬁngers.

As the circuit breaker is called upon to

open, the toe and heel simultaneously

touch. At that point, the current

changes its path from the main contact

to the arcing contact. As the heel lifts

off, any remaining current is driven to

the toe. The result is minimal arcing

damage to the main contact (heel)

providing for longer main contact life.

Upon closing, the toe absorbs most of

the impact and deals with any arcing

by touching down before the heel.

Once again, the main contact (heel)

is protected resulting in longer life.

Arc Running System Provides

Higher Interrupting Capacity

in Less Space

■Heel-toe contact structure is a

single contact ﬁnger design that

performs both main and arcing

contact functions by controlling the

arc direction. This design provides

for longer contact life.

■Integral arc runner enhances the

magnetic action of the arc chute by

drawing the arc into the chute with

increased efﬁciency, reducing arcing

at the toe of the contacts. This

exclusive design allows for higher

arcing in a smaller space, resulting

in increased interrupting ratings.

Alternating V Arc Chute™ quickly

divides and extinguishes the arc.

The V Arc Chute reaction speed

protects contact material, extending

contact life.

Arc chutes can be easily removed and

inspected. The contact wear indicator

on the main contact assembly can also

be inspected.

Isolated View of Contact

Opening Sequence

Figure 21.1-2. (1) Fully Closed Position

Only the main contact (heel) touches and

all current ﬂow is through the main contact.

Figure 21.1-3. (2) Simultaneous Touching

of All Contacts

The arcing contact (toe) touches down

before the main contact (heel) lifts off

with current ﬂow dividing between

main (heel) and arcing (toe) contacts.

Figure 21.1-4. (3) Toe (Arcing) Contacts

Touching

The main contact (heel) lifts off with the

arcing contact (toe) still touching to deal

with any arcing. Current ﬂow is only

through the arcing contact (toe).

Figure 21.1-5. (4) Fully Open Position

Both the main (heel) and arcing (toe) contacts

are open and there is no current ﬂow. The arc

dissipates up into the arc chute.

Breaker

Front

Stationary

Main Contact

Moving

Main

Contact

(Heel)

Moving

Contact

Fingers

Moving

Contact

Carrier

Arc

Chute

Integral

Arc Runner

Braided

Flexible

Shunts

Moving

Arcing

Contact

(Toe)

Load

Conductor

Line

Conductor

Current

Sensor

Current

Flow

Current

Flow

XXXXXXX

Home

TOC

Index

21.1-4

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

General Description Sheet 0576

Rigid Frame Housing

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS

Breaker utilizes a rigid frame housing —

an ANSI power breaker exclusive. This

housing provides the strength and sta-

bility required in the mounting of the

current path and operating mechanism.

■Increased Uptime. Because the

current path is isolated and insulated

inside a two-piece interconnected

housing, any potential damage that

may occur during arc interruption

between the poles or outside of the

breaker is minimized.

■Increased Breaker Life. By providing

rigid support for the operating

mechanism and the contact struc-

ture, mechanical stress is reduced,

increasing reliability.

■Design Reliability. The housing

reduces the number of frame parts

in comparison with conventional

ANSI power breakers, providing

increased reliability.

■Rigid Frame. The engineered

thermoset composite resin

provides excellent structural

properties, dielectric strength,

and arc track resistance helping

to provide the higher interrupting

and short time (withstand) ratings

in a smaller size.

Built-in Safety Features Provide

Optimum Operator Safety and

System Security

■Improved C-loop current path

design provides dramatic improve-

ments in both safety and efﬁciency.

Higher current ratings increase

the blow-on forces on the contact

surfaces, allowing the proper

downstream protective device

to open, isolating the fault and

increasing uptime.

■Positive on is indicated on the

breaker faceplate. This unique

interlocking feature prevents the

levering door from being opened if

the contacts are welded, protecting

personnel from exposure to live

primary contacts.

■Making current release prevents

the breaker from closing in on a

fault exceeding 25X peak ≈ 11X rms

times the nominal current.

■Keyed sensor plug ensures error-free

installation of the sensor in the ﬁeld.

■Deadfront faceplate isolates the

operator from the primary voltage

when the breaker is energized.

■Anti-pump prevents any attempts to

reclose the breaker on a short circuit

fault if the close signal (mechanical

or electrical) is maintained.

■Interlocked levering door cannot be

opened until the contacts are in the

open condition.

■Three position indicators on the

faceplate for drawout mounting.

Speciﬁc colors identify the breaker

position.

Breaker Position Indicator

■Connect. Both main and secondary

contacts are connected and the

breaker is ready for normal

operation.

■Test. Main disconnects are

disengaged, secondary contacts

are engaged. All functions of the

breaker and trip unit can be tested

in this position.

■Disconnect. A storage position in

the compartment but the breaker

is open and disconnected.

Quality and Reliability

Eaton performs consistent endurance

and reliability tests on Magnum DS

Breakers.

■Mini-Life Tests. A breaker is

randomly selected from the

production line daily, and tested

for an average of 50 mechanical

operations to assure performance

as required.

■Maxi-Life Tests. MTBF testing

continuously tests Magnum DS

Breakers until they fail. This

identiﬁes potential performance

issues with the breaker and

provides statistical analysis for

further improvement.

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.1-5

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

Accessories

Sheet 0577

A Common Family of

Accessories for Both

Frame Sizes

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS

accessories ﬁt all frame sizes.

Magnum DS through-the-window

accessories are installed near the

right front of the breaker. The unique

windows in the breaker cover enable

accessories to be quickly identiﬁed

by name and rating.

Accessories are plug-in, providing

for easy mounting and wiring to save

both installation time and cost. This

feature facilitates accessory changes

and replacements by user personnel,

eliminating the need to use factory

trained personnel or outside service

companies.

Modular accessories are keyed for fast

error-free mounting in the ﬁeld. For

example, the spring release can only

be mounted in the center cavity.

The accessory cavity design, unique

to ANSI power breakers, is accessible

in the front of the breaker. Up to three

accessories can be easily installed and

wired in the ﬁeld.

Factory Installed or Available as

UL Listed Field Installable Kits

Through-the-Window Electrical

Accessories

Accessory Windows

■Shunt Trip. Provides remote

controlled circuit breaker opening

when energized by a voltage input.

■Spring Release. Remotely

closes the breaker when its coil

is energized by a voltage input.

■Undervoltage Release (UVR).

Trips the breaker remotely when

an existing voltage signal is lost

or drops below an established

threshold.

Internal Accessories

■Auxiliary Switch. Provides the

capability to remotely indicate if the

breaker is open or closed. Up to six

normally open and six normally

closed auxiliary contacts are

available for customer use.

■Overcurrent Trip Switch (Bell Alarm).

A set of normally open and

normally closed contacts that

indicate when a breaker trips.

■Electrical Operator. A universal type

electric motor, internally mounted in

the circuit breaker, that charges the

closing springs automatically, facili-

tating remote or local closing.

Through-the-window electrical

accessories are identically sized,

yet keyed for error-free mounting.

The auxiliary switch is an internal accessory

that provides remote electrical indication

if the breaker is open or closed.

An electric motor automatically charges

the closing springs. In absence of control

power, the springs can be manually charged.

Magnum DS modular design allows

customers to mount accessories in the ﬁeld.

Home

TOC

Index

21.1-6

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

Trip Units Sheet 0578

Trip Units

Eaton introduced the ﬁrst microprocessor-

based trip unit and has advanced the

technology into a new family of UL

and CSA listed Digitrip RMS Electronic

and Programmable Trip Units designed

and engineered exclusively for

Magnum DS Breakers.

Electronic Trip Units

■Digitrip RMS 520 enables the user as

many as nine phase and ground cur-

rent protection settings for maximum

ﬂexibility in trip-curve shaping and

multi-unit coordination, and adds

ground current protection settings.

■Digitrip RMS 520M adds phase,

neutral and ground current meter-

ing with a four-character LCD

display window.

■Digitrip RMS 520MC adds communi-

cation of current values and breaker

status (open, closed, tripped).

Programmable Trip Units

■Digitrip RMS 1150 provides

programmability for more sophisti-

cated distribution systems.

❑Increased protection and

coordination capabilities.

❑Systems monitoring information

including power factor, voltage,

current, harmonic distortion

values, and waveform capture

with a three-line, (eight characters

per line) LED display.

❑Two programmable contacts

for customer use.

❑Time stamping of trip events for

improved troubleshooting and

diagnostics.

❑Accuracy of 1% on current and

voltage values and 2% on energy

and power.

❑Systems diagnostic information.

❑PowerNet communications.

Digitrip RMS 1150 Programmable Trip Unit

This state-of-the-art trip unit with true

rms sensing can be programmed at the

faceplate or remotely with a PC using

the PowerNet communications system.

All system parameters as well as pro-

gramming information can be viewed

on the easy-to-read three-line digital

display window.

For additional information on trip units

see Section 21.5.

Digitrip 1150

Digitrip 520

Figure 21.1-6. Standard Control Diagram for Magnum Electrically Operated Breaker, in Magnum Switchgear, for ac or dc Control Source

Neg

Pos

Control

Power

B12

B13

Open G R

Close CS

Trip

B15

B14

B26

B27

B10

B11

MOT

Lev-in Door

Switch

(DC Only)

MDSEOBKR

Legend

LS — Limit Switch for Closing Spring

MOT — Motor for Spring Charging

SH TR — Shunt Trip

SR — Spring Release

Y— Anti-Pump Relay

Description of Operation

1 — Motor is energized through LS contact.

2 — Motor runs and charges Closing Spring.

3 — When Closing Spring fully charged, LS

contacts reverse.

4 — CIosing CS-C contact energizes SR Coil

through Y, LS & “b” contacts.

5 — When Breaker closes, “b” opens and Y

Coil is energized in series with SR Coil.

6 — Y contact opens to open SR Coil circuit &

prevent pumping should breaker open

while CS-C is held closed. Y Coil has very

low drop-out voltage.

7 — LS contacts reverse and motor recharges

closing springs.

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.1-7

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

Technical Data

Sheet 0579

Magnum DS Ratings

Table 21.1-1. Magnum DS UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS Trip Unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal

to the published Short Time Withstand Rating. These interrupting ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an opening operation,

a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for

short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 second each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between

the two periods.

Magnum DSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker with Integral Current Limiters. Current Limiter selected determines short time and ﬁxed

instantaneous trip rating. Maximum voltage rating is 600 Vac.

Magnum DSX Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker with Fast Opening Contacts.

Contact Eaton for product rating.

Breaker applied with fan cooling in tested enclosure.

Frame

Amperes Breaker

Type Frame

Type rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz Available Current Sensor and Rating

Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit

(Establishes Breaker In Rating)

Interrupting

at 254 Vac Interrupting

at 508 Vac Interrupting

at 635 Vac Short Time

Withstand Rating Fixed Internal

Inst. Trip

800 MDN-408

MDN-508

MDN-608

MDN-C08

Narrow

100

—

14 x In

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800

MDS-408

MDS-608

MDS-808

MDS-C08

MDS-L08 

MDS-X08 

Standard

100

200

100

200

100

200



—

1200 MDN-412

MDN-512

MDN-612

MDN-C12

Narrow

100

—

14 x In

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800,

1000, 1200

MDS-612

MDS-812

MDS-C12

MDS-L12 

MDS-X12 

Standard

100

200

100

200

100

200



—

1600 MDN-416

MDN-516

MDN-616

MDN-C16

Narrow

100

—

14 x In

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800,

1000, 1200, 1250, 1600

MDS-616

MDS-816

MDS-C16

MDS-L16 

MDS-X16 

Standard

100

200

100

200

100

200



—

2000 MDN-620

MDN-C20 Narrow

Narrow 65

100 65

65 65

30 —

14 x In

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800,

1000, 1200, 1250, 1600, 2000

MDS-620

MDS-820

MDS-C20

MDS-L20 

MDS-X20 

Standard

100

200

100

200

100

200



—

2500 MDS-625

MDS-825

MDS-C25

Standard

100

—

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800,

1000, 1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500

3000 MDS-630

MDS-830

MDS-C30

Standard

100

—

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800, 1000,

1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000

3200 MDS-632

MDS-832

MDS-C32

MDS-X32 

Standard

Double

100

200

100

200

100



—

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800,

1000, 1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500,

3000, 3200

4000 MDS-840

MDS-C40

MDS-X40 

Double

100

200

100

200

100



100

—

2000, 2500, 3000, 3200, 4000

5000 MDS-850

MDS-C50

MDS-X50 

Double

100

200

100

200

100



100

—

2500, 3000, 3200, 4000, 5000

6000 MDS-C60 Double 100 100 100 100 — 3200, 4000, 5000, 6000

Home

TOC

Index

21.1-8

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

Technical Data Sheet 0580

Table 21.1-2. Digitrip RMS Adjustable Trip Settings

I2t Response.

Note: In= Rating Plug Value, Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting Times In

Table 21.1-3. Magnum DS Breaker Control Device Voltages and Application Data

Time/Current

Characteristics Pickup

Setting Pickup Point

(see note) Time Band,

Seconds

Long Delay 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8

0.9, 0.95, 1.0 In Times

Long Delay Setting 2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 24

(at 6 times pickup value)

Instantaneous Off, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10

In Times

Instantaneous Setting —

—

Short Delay 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10

Ir Times

Short Delay Setting 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5

(Flat Response)

0.1 , 0.3 , 0.5 

Ground Fault 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4,

0.5, 0.6, 0.75, 1.00

(1200 A Maximum)

In Times

Ground Fault Setting 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5

(Flat Response)

0.1 , 0.3 , 0.5 

Breaker

Control Device 24 Vdc 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc 120 Vac 240 Vac

Shunt Trip Circuit Voltage

Power Consumption (Inrush) 70 to 110%

(Required for 35 ms) 17 – 26 Vdc

250 Watts 34 – 53 Vdc

250 Watts 77 – 138 Vdc

450 Watts 154 – 275 Vdc

450 Watts 77 – 140 Vac

450 VA 146 – 264 Vac

450 VA

Close Circuit Voltage

Power Consumption (Inrush) 70 to 110%

(Required for 200 ms) 17 – 26 Vdc

250 Watts 34 – 53 Vdc

250 Watts 77 – 138 Vdc

450 Watts 154 – 275 Vdc

450 Watts 77 – 140 Vac

450 VA 146 – 264 Vac

450 VA

Spring Charge Motor Voltage

Amps (Running)

Amps (Inrush)

Power Consumption

Charging Time

85 to 110%

Running

% of Running

20 – 26 Vdc

12.0 Amps

300%

300 Watts

5 Sec

41 – 53 Vdc

5.0 Amps

500%

250 Watts

5 Sec

94 – 138 Vdc

2.0 Amps

600%

250 Watts

5 Sec

187 – 225 Vdc

1.0 Amps

600%

250 Watts

5 Sec

93 – 140 Vdc

2.0 Amps

600%

250 VA

5 Sec

177 – 264 Vdc

1.0 Amps

600%

250 VA

5 Sec

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.1-9

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

Application Data

Sheet 0581

Application

Standards

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS

circuit breakers meet or exceed all

applicable requirements of ANSI Stan-

dards C37.13, C37.17, C37.50 and CSA.

System Voltage and Frequency

Magnum DS breakers are designed for

operation on ac systems only, 60 Hz or

50 Hz, 635 volts maximum.

Continuous Current Ratings

Unlike transformers, generators and

motors, circuit breakers are maximum-

rated devices and have no built-in

temporary overload current ratings.

Consequently, it is vital that each

application takes into consideration

the maximum anticipated current

demand, initial and future, including

temporary overloads.

The continuous rating of any Magnum

DS breaker is limited to the sensor

rating, or the frame size current rating,

whichever is the lesser. For instance,

an MDS-616 1600 ampere frame

breaker with 800 ampere sensors has

a maximum continuous rating of 800

amperes, but the same breaker with

1600 ampere sensors is limited to 1600

amperes maximum.

All current ratings are based on a

maximum ambient air temperature

of 40°C (104°F).

Ambient Temperature

The temperature of the air surround-

ing the enclosure should be within

the limits of:

-30°C (-22°F) to +40°C (104°F).

Altitude

The breakers are applicable at their

full voltage and current ratings up

to a maximum altitude of 6,600 feet

(2,012 m) above sea level. When

installed at higher altitudes, the ratings

are subject to the following correction

factors in accordance with ANSI

C37.20.1:

Table 21.1-4. Altitude Derating Factors

Unusual Environmental and

Operating Conditions

Special attention should be given to

applications subject to the following

conditions:

1. Damaging or hazardous fumes,

vapors, etc.

2. Excessive or abrasive dust.

For such conditions, it is generally

recommended that the switchgear

be installed in a clean, dry room, with

ﬁltered and/or pressurized clean air.

This method permits the use of standard

indoor switchgear and avoids the de-

rating effect of non-ventilated enclosures.

3. Salt spray, excessive moisture,

dripping, etc.

Drip shields in equipment rooms and

space heaters in indoor switchgear,

or outdoor weatherproof enclosures,

may be indicated, depending upon

the severity of the conditions.

4. Excessively high or low ambient

temperatures.

For ambient temperatures exceeding

40°C, and based on a standard temper-

ature rise of 65°C, the continuous

current ratings of breaker frame sizes,

and also buses, current transformers,

etc., will be subject to a derating factor

calculated from the following formula:

Circuit breakers are not adversely

affected by very low outdoor ambient

temperatures, particularly when ener-

gized and carrying load currents. The

standard space heaters in weatherproof

switchgear will raise the temperature

slightly and prevent condensation.

Electrical components such as relays

and instruments, however, must be

applied within the manufacturer’s

speciﬁed limits.

5. Exposure to seismic shock.

Magnum DS assemblies and breakers

have been certiﬁed for applications

through UBC Zone 4 and for the

California Building Code. Assembly

modiﬁcations are required, so such

conditions must be speciﬁed.

6. Abnormally high frequency

of operation.

In line with above, a lesser number

of operations between servicing, and

more frequent replacement of parts,

may be indicated.

Altitude Voltage

Correction Current

Correction

Feet Meters

6,600

7,000

7,500

2,012

2,134

2,286

1.000

.989

.976

1.000

.998

.995

8,000

8,500

9,000

2,438

2,591

2,743

.963

.950

.933

.993

.990

.987

9,500

10,000

10,500

2,896

3,048

3,200

.917

.900

.883

.983

.980

.977

11,000

11,500

12,000

3,353

3,505

3,658

.867

.850

.833

.973

.970

.967

12,500

13,000 3,810

3,962 .817

.800 .963

.960

105°C°Total – Special Ambient, °C

105°C°Total – 40°C°Standard Ambient

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Home

TOC

Index

21.1-10

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

Application Data Sheet 0582

Application

Transformer Main

Secondary Breakers

Transformer secondary breakers are

required or recommended for one or

more of the following purposes:

1. To provide a one-step means

of removing all load from the

transformer.

2. To provide transformer overload

protection in the absence of an

individual primary breaker, and/or

when primary fuses are used.

3. To provide the fastest clearing of

a short circuit in the secondary

main bus.

4. To provide a local disconnecting

means, in the absence of a local

primary switch or breaker, for

maintenance purposes.

5. For automatic or manual transfer

of loads to alternate sources, as in

double-ended secondary selective

unit substations.

6. For simplifying key interlocking

with primary interrupter switches.

7. To satisfy NEC service entrance

requirements when more than

six feeder breakers are required.

Main secondary breakers must have

adequate interrupting ratings, but

not necessarily adequate continuous

current ratings. They should be able

to carry continuously not only the

anticipated maximum continuous

output of the transformer but also

any temporary overloads.

For a fully selective system, instanta-

neous protection on main breakers

should be defeated, as they typically

cannot be coordinated with down-

stream devices.

Maximum capabilities of transformers

of various types, can be found in

Section 14.0

It will be noted that the

maximum

ratings will often require the

substitution of larger frame main break-

ers than those listed in the tables. Even

if a self-cooled transformer only is

considered, it should be remembered

that with ratings of 750 kVA and higher,

provision for the future addition of

cooling fans is automatically included.

It is recommended that the main breaker

have sufﬁcient capacity for the future

fan-cooled rating, plus an allowance for

overloads, if possible, particularly since

load growth cannot always be predicted.

The same considerations should be

given to the main bus capacities and

main current transformer ratios.

Bus Sectionalizing (Tie) Breakers

The minimum recommended continu-

ous current rating of bus sectionalizing

or tie breakers, as used in double-ended

secondary selective unit sub-stations,

or for connecting two single-ended

substations, is one-half that of the

associated main breakers. The inter-

rupting rating should be at least equal to

that of the feeder breakers. It is common

practice to select the tie breaker of the

next frame size below that of the main

breakers. However, many users and

engineers prefer that the tie breaker be

identical to and interchangeable with

the main breakers, so that under normal

conditions it will be available as a spare

main breaker.

In general, the tie breaker, like the

main breaker, trip unit should have

its instantaneous tripping defeated.

Generator Breakers

In most applications where generators

are connected through breakers to the

secondary bus, they are used as emer-

gency standby sources only, and are

not synchronized or paralleled with the

unit substation transformers. Under

these conditions, the interrupting rating

of the generator breaker will be based

solely on the generator kVA and sub-

transient reactance. This reactance varies

with the generator type and rpm, from

a minimum of approximately 9% for a

2-pole 3600 rpm turbine driven gener

tor to 15% or 20% or more for a medium

or slow speed engine type generator.

Thus the feeder breakers selected for the

unit substation will usually be adequate

for a standby generator of the same

kVA as the transformer.

Most generators have a 2-hour 25%

overload rating, and the generator

breaker must be adequate for this

overload current. Selective type long

and short delay trip protection only is

usually recommended for coordination

with the feeder breakers, with the long

delay elements set at 125% to 150% of

the maximum generator current rating

for generator protection.

In the case of two or more paralleled

generators, anti-motoring reverse power

relays (device 32) are recommended

for protection of the prime movers,

particularly piston type engines. For

larger generators requiring a Magnum

MDS-632 or larger, voltage-restraint

type overcurrent relays (device 51V)

are recommended.

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.1-11

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

Application Data

Sheet 0583

Application

Feeder Breakers — General

Circuit breakers for feeder circuit

protection may be manually or

electrically operated, with long and

short delay or long delay and instanta-

neous type trip devices, and trip

settings, as required for the speciﬁc

circuit and load requirements.

General purpose feeder breakers, such as

for lighting circuits, are usually equipped

with long delay and instantaneous trip

devices, with the long delay pickup set

for the maximum load demand in the

circuit. Where arcing fault protection is

required, the instantaneous trip setting

should be as low as practicable consis-

tent with inrush requirements.

Motor Starting Feeder Breakers

These breakers are usually electrically

operated, with long delay and instan-

taneous tripping characteristics for

motor running, locked rotor and fault

protection. The breaker sensor rating

should be chosen so that the long delay

pickup can be set at 125% of motor full

load current for motors with a 1.15

service factor, or at 115% for all other

motors. Contactors are recommended

for this application when there are a

number of daily operations involved.

When system short circuits are less

than 40 times the motor full load

current, the motor breaker tripping

characteristic should include a short

delay characteristic for greater fault

protection.

Repetitive Duty

Repetitive breaker opening and clos-

ing, such as in frequent motor starting

and stopping, are covered by ANSI

standards C37.13 and C37.16. These

standards list the number of opera-

tions between servicing (adjusting,

cleaning, lubrication, tightening, etc.)

and the total numbers of operations

under various conditions without

requiring replacement of parts, for

the various breaker frame sizes.

For motor starting duty, with closing

starting currents up to 600% and opening

running currents up to 100% of the

breaker frame size, at 80% power

factor or higher, the endurance or

total operations (not requiring parts

replacement) will be as follows:

800 A Frame: 1400 operations

1600 A Frame: 400 operations

The frequency of operation should not

exceed 20 starts in 10 minutes or 30 in

one hour.

Group Motor Feeder Breakers

Typical loads for such circuits are motor

control centers. The feeder breakers

may be either manually or electrically

operated as preferred, and are usually

equipped with long and short delay trip

protection only for coordination with

the individual motor circuit devices.

The minimum long delay pickup setting

should be 115% of the running current

of the largest motor in the group, plus

the sum of the running circuits of all

other motors.

Zone Selective Interlocking

By deﬁnition, a selectively coordinated

system is one where by adjusting trip

unit pickup and time delay settings, the

circuit breaker closest to the fault trips

ﬁrst. The upstream breaker serves two

functions: (1) back-up protection to the

downstream breaker and (2) protection

of the conductors between the upstream

and downstream breakers. These

elements are provided for on Digitrip

trip units.

For faults which occur on the conduc-

tors between the upstream and down-

stream breakers it is ideally desirable

for the upstream breaker to trip with

no time delay. This is the feature pro-

vided by zone selective interlocking.

Digitrip trip units include this option.

Zone selective interlocking is a com-

munication signal between trip units

applied on upstream and downstream

breakers. Each trip unit must be applied

as if zone selective interlocking were

not employed, and set for selective

coordination.

During fault conditions, each trip

unit which senses the fault sends a

restraining signal to all upstream trip

units. This restraining signal results in

causing the upstream trip to continue

timing as it is set. In the absence of a

restraining signal, the trip unit trips the

associated breaker with no intentional

time delay, minimizing damage to the

fault point. This restraining signal is

a very low level. To minimize the

potential for induced noise, and

provide a low impedance interface

between trip units, twisted pair con-

ductors are utilized for interconnection.

Ground fault and short delay pickup

on Digitrip Trip Units have zone

selective interlocking.

Zone selective interlocking may be

applied as a type of bus differential

protection. It must be recognized,

however, that one must accept the

minimum pickup of the trip unit for

sensitivity.

It must also be recognized that not

all systems may be equipped with

zone selective interlocking. Systems

containing multiple sources, or where

the direction of power ﬂow varies,

require special considerations, or may

not be suitable for this feature. Digitrip

zone interlocking has been tested with

up to three levels with up to 20 trip

units per level.

Home

TOC

Index

21.1-12

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

Application Data Sheet 0584

Figure 21.1-7. Magnum DS Breaker Sensor Selection Guide for Resistance Welding Applications

15000

10000

5000

2000

500

200

100

During-Weld Amperes (rms)

Sensor Rating,

Amperes

4000

3200

2500

2000

1600

1200

800

600

400

300

250

3 4 5 6 7 8 20 30 40 50 60910

Percent Duty Cycle

1000

5000

200

Resistance Welding

The application of Eaton’s Cutler-

Hammer Magnum DS circuit breakers

to resistance welding circuits is shown

in Figure 21.1-7 of the Sensor Selection

Guide. Sensor ratings only are given;

the breaker frame must be selected as

required for interrupting ratings.

The Magnum DS microprocessor-based

true rms sensing devices have a ther-

mal memory and are well suited for this

service. The thermal memory functions

prevent exceeding the breaker and

cable maximum permissible thermal

energy level. The circuit also replicates

time dissipation of thermal energy.

The size of the thermal memory is

30 T (In / In)2 unit Amperes2 seconds. It

ﬁlls at a rate of (iw / In)2 unit Amperes2

seconds/second, trips at 30T seconds,

and empties at the rate of (In / In)2 unit

Amperes2 seconds/second, where:

T=Long Time Delay Setting in

seconds (range is 2-24 seconds)

iw= rms value of the welding

current in amperes

In= Rating plug current value

in amperes

The memory is ﬁlled during the weld

and empties during the non-welding

period of the duty cycle.

These welding applications are based

on long delay and instantaneous trip

devices with the following settings.

The long time delay setting is based

on the weld amperes and duty cycle.

Instantaneous trip setting is two times

the average weld amperes (weld

amperes times percent duty cycle)

or higher.

Note: Making Current Release (MCR)

may prevent closing the breaker during

a welding cycle.

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.2-1

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

General Description

Sheet 0585

Contents

DSII/DSLII

General Description . . . . . . . .

21.2-1

Current Limiters (DSLII) . . . . .

21.2-3

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.2-4

Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.2-4

Standard Control Diagram . . . .

21.2-4

Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.2-5

Application Data. . . . . . . . . . 21.2-9

Type DSII Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers

DSII with 910 Trip Unit

Type DSII Low Voltage Power Circuit

Breakers provide:

■100% rated, fully selective

protection.

■Integral microprocessor-based

breaker tripping systems.

■Two-step stored-energy breaker

closing.

And many other features for coordi-

nated, safe, convenient, trouble-free

and economical control and protection

of low voltage distribution systems.

Maximum Ratings

■600 Vac.

■5000 amperes continuous.

■

200,000 amperes short circuit capacity.

Type DSII Circuit Breaker Features

Protection During Levering Operation.

When levering the breaker between

the connected, test and disconnected

positions, the operator is protected by

a steel barrier (faceplate) from contact

with live parts.

Two-Step Stored Energy Closing

Mechanism. Spring charging (1) and

spring release to close breaker (2) are

independent operations, and always

give positive control of the instant

of closing.

Motor Operated Stored-Energy

Closing Mechanisms. Supplied on

electrically operated breakers. Stan-

dard control voltages are 48, 125 and

250 dc, and 120 and 240 ac.

Remote Closing and Tripping. Can be

accomplished with manually operated

breakers by charging the closing mech-

anism manually, then closing and

tripping it remotely through electric

spring release and shunt trip coils;

available as optional attachments.

Digitrip RMS Integral Microprocessor-

Based Breaker Overcurrent Trip

Systems. Provides maximum reliability,

true rms sensing as standard, excellent

repeatability, and requires minimum

maintenance. No external control source

is required.

Change in Trip Rating. The overcurrent

trip pickup range is established by a

combination of trip unit rating plugs

and the rating of the current sensors

on the breaker.

Interphase Barriers on Breakers.

Provide maximum insulation security.

The barriers are easily removable for

breaker inspection.

Provision for Padlocking. All breakers

include provision for padlocking open

to prevent electrical or manual closing.

This padlocking also secures the breaker

in the connected, test or disconnected

position by preventing levering.

Ease of Inspection and Maintenance.

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Type DSII

breakers are designed for maximum

accessibility and the utmost ease of

inspection and maintenance.

Two-Step Stored-Energy Closing

Two-step stored energy closing gives

operator positive control of closing after

spring mechanism is charged. Breaker

can’t close while still being charged.

Operation is optional — full manual,

full electric, or manual charge and

electric close.

On manual breakers, the spring

mechanism is manually charged by

one downward stroke of the lever

without pumping, and released by the

mechanical “push-to-close” release

button. On electrically operated

breakers, the mechanism is normally

charged and released electrically, but

can be charged manually by pumping

the charging lever 10 to 12 times and

released mechanically.

An interlock discharges the closing

springs as the breaker is removed

from the compartment. The system

is patterned after 5 kV and 15 kV

Metal-Clad switchgear.

Home

TOC

Index

21.2-2

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

General Description Sheet 0586

Arc Chute

There are three basic means of

extinguishing an arc: lengthening

the arc path; cooling by gas blast or

contraction; deionizing or physically

removing the conduction particles

from the arc path. It was the discovery

by Westinghouse of this last method

which made the ﬁrst large power air

circuit breaker possible.

The DE-ION principle is incorporated

in all of these circuit breakers. This

makes possible faster arc extinction

for given contact travel; ensures

positive interruption and minimum

contact burning.

Levering Mechanism

The worm gear levering mechanism is

self-contained on the breaker drawout

element and engages slots in the

breaker compartment. A removable

crank is used to lever the breaker

between the Connected-Test-

Disconnected and Removed positions.

Mechanical interlocking is arranged so

that levering cannot be accomplished

unless the breaker is in the opened

position.

Stored-Energy Mechanism

A cam-type closing mechanism closes

the breaker. It receives its energy from a

spring which can be charged by a manual

handle on the front of the breaker or by

a universal electric motor.

Release of the stored energy is accom-

plished by manually depressing a bar

on the front of the breaker or electri-

cally energizing a releasing solenoid.

Contacts

All Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer air circuit

breakers have solid block, silver

tungsten, inlaid main contacts.

This construction ensures lasting

current-carrying ability, which is not

seriously impaired even after repeated

fault interruptions or repeated

momentary overload.

The main contacts are of the butt type

and are composed of a multiplicity of

ﬁngers to give many points of contact

without alignment being critical.

DSII Breaker Pole Unit DSII Breaker Rear View

Arcing

Contact Spring Stationary Arcing

Contacts

Molded Base

Stationary Main

Contact Fingers

Moving Contact

Assembly

Insulating Link

Lock Nut

Insulating

Link

Moving

Arcing

Contact

Interphase

Barriers Secondary

Disconnecting

Contacts

Levering

Device Arm

(Connected

Position)

Main Disconnecting

Contacts

Sensors

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.2-3

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

General Description

Sheet 0587

Type DSLII Limiter Type Air Circuit Breakers

Application

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Type DSLII

breakers are coordinated combinations

of Type DSII breakers and series

connected current limiters. They are

intended for applications requiring the

overload protection and switching func-

tions of air circuit breakers on systems

whose available fault currents exceed

the interrupting rating of the breakers

alone, and/or the withstand ratings of

“downstream” circuit components.

Sizes and Arrangements

Types DSLII-308 (800 ampere),

DSLII-516 (1600 ampere), and

DSLII-620 (2000 ampere) frame

breakers include the limiters

integrally mounted on the drawout

breaker elements in series with the

upper terminals.

Current limiters used in Types

DSLII-632 and DSLII-840 combinations

are mounted on separate drawout

trucks in an additional equal size

compartment.

Scope of Fault Interruption

With properly selected and coordi-

nated limiters, it is expected that

the breaker itself will clear overloads

and faults within its interrupting

rating, leaving the limiters intact and

undamaged. The limiters will provide

fast interruption of fault currents

beyond the breaker rating, up to

a maximum of 200,000 amperes

symmetrical. Thus, on overloads

and faults within the breaker interrupt-

ing rating, the breaker protects the

limiters; on higher fault currents

exceeding the breaker rating, the

limiters protect the breaker.

Protection Against Single Phasing

Loads are protected against single

phase operation by interlock arrange-

ments which trip the circuit breaker

whenever any one limiter blows. The

breaker cannot be reclosed on a live

source until there are three unblown

limiters in the circuit.

On the Types DSLII-308, DSLII-516

and DSLII-620 breakers, the primaries

of small auxiliary transformers are

connected in parallel with the limiters.

The voltage between the ends of an

unblown limiter is zero, but when any

limiter blows, the associated trans-

former is energized and (1) operates

an indicator identifying the blown fuse

and (2) picks up a solenoid which raises

the breaker trip bar, holding the breaker

mechanically trip-free.

The DSLII-632 and DSLII-840 combina-

tions with separately mounted limiters

operate on the same principle except

that the solenoid operates a micro-switch

which trips the breaker electrically

through a shunt trip coil.

Safety Features

The integral fuses on Types DSLII-308,

DSLII-516 and DSLII-620 breakers are

inaccessible until the breaker is com-

pletely withdrawn from its compartment,

thereby ensuring complete isolation.

Likewise, the Types DSLII-632 and

DSLII-840 fuses are inaccessible until

the separate fuse truck is completely

withdrawn and the fuses isolated. The

fuse truck is key interlocked with the

breaker to prevent withdrawal or inser-

tion unless the breaker is locked open.

DSLII-620 Front View DSLII-620 Rear View

Home

TOC

Index

21.2-4

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

General Description — Accessories/Trip Units Sheet 0588

Optional Breaker Attachments

and Accessories

A. Shunt trip on manually operated

breakers, for any standard control

voltage.

B. Auxiliary contacts on manually

or electrically operated breakers.

Maximum of ﬁve normally open

and ﬁve normally closed contacts

are available on any breaker,

manually or electrically operated.

The contact rating is 10 amperes.

C. Compartment position switch, six

or 12 contacts, actuated by move-

ment of drawout breaker between

the connected and test positions.

Most common uses are for discon-

necting remote control circuits of

electrically operated breaker, and

for bypassing “b” interlocking

auxiliary contacts, when breaker

is withdrawn to test position.

D. Undervoltage trip (ac and dc

available). Acts to trip the breaker

when the voltage on its solenoid

coil is insufﬁcient to restrain a

spring-loaded core. The dropout

point is within 30 to 60% of the

nominal coil voltage and is not

adjustable. Available as either

instantaneous or time delay type.

The time delay is within two to

seven seconds after zero voltage

occurs, and is not adjustable. The

device automatically resets when

the breaker opens; approximately

one minute is required for reset-

ting of the time delay type.

E. Overcurrent trip switch (OTS).

A latching type switch with two

independent contacts either

normally open or normally closed.

Operates only when the breaker is

tripped automatically on an over-

load or fault condition. It may be

used for alarm and/or interlocking

circuits. Resetting is done by a

pushbutton on the breaker faceplate,

or by a remote switch through an

optional reset coil.

F. Electric Lockout (optional on

manual breakers). In order to close

the breaker after manually charg-

ing the closing mechanism, it is

necessary to operate an electrical

pushbutton on the breaker face-

plate. This pushbutton is wired-

out to the secondary contacts so

it may be wired in series with any

required external interlocking.

The mechanical “push-to-close”

bar is made inoperative when

the breaker is in the connected

position.

G. Electric close release on manually

operated breakers, for any standard

control voltage. Breaker can be

closed by remote control switch

or pushbutton after the closing

spring is manually charged.

H. Operation counter.

I. Latch check switch.

Electronic Trip Units

Eaton offers the most comprehensive

range of electronic trip units in the

industry for power circuit breakers.

Digitrip electronic trip units are ac

devices that employ microprocessor-

based technology that provides a true

rms current sensing means for proper

correlation with thermal characteristics

of conductors and equipment. The pri-

mary function of the Digitrip electronic

trip unit is to provide circuit protection.

This is achieved by analyzing the sec-

ondary current signals received from

the circuit breaker current sensors

and initiating trip signals to the circuit

breaker trip unit when preset current

levels and time delay settings are

exceeded. By sampling the current

waveform at various points on the

wave and calculating true rms current,

the Digitrip is able to reduce nuisance

tripping events due to non-sinusoidal

wave shapes.

Electronic trip units are applied to

distribution systems when high stan-

dards of protection and coordination

are called for. In addition, electronic

trip units can provide further enhanced

features such as alarming, diagnostics,

system monitoring and communications.

Cutler-Hammer rms sensing trip

units for power breakers fall into two

main categories:

■Front adjustable trip units:

Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810, 910.

■Programmable trip units:

Digitrip OPTIM 750, 1050.

For additional information on trip units

see Section 21.4.

Figure 21.2-1. Standard Control Diagram for Type DSII Electrically Operated Breaker,

in DSII Switchgear, for ac or dc Control Source

Legend

LS — Limit Switch for Closing Spring

MOT — Motor for Spring Charging

SH TR — Shunt Trip

SR — Spring Release

Y— Anti-Pump Relay

Description of Operation

1 — Motor is energized through LS contact.

2 — Motor runs and charges Closing Spring.

3 — When Closing Spring fully charged, LS

contacts reverse.

4 — CIosing CS-C contact energizes SR Coil

through Y, LS & “b” contacts.

5 — When Breaker closes, “b” opens and Y

Coil is energized in series with SR Coil.

6 — Y contact opens to open SR Coil circuit

& prevent pumping should breaker

open while CS-C is held closed. Y Coil

has very low drop-out voltage.

7 — LS contacts reverse and motor

recharges closing springs.

SR MOT SHTR

CS (or PB)

Close CS (or PB)

Trip

Ind.

Lts.

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.2-5

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

Technical Data

Sheet 0589

DSII Ratings

Table 21.2-1. Interrupting Ratings of Type DSII Breakers

Short circuit ratings of non-automatic breakers except the DSII-840 and DSII-850 which are 65,000.

Table 21.2-2. Digitrip RMS Adjustable Trip Settings

I2t Response.

Note: In= Rating Plug Value

Ir= Long Delay Pickup Setting x In.

Table 21.2-3. Interrupting Ratings of Type DSLII Breakers

Table 21.2-4. Control Voltages and Currents

Note: Motor currents are running currents; inrush is approximately 400%. Motor running time

to charge spring approximately 5 seconds.

Table 21.2-5. Estimated Heat Loss Per Breaker

Breaker

Type Frame

Size,

Amperes

Ratings, rms Symmetrical Amperes

Interrupting Rating Short Time Rating 

208-240 V 480 V 600 V 208-240 V 480 V 600 V

DSII-308

DSII-508

DSII-608

800

42,000

65,000

30,000

50,000

65,000

30,000

42,000

50,000

30,000

50,000

65,000

30,000

50,000

65,000

30,000

42,000

50,000

DSII-516

DSII-616

DSII-620

1600

2000

65,000

50,000

65,000

42,000

50,000

65,000

50,000

65,000

42,000

50,000

DSII-632

DSII-840

DSII-850

3200

4000

5000

85,000

130,000

65,000

85,000

65,000

85,000

65,000

85,000

65,000

85,000

65,000

85,000

Time/Current

Characteristic Pickup

Setting Pickup Point

(see note) Time Band,

Seconds

Long Delay 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8,

0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1.0 In Times

Long Delay Setting 2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 24

(at 6 times pickup value)

Instantaneous 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6

M1=8, M2=12 In Times

Instantaneous Setting —

Short Delay 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6

S1=8, S2=10 Ir Times

Short Delay Setting 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5

(Flat Response)

0.1 , 0.3 , 6.5 

Ground Fault A (.25), B (.3), C (.35),

D (.4), E (.5), F (.6),

H (.75), K (1.0)

(1200A Maximum)

In Times

Ground Fault Setting 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5

(Flat Response)

0.1 , 0.3 , 0.5

Type DSLII-308 DSLII-516 DSLII-620 DSLII-632 DSLII-840

Frame Size, Amperes 800 1600 2000 3200 4000

Maximum Interrupting Rating,

rms Symmetrical Amperes,

System Voltage 600 or Below

200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000

Control

Voltage 48 dc 125 dc 250 dc 120 ac 240 ac

Close current (SR), ampere

Shunt trip current, ampere

Spring charge motor ampere

5.0

7.5

2.0

3.0

1.0

1.5

3.0

2.0

3.0

2.0

1.0

1.5

Control voltage range:

Close —

Trip — 38 – 56

28 – 56 100 – 140

70 – 140 200 – 280

140 – 280 104 – 127

60 – 127 208 – 254

208 – 254

Breaker Type Watts

DSII-308 (DSLII-308)

DSII-516 (DSLII-516)

DSII-620 (DSLII-620)

400 (600)

1000 (1500)

1500 (2250)

DSII-632

DSII-840

DSII-850

2400

3000

4700

DSII-FT32

DSII-FT40 3600

4500

Maximum voltages at which the inter-

rupting ratings in Table 21.2-1 apply are:

Table 21.2-6. Maximum Voltage Rating

These interrupting ratings are based

on the standard duty cycle consisting

of an opening operation, a 15-second

interval and a close-open operation,

in succession, with delayed tripping

in case of short-delay devices.

The standard duty cycle for short-time

ratings consists of maintaining the rated

current for two periods of 1/2 second

each, with a 15-second interval of zero

current between the two periods.

Table 21.2-7. Available Sensor Ratings for

Digitrip RMS

Table 21.2-8. Available Digitrip RMS Rating

Plugs Marked 50/60 Hertz

2000 ampere is the only plug available for

DSLII-620.

Note: The rating plug is for 50 and 60 Hz

applications. Rating plugs are not inter-

changeable with 60 Hz or 50 Hz only

rating plugs.

System

Voltage Maximum

Voltage

208 or 240

480

600

254

508

635

Breaker

Type Frame

Size,

Amperes

Sensor

Ratings,

Amperes

DSII-308, DSLII-308,

DSII-508 or

DSII-608

800 200, 300, 400,

600, 800

DSII-516, DSLII-516

or DSII-616 1600 200, 300, 400,

600, 800, 1200,

1600

DSII-620 2000 200, 300, 400,

600, 800, 1200,

1600, 2000

DSLII-620

DSII-632, DSLII-632

DSII-840, DSLII-840

DSII-850

2000

3200

4000

5000

2000

2400, 3200

3200, 4000

5000

Sensor Ratings,

Amperes Plug Rating

in Amperes (In)

200

300

400

100, 200

200, 250, 300

200, 250, 300, 400

600

800

1200

300, 400, 600

400, 600, 800

600, 800, 1000, 1200

1600

2000

2400

800, 1000, 1200, 1600

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000 

1600, 2000, 2400

3200

4000

5000

1600, 2000, 2400, 3000, 3200

2000, 2400, 3200, 4000

3200, 4000, 5000

Home

TOC

Index

21.2-6

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

Technical Data Sheet 0590

The following curves illustrate the ratings,

melting time-current characteristics

and current limiting, or let-through

characteristics, of limiters for Eaton’s

Cutler-Hammer Type DSLII breakers.

The let-through current for a given

limiter application is readily determined

by extending a vertical line from the

applicable maximum available sym-

metrical fault amperes at the bottom

margin to the characteristic line for

the particular limiter, and from this

intersection extending a horizontal line

to the left margin and reading the peak

current. The withstand rating of any

circuit elements protected by the

limiters should be at least equal to

this peak current.

It will be noted that the let-through

current increases with the limiter size

or ampere rating; in other words, the

maximum current limiting effect is

obtained with the smallest size. This

effect is to be expected, since the

resistance decreases as the rating

increases. If the vertical line from the

bottom margin as described in the

previous paragraph does not intersect

the limiter characteristic line, it is

indicated that the available system

fault current is below the “threshold”

current of that limiter, and it will offer

no current limiting effect.

The current limiting principle is

illustrated below:

la= The Available Peak Fault Current

tm= The Melting Time

Ip= The Peak Let-Through Current

ta= The Arcing Time

tc= The Total Interrupting (Clearing)

Time

Figure 21.2-2. Current Limiting

Table 21.2-9. DSLII-632 and DSLII-840

Available Limiters

Breaker

Type Available Limiters,

Amperes

DSLII-632

DSLII-840 2500, 3000, 4000

2500, 3000, 4000, 5000

tmta

Limiter Selection

The selection of a suitable limiter

rating for a given application is

generally governed by a choice of

the following types of protection:

A. Maximum protection of “down-

stream” components. Type DSLII

breakers are often used for this

purpose even when the maxi-

mum available fault currents are

within the interrupting rating of

the corresponding Type DSII

unfused breakers.

B. Protection of the circuit breaker only.

Case A would tend to use the smallest

available limiter; Case B the largest.

When downstream protection is

required, the selection is usually

a compromise, since certain small

limiters cannot be coordinated with

the breaker to avoid nuisance blowing

on overloads or small and moderate

short circuits.

Minimum, recommended, and maxi-

mum limiter sizes for Eaton’s Cutler-

Hammer Types DSLII-308, DSLII-516,

and DSLII-620 breakers are given

in table.

Table 21.2-10. DSLII Limiter Selection

For use only when protection of downstream equipment is required. Not completely coordinated

with breaker to avoid nuisance blowing.

Lowest rating which can be coordinated with breaker to minimize nuisance blowing.

Highest available ratings, for protection of breaker only.

Table 21.2-11. Sensor, Plug and Limiter Selection

2000 ampere is the only plug available for DSLII-620.

3000 ampere is the only limiter available for DSLII-620.

Breaker

Type Sensor Rating,

Amperes Limiter Rating, Amperes

Minimum Recommended Maximum 

DSLII-308

200

300

400

250

400

600

1200

2000

DSLII-308

DSLII-516

600

800

600

800

1200

800

1200

1600

2000

3000

DSLII-516

DSLII-620

800

1200

1600

2000

1000

2000

—

2000

2500

3000

—

DSII

Breakers Sensor Rating,

Amperes Plug Rating,

Amperes Limiter Rating, Amperes

(Applicable only to DSLII Breakers)

308, 508,

608 200

300

400

600

800

100, 200

200, 250, 300

200, 250, 300, 400

300, 400, 600

400, 600, 800

250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1200, 1600, 2000

400, 600, 800, 1200, 1600, 2000

600, 800, 1200, 1600, 2000

800, 1200, 1600, 2000

1200, 1600, 2000

516, 616 200

300

400

600

800

1200

1600

100, 200

200, 250, 300

200, 250, 300, 400

300, 400, 600

400, 600, 800

600, 800, 1000, 1200

800, 1000, 1200, 1600

800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000

2000, 2500, 3000

3000

620 200

300

400

600

800

1200

1600

2000

100, 200

200, 250, 300

200, 250, 300, 400

300, 400, 600

400, 600, 800

600, 800, 1000, 1200

800, 1000, 1200, 1600

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000 

Not Applicable

3000 

632 2400

3200 1600, 2000, 2400

1600, 2000, 2400, 3000, 3200 2500, 3000, 4000

2500, 3000, 4000

840 3200

4000 1600, 2000, 2400, 3200

2000, 2400, 3200, 4000 2500, 3000, 4000, 5000

2500, 3000, 4000, 5000

850 5000 3200, 4000, 5000 Not Applicable

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.2-7

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

Technical Data

Sheet 0591

Figure 21.2-3. DSLII-308 Average Melting Time-Current Characteristics

Figure 21.2-4. DSLII-516 and DSLII-620 Average Melting

Time-Current Characteristics

DSL-420 and DSLII-620 — use only 3000 limiter.

Figure 21.2-5. DSLII-308 Let-Through Characteristics

Figure 21.2-6. DSLII-516 and DSLII-620 Let-Through Characteristics

DSL-420 and DSLII-620 — use only 3000 limiter.

Limiter Ampere Rating

250

300

400

600

800

1200

1600

2000

1000

500

300

200

100

175

210

400

900

800

700

600

.05

.03

.02

.01

.04

.09

.08

.07

.06

1000

500

300

200

100

400

900

800

700

600

.05

.03

.02

.01

.04

.09

.08

.07

.06

SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES

TIME IN SECONDS

689 60

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10,000

310

50403020

89 60

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

900

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

10,000

800

9000

167

Type DSL-206 Limiters — For DSL-206 and DSLII-308 Breakers

Ref. Curve No. 639771

Supersedes AD 36-783

dated April 1990

January 1997

Limiter Ampere Rating

800

1000

1200

1600

2000

2500

3000

1000

500

300

200

100

175

210

400

900

800

700

600

.05

.03

.02

.01

.04

.09

.08

.07

.06

1000

500

300

200

100

400

900

800

700

600

.05

.03

.02

.01

.04

.09

.08

.07

.06

SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES

TIME IN SECONDS

689 60

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10,000

17543210

50403020689 60

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

900

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

10,000

9000

800

Type DSL-416 Limiters — For DSL-416, DSLII-516, DSL-420 

and DSLII-620  Breakers

Ref. Curve No. 639431

Supersedes AD 36-783

dated April 1990

January 1997

400,000

300,000

200,000

100,000

90,000

80,000

70,000

60,000

50,000

40,000

30,000

20,000

10,000

9000

8000

7000

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

200,000

100,000

90,000

80,000

70,000

60,000

50,000

40,000

30,000

20,000

10,000

9000

8000

7000

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

AVAILABLE CURRENT, RMS SYMMETRICAL AMPERES

MAXIMUM PEAK LET-THROUGH CURRENT, AMPS

AMPERE

RATING

2000

1600

1200

800

600

400

300

250

Maximum Peak Current Circuit can Produce

Type DSL-206 Limiters — For DSL-206 and DSLII-308 Breakers

Ref. Curve No. 639772

Supersedes AD 36-783

dated April 1990

January 1997

400,000

300,000

200,000

100,000

90,000

80,000

70,000

60,000

50,000

40,000

30,000

20,000

10,000

9000

8000

7000

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

200,000

100,000

90,000

80,000

70,000

60,000

50,000

40,000

30,000

20,000

10,000

9000

8000

7000

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

AVAILABLE CURRENT, RMS SYMMETRICAL AMPERES

MAXIMUM PEAK LET-THROUGH CURRENT, AMPS

AMPERE

RATING

3000

2500

2000

1600

1200

1000

800

Maximum Peak Current Circuit can Produce

Type DSL-416 Limiters — For DSL-416, DSLII-516, DSL-420 

and DSLII-620  Breakers

Ref. Curve No. 639432

Supersedes AD 36-783

dated April 1990

January 1997

Home

TOC

Index

21.2-8

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

Technical Data Sheet 0592

Figure 21.2-7. DSLII-632 and DSLII-840 Average Melting

Time-Current Characteristics Figure 21.2-8. DSLII-632 and DSLII-840 Let-Through Characteristics

Ampere Rating Limiter

2500

3000

4000

5000

100

175

210

.05

.03

.02

.01

.04

.09

.08

.07

.06

100

.05

.03

.02

.01

.04

.09

.08

.07

.06

SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES

TIME IN SECONDS

689 60

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10,000

17543210

50403020689 60

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

900

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

10,000

800

9000

Type DSL-632 Limiters — For DSL-632, and DSLII-632 Breakers

Type DSL-840 Limiters — For DSL-840, and DSLII-840 Breakers

Ref. Curve No. 705503

Supersedes AD 36-783

dated April 1990

January 1997

400,000

300,000

200,000

100,000

90,000

80,000

70,000

60,000

50,000

40,000

30,000

20,000

10,000

9000

8000

7000

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

200,000

100,000

90,000

80,000

70,000

60,000

50,000

40,000

30,000

20,000

10,000

9000

8000

7000

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

AVAILABLE CURRENT, RMS SYMMETRICAL AMPERES

MAXIMUM PEAK LET-THROUGH CURRENT, AMPS

AMPERE

RATING

5000

4000

3000

2500

Maximum Peak Current Circuit can Produce

Type DSL-632 Limiters — For DSL-632, and DSLII-632 Breakers

Type DSL-840 Limiters — For DSL-840, and DSLII-840 Breakers

Ref. Curve No.

705504Supercedes AD

36-783

dated April 1990

January 1997

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.2-9

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

Application Data

Sheet 0593

Application

Standards

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer DSII circuit

breakers meet or exceed all applicable

requirements of ANSI Standards

C37.13, C37.17, C37.50 and CSA.

System Voltage and Frequency

DSII breakers are designed for opera-

tion on ac systems only, 60 Hz or 50 Hz,

635 volts maximum.

Continuous Current Ratings

Unlike transformers, generators and

motors, circuit breakers are maximum-

rated devices and have no built-in

temporary overload current ratings.

Consequently, it is vital that each

application takes into consideration

the maximum anticipated current

demand, initial and future, including

temporary overloads.

The continuous rating of any DSII

breaker is limited to the sensor rating, or

the frame size current rating, whichever

is the lesser. For instance, a DS-616 1600

ampere frame breaker with 800 ampere

sensors has a maximum continuous

rating of 800 amperes, but the same

breaker with 1600 ampere sensors is

limited to 1600 amperes maximum.

All current ratings are based on a

maximum ambient air temperature

of 40°C (104°F).

Ambient Temperature

The temperature of the air surrounding

the enclosure should be within the

limits of:

-30°C (-22°F) to +40°C (104°F).

Altitude

The breakers are applicable at their

full voltage and current ratings up to a

maximum altitude of 6,600 feet (2,012 m)

above sea level. When installed at

higher altitudes, the ratings are subject

to the following correction factors in

accordance with ANSI C37.20.1:

Table 21.2-12. Altitude Derating Factors

Unusual Environmental and

Operating Conditions

Special attention should be given to

applications subject to the following

conditions:

1. Damaging or hazardous fumes,

vapors, etc.

2. Excessive or abrasive dust.

For such conditions, it is generally

recommended that the switchgear

be installed in a clean, dry room, with

ﬁltered and/or pressurized clean air.

This method permits the use of standard

indoor switchgear and avoids the de-

rating effect of non-ventilated enclosures.

3. Salt spray, excessive moisture,

dripping, etc.

Drip shields in equipment rooms and

space heaters in indoor switchgear,

or outdoor weatherproof enclosures,

may be indicated, depending upon

the severity of the conditions.

4. Excessively high or low ambient

temperatures.

For ambient temperatures exceeding

40°C, and based on a standard temper-

ature rise of 65°C, the continuous current

ratings of breaker frame sizes, and also

buses, current transformers, etc., will be

subject to a derating factor calculated

from the following formula:

Circuit breakers are not adversely

affected by very low outdoor ambient

temperatures, particularly when

energized and carrying load currents.

The standard space heaters in

weatherproof switchgear will raise

the temperature slightly and prevent

condensation.

Electrical components such as relays

and instruments, however, must be

applied within the manufacturer’s

speciﬁed limits.

5. Exposure to seismic shock.

DSII assemblies and breakers have

been certiﬁed for applications through

UBC Zone 4 and for the California

Building Code. Assembly modiﬁca-

tions are required, so such conditions

must be speciﬁed.

6. Abnormally high frequency

of operation.

In line with above, a lesser number

of operations between servicing, and

more frequent replacement of parts,

may be indicated.

Altitude Voltage

Correction Current

Correction

Feet Meters

6,600

7,000

7,500

8,000

2,012

2,134

2,286

2,438

1.000

.989

.976

.963

1.000

.998

.995

.993

8,500

9,000

9,500

10,000

2,591

2,743

2,896

3,048

.950

.933

.917

.900

.990

.987

.983

.980

10,500

11,000

11,500

12,000

3,200

3,353

3,505

3,658

.883

.867

.850

.833

.977

.973

.970

.967

12,500

13,000 3,810

3,962 .817

.800 .963

.960

105°C°Total – Special Ambient, °C

105°C°Total – 40°C°Standard Ambient

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Home

TOC

Index

21.2-10

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

Application Data Sheet 0594

Application

Feeder Breakers — General

Circuit breakers for feeder circuit

protection may be manually or

electrically operated, with long and

short delay or long delay and instanta-

neous type trip devices, and trip

settings, as required for the speciﬁc

circuit and load requirements.

General purpose feeder breakers,

such as for lighting circuits, are usually

equipped with long delay and instanta-

neous trip devices, with the long delay

pickup set for the maximum load

demand in the circuit. Where arcing

fault protection is required, the instan-

taneous trip setting should be as low

as practicable consistent with inrush

requirements.

Motor Starting Feeder Breakers

These breakers are usually electrically

operated, with long delay and instan-

taneous tripping characteristics for

motor running, locked rotor and fault

protection. The breaker sensor rating

should be chosen so that the long delay

pickup can be set at 125% of motor full

load current for motors with a 1.15

service factor, or at 115% for all other

motors. Contactors are recommended

for this application when there are a

number of daily operations involved.

When system short circuits are less

than 40 times the motor full load current,

the motor breaker tripping characteristic

should include a short delay character-

istic for greater fault protection.

Repetitive Duty

Repetitive breaker opening and clos-

ing, such as in frequent motor starting

and stopping, are covered by ANSI

standards C37.13 and C37.16. These

standards list the number of opera-

tions between servicing (adjusting,

cleaning, lubrication, tightening, etc.)

and the total numbers of operations

under various conditions without

requiring replacement of parts, for

the various breaker frame sizes.

For motor starting duty, with closing

starting currents up to 600% and opening

running currents up to 100% of the

breaker frame size, at 80% power

factor or higher, the endurance or

total operations (not requiring parts

replacement) will be as follows:

800 A Frame: 1400 operations

1600 A Frame: 400 operations

The frequency of operation should not

exceed 20 starts in 10 minutes or 30 in

one hour.

Group Motor Feeder Breakers

Typical loads for such circuits are motor

control centers. The feeder breakers

may be either manually or electrically

operated as preferred, and are usually

equipped with long and short delay

trip protection only for coordination

with the individual motor circuit

devices. The minimum long delay

pickup setting should be 115% of the

running current of the largest motor in

the group, plus the sum of the running

circuits of all other motors.

Zone Selective Interlocking

By deﬁnition, a selectively coordinated

system is one where by adjusting trip

unit pickup and time delay settings, the

circuit breaker closest to the fault trips

ﬁrst. The upstream breaker serves two

functions: (1) back-up protection to the

downstream breaker and (2) protection

of the conductors between the upstream

and downstream breakers. These

elements are provided for on Digitrip

trip units.

For faults which occur on the conductors

between the upstream and downstream

breakers it is ideally desirable for the

upstream breaker to trip with no time

delay. This is the feature provided by

zone selective interlocking. Digitrip

trip units may be speciﬁed to utilize

this option.

Zone selective interlocking is a

communication signal between trip

units applied on upstream and down-

stream breakers. Each trip unit must

be applied as if zone selective inter-

locking were not employed, and set

for selective coordination.

During fault conditions, each trip unit

which senses the fault sends a restraining

signal to all upstream trip units. This

restraining signal results in causing

the upstream trip to continue timing as

it is set. In the absence of a restraining

signal, the trip unit trips the associated

breaker with no intentional time delay,

minimizing damage to the fault point.

This restraining signal is a very low level.

To minimize the potential for induced

noise, and provide a low impedance

interface between trip units, a special

secondary connector is added to the

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS

breaker, and twisted pair conductors

are utilized for interconnection. For

this reason, zone selective interlocking

must be speciﬁed.

Ground fault and short delay pickup on

Digitrip Trip Units may be speciﬁed with

zone selective interlocking. Since most

system faults start as arcing ground

faults, zone selective interlocking on

ground fault pickup only is usually

adequate. Zone selective interlocking on

short delay pickup may be utilized where

no ground fault protection is provided.

Zone selective interlocking may be

applied as a type of bus differential pro-

tection. It must be recognized, however,

that one must accept the minimum

pickup of the trip unit for sensitivity.

It must also be recognized that not all

systems may be equipped with zone

selective interlocking. Systems con-

taining multiple sources, or where the

direction of power ﬂow varies, require

special considerations, or may not be

suitable for this feature. Digitrip zone

interlocking has been tested with up

to three levels with up to 20 trip units

per level.

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.2-11

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

Application Data

Sheet 0595

Figure 21.2-9. Type DSII Breaker Sensor Selection Guide for Resistance Welding Applications

15000

10000

5000

2000

500

200

100

During-Weld Amperes (rms)

Sensor Rating,

Amperes

4000

3200

2400

2000

1600

1200

800

600

400

300

200

150

100

3 4 5 6 7 8 20 30 40 50 60910

Percent Duty Cycle

Resistance Welding

The application of Eaton’s Cutler-

Hammer DSII circuit breakers to

resistance welding circuits is shown in

Figure 21.2-9 of the Sensor Selection

Guide. Sensor ratings only are given;

the breaker frame must be selected as

required for interrupting ratings.

The DSII Digitrip microprocessor-based

true rms sensing devices have a thermal

memory and are well suited for this

service. The thermal memory functions

to prevent exceeding the breaker and

cable maximum permissible thermal

energy level. The circuit also replicates

time dissipation of thermal energy.

The size of the thermal memory is

30 T (In / In)2 unit Amperes2 seconds. It

ﬁlls at a rate of (iw / In)2 unit Amperes2

seconds/second, trips at 30T seconds,

and empties at the rate of (In / In)2 unit

Amperes2 seconds/second, where

T=Long Time Delay Setting in

seconds (range is 2 – 24 seconds)

iw= rms value of the welding

current in amperes

In= Rating plug current value

in amperes

The memory is ﬁlled during the weld

and empties during the non-welding

period of the duty cycle.

These welding applications are based

on long delay and instantaneous trip

devices with the following settings.

The long time delay setting is based

on the weld amperes and duty cycle.

Instantaneous trip setting is two times

the average weld amperes (weld

amperes times percent duty cycle)

or higher.

Home

TOC

Index

21.2-12

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Sheet 0596

This page intentionally left blank.

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-1

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

General Description

Sheet 0597

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Contents

General Description

Circuit Breaker Components and Functions . . . . . 21.3-2

Cutler-Hammer Family

Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-3

Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-3

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-3

Current Limiting Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-4

Special Application Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-5

World Standard Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-5

Time Current Trip Curve Characteristics . . . . . . . . 21.3-6

Selection Data

Frame Reference Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-7

Interrupting, Ampere and Voltage Ratings . . . . . . 21.3-7

QUICKLAGT Circuit Breaker Selection Data . . . . . 21.3-12

QUICKLAG Circuit Breaker

Catalog Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-14

Solenoid Operated,

Remote-Controlled Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-15

Circuit Breaker/Frame

Catalog Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-19

Circuit Breaker Selection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-20

Current Limiting Circuit Breaker

Selection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-30

TRI-PAC (Fused) Circuit Breaker

Selection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-31

Earth Leakage Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-33

Motor Circuit Protector Selection Data . . . . . . . . . 21.3-34

Electronic Trip Unit Selection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-44

Molded Case Circuit Breaker Accessories . . . . . . . 21.3-45

Application Information

Voltage, Frequency, Continuous Amperes . . . . . . 21.3-50

Cable Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-50

Circuit Breaker Sizing Considerations . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-51

Motor Branch Circuits/Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-52

Capacitor Protection/Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-53

Transformer Protection/Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-54

Unusual Operating Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-56

Circuit Breaker Temperatures, Ambient . . . . . . . . 21.3-56

Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-56

Welding Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-57

Mining Service Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-57

Engine Generator Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-57

Molded Case Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-57

DC Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-59

400 – 415 Hz Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-60

100% Rated Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-62

Series Rated Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-65

Series Combination Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-68

Panelboard Replacement Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-83

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-2

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

General Description Sheet 0598

General Circuit Breaker Information

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer molded case

circuit breakers are designed to pro-

vide circuit protection for low voltage

distribution systems. They are

described by NEMA as, “. . . a device

for closing and interrupting a circuit

between separable

contacts under both

normal and abnormal

conditions,” and

furthermore as, “. . . a breaker assem-

bled as an integral unit in a supporting

and enclosing housing of insulating

material.” The NEC describes them as,

“A device designed to open and close

a circuit by non-automatic means, and

to open the circuit automatically on a

predetermined overload of current,

without injury to itself when properly

applied within its rating.”

So designed, Cutler-Hammer circuit

breakers protect conductors against

overloads and conductors and con-

nected apparatus, such as motors and

motor starters, against short circuits.

Circuit Breaker Components

and Functions

Being essentially a high interrupting

capacity switch with repetitive elements,

Cutler-Hammer circuit breakers are com-

prised of three main functional compo-

nents. These are: trip elements, operat-

ing mechanism and arc extinguishers.

Trip Elements

The function of the trip element is to trip

the operating mechanism in the event

of a prolonged overload or short circuit

current. To accomplish this, a thermal-

magnetic trip action is provided.

Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

Thermal trip action is achieved through

the use of a bimetal heated by the load

current. On a sustained overload, the

bimetal will deﬂect, causing the operat-

ing mechanism to trip. Because bimetals

are responsive to the heat emitted by

the current ﬂow, they allow a long time

delay on light overloads, yet they have

a fast response on heavier overloads.

Magnetic trip action is achieved through

the use of an electromagnet in series

with the load current. This provides an

instantaneous tripping action when the

current reaches a predetermined value.

Front adjustable magnetic trip elements

are supplied as standard on 250 ampere

frame circuit breakers and above (except

100 and 150 ampere magnetic only

breakers), all other thermal-magnetic

breakers have non-adjustable magnetic

trip elements.

Electronic rms Trip Breakers

Both the overload trip action and the

short circuit trip action of breakers with

Digitrip electronic trip units are achieved

by the use of current transformers and

solid-state circuitry that monitors the

current and initiates tripping through

a ﬂux shunt trip when an overload or

short circuit is present. All multiple

pole circuit breakers have trip elements

in each pole and a common trip bar.

An abnormal circuit condition in any

one pole will cause all poles to open

simultaneously.

Electronic rms trip breakers can

include trip features such as:

■Adjustable long-time pickup.

■Adjustable short-time pickup.

■Adjustable long delay time.

■Adjustable short delay time.

■Adjustable instantaneous pickup.

■Adjustable ground fault pickup.

■Adjustable ground fault delay time.

■Zone selective interlocking.

■Communications.

Trip unit adjustments are made by

setting switches on the front of the trip

unit or by programming the trip unit

electronically.

All electronic rms trip breakers are

equipped with a manual push-to-trip

mechanism.

Operating Mechanism

The function of the operating mecha-

nism is to provide a means of opening

and closing the breaker contacts. All

mechanisms are of the quick-make,

quick-break type and are “trip free.”

“Trip free” mechanisms are designed

so that the contacts cannot be held

closed against an abnormal circuit

condition and are sometimes referred

to as an “overcenter toggle mechanism.”

In addition to indicating whether the

breaker is “on” or “off,” the operating

mechanism handle indicates when the

breaker is “tripped” by moving to a

position midway between the extremes.

This distinct trip point is particularly

advantageous where breakers are

grouped, as in panelboard applications,

because it clearly indicates the faulty

circuit. The operating mechanism con-

tains a positive on feature. In the normal

switching operation, the handle of the

circuit breaker shall not be capable of

being left readily at or near the off position

when the main contacts are closed.

Arc Extinguishers

The function of the DE-ION arc

extinguisher is to conﬁne, divide

and extinguish the arc drawn between

opening breaker contacts. It consists of

specially shaped steel grids isolated

from each other and supported by an

insulating housing. When the contacts

are opened, the arc drawn induces a

magnetic ﬁeld in the grids, which in

turn draws the arc from the contacts

and into the grids. The arc is thus split

into a series of smaller arcs and the

heat generated is quickly dissipated

through the metal. These two actions

result in a rapid removal of ions from

the arc, which hastens dielectric build-

up between the contacts and results in

rapid extinction of the arc.

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-3

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

General Description

Sheet 0599

Cutler-Hammer Family Molded

Case Circuit Breakers

In low voltage distribution systems, there

are many varied applications of molded

case circuit breakers. Eaton offers the

most comprehensive family of molded

case circuit breakers in the industry.

This family of circuit breakers includes:

■Thermal-magnetic trip breakers.

■Electronic rms trip breakers.

■Molded case switches.

■Motor circuit protectors.

■Earth leakage breakers.

■Current limiting breakers.

■Special application breakers.

■World breakers.

Interrupting Ratings

Molded case circuit breakers are avail-

able in various interrupting capacities.

Standard interrupting capacity breakers

are available in both industrial and

replacement circuit breaker lines.

These breakers have interrupting

capacities up to 35 kA at 480 Vac.

High interrupting capacity breakers are

similar to standard interrupting capacity

breakers, but the improved performance

makes these breakers suited for use in

today’s network systems where higher

fault currents exist. These breakers have

interrupting capacities up to 65 kA at

480 Vac.

For applications that call for very high

interrupting ratings, current limiting

high interrupting capacity breakers are

available. These breakers offer true

current limiting characteristics in the

same physical frame size as the high

interrupting capacity version and have

interrupting capacities of 100 kA at

480 Vac.

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Breaker

Cutler-Hammer thermal-magnetic

breakers are general purpose devices

suitable for the majority of breaker

applications and are considered the

industry standard. Available from

15 through 800 amperes, thermal-

magnetic breakers provide accurate

reliable overload and short circuit

protection for conductors and

connected apparatus.

Electronic Trip Breakers

Cutler-Hammer electronic trip break-

ers are generally applied for applica-

tions where high levels of system

coordination are called for. Available

from 70 through 2500 amperes, today’s

electronic trip breakers can provide

superior protection and coordination

as well as system alarms and diagnos-

tics, monitoring and communications.

Molded Case Switches

Cutler-Hammer molded case switches

are UL 1087 devices that have no

thermal protection but do have a self

protecting high magnetic trip setting.

Molded case switches are applied

when a compact high capacity discon-

nect device is called for. Accessories

that can be installed in molded case

circuit breakers are also available for

molded case switches. The most com-

mon application for a molded case

switch would be as a main disconnect

for a panelboard or a loadcenter. Avail-

able from 100 through 2500 amperes,

molded case switches provide a com-

pact disconnect device along with the

added beneﬁts of a molded case circuit

breaker without the thermal protection.

Motor Circuit Protectors

Application ﬂexibility of Cutler-Hammer

motor circuit protectors (Type GMCP/

HMCP/HMCPE) is enhanced by the

higher interrupting ratings and current

limiting characteristics designed into

the line. These devices are available

from 3 – 600 amperes in 63, 100, 150,

250, 400 and 600 A frame sizes.

The motor circuit protectors are

designed for application in individual

motor circuits in combination motor

starter units. Motor circuit protectors

operate on the magnetic principle with

a current sensing element in each pole

to provide short circuit protection.

The motor circuit protector design

permits the most effective protection

possible against low-level faults while

offering circuit breaker convenience,

quick-make quick-break action,

deadfront safety, and prevention

of single phasing.

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

Cutler-Hammer Earth Leakage Breakers

offer Class 1 ground fault protection and

improved ground fault coordination

capability. A Class 1 device can open at

high levels of fault current, while a Class

2 device prevents opening beyond the

contact rating of its interrupting device.

Earth Leakage Breakers are factory

supplied with a single sensor and

ground fault relay built-in. The ground

fault pickup setting is adjustable from

0.03 to 30 amperes in eight steps, and

the ground fault time delay setting

is adjustable from instantaneous to

2.0 seconds.

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-4

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

General Description Sheet 0600

Current Limiting Circuit Breakers

Eaton offers one of the most complete

lines of both fusible and non-fused

current limiting breakers in the industry.

The industrial breakers are available in

current limiting versions with inter-

rupting capacities up to 100 kA at 480 V

without fuses in the same physical size

as standard and high interrupting

capacity breakers. Eaton also manu-

factures both fused and non-fused cur-

rent limiting devices with interrupting

capacities up to 200 kA at 600 Vac.

The current limiting breakers utilize a

reverse loop stationary contact. When

current is ﬂowing through the contacts

of these breakers, the positions of the

reverse loop and moving contact arm

induce opposing magnetic ﬁelds. The

resulting ﬂux lines cause rapid contact

blow-apart under these conditions,

resulting in very high interrupting

capacities and provide current

limiting characteristics.

Current limiting breakers are available

from 15 through 2500 amperes and have

an interrupting rating of 100 kA at 480 V.

These breakers are most commonly

applied when very high (up to 100 kA)

fault levels are available and in series

rating applications where the current

limiting capability of these breakers are

used upstream in series combinations.

Circuit breakers 600 amperes and

below which are current limiting have

frame catalog numbers which end with

the letter “C.” For example, the F-frame

model which is current limiting has a

catalog number FDC. In accordance with

UL circuit breaker marking require-

ments, the nameplate on the breaker

is also labeled “current limiting.”

Current Limit-R Breakers

The Current Limit-R molded case

circuit breaker was developed with

interrupting ratings up to 200,000

amperes at 480 Vac to provide

complete system protection against

faults, including:

1. Overloads, by using inverse time

current tripping characteristics.

2. Low-level short circuits, by using

instantaneous and/or short-time

delay tripping characteristics.

3. High-level short circuits, by using

ultra high-speed, blow-apart,

current limiting contacts.

Current Limit-R circuit breakers can

be used in series with Cutler-Hammer

standard molded case circuit breakers

with listed interrupting ratings as low

as 10,000 amperes in systems capable

of delivering fault currents as high

as 200,000 amperes. The excellent

current limiting properties of the

Current Limit-R breakers completely

protect all Cutler-Hammer downstream

series circuit breakers applied within

their voltage ratings.

The high level current-limiting action

is achieved by the use of special

design, blow-apart contacts. The open-

ing speed of the contacts is ampliﬁed

by the repulsion force in the patented

slot motor to effectively separate the

contacts under high level fault condi-

tions in less than one millisecond. The

rapid rise of arc voltage introduces

impedance into the system, thus limit-

ing the amount of the otherwise avail-

able fault current.

The Current Limit-R current limiting

circuit breakers incorporate all the

advantages and features of conventional

molded case circuit breakers. They are

available in 2- and 3-pole versions in

two physical frame sizes and three

continuous current frame ratings.

The Type FCL has a maximum continuous

current frame rating of 100 amperes. It

is equipped with a conventional, non-

interchangeable, thermal-magnetic-type

trip unit with individual ampere ratings.

The Type LCL is available with frames

having maximum continuous current

ratings of either 250 or 400 amperes.

Overload and low level short circuit pro-

tection is provided by a SELTRONIC

electronic trip unit which uses the indi-

vidual rating plug concept for determin-

ing

the continuous rating of the breaker.

Rating plugs are available with either

ﬁxed or adjustable ampere ratings.

TRI-PAC Breakers

The increase in demand for electrical

power in modern commercial and

industrial buildings has resulted in

electrical services becoming substan-

tially larger. In some low voltage distri-

bution systems, available short circuit

currents can exceed 100,000 symmetrical

rms amperes. Fault currents of this

intensity may exceed the interrupting

ratings of molded case breakers. As a

result, larger expensive circuit inter-

rupting devices which could withstand

the thermal and magnetic stresses

associated with currents of this value

have had to be used. High interrupting

capacity current limiting devices have

been developed which will restrict short

circuit current. If applied correctly, they

may be used in conjunction with the

molded case circuit breakers to provide

adequate and economical protection.

The TRI-PAC breaker was developed

for this application and so named

because it affords TRIple-PACkage pro-

tection with (1) time delay thermal trip,

(2) instantaneous magnetic trip and (3)

current limiting protection, combined

and coordinated in a compact and

economical device. These protective

actions are so coordinated that over-

currents and low magnitude faults are

cleared by the thermal action; normal

short circuits are cleared by the magnetic

action; and abnormal short circuits,

above an established value, are cleared

by the current limiting device. Thus,

unless a severe short circuit occurs,

the current limiter is unaffected and

its replacement is held to a minimum.

TRI-PAC breakers are available in ratings

from 15 through 1600 amperes and

have a UL listed interrupting capacity

of 200,000 amperes at up to 600 Vac

and also have an interrupting capacity

of 100,000 amperes at up to 250 Vdc.

The TRI-PAC breaker offers all of the

advantages of the economical molded

case breaker and the current limiter

is retained, while the disadvantages

of separately mounted devices

are eliminated.

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-5

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

General Description

Sheet 0601

Special Application Breakers

Eaton offers a wide range of special

application molded case circuit breakers.

Special application breakers are break-

ers built with special features to meet

the unique requirements of the special

application as follows. See the applica-

tion data section for further information.

DC Rated Breakers

Breakers are available for use with

ungrounded applications where all

three poles are connected in series.

Rated for up to 600 Vdc, breakers are

available from 15 – 2500 ampere trip

ranges with thermal magnetic trip

units or special low magnetic only

trip devices. Their compact size and

increased interrupting performance

give Eaton the most complete range

of dc breakers in the industry.

Mining Breakers

Cutler-Hammer Mining Circuit Break-

ers have a tradition of proven depend-

ability and reliability in harsh mine

environments, consistently combining

strength and reliability with safe,

efﬁcient operation. The E2G mining

breaker is available in 225 and 400

ampere frames and is designed for

trailing cable applications per MSHA

30 CFR 75. With interrupting ratings

of 14 kA at 1000/577 Vac and rms sens-

ing electronic trip unit, the E2G mining

breaker can be applied to all mining

circuit breaker applications.

Navy/Marine Circuit Breakers

Molded Case Navy Circuit Breakers

provide both overload protection for

conductors and short circuit protection

for all circuit elements such as conduc-

tors, motors and starters. They also serve

as manual disconnecting means as well

as circuit protectors. All Cutler-Hammer

Navy breakers meet applicable Navy/

Marine speciﬁcations for “hi-shock”

and “vibration” requirements.

These manually operated breakers

are rated from 5 to1600 amperes

with interrupting ratings from 1500

to 100,000 amperes.

AFCI Circuit Breakers

An arc-fault circuit interrupter is a

device intended to provide protection

from the effects of arc faults by recog-

nizing characteristics unique to arcing

and by functioning to de-energize the

circuit when an arc fault is detected.

Eaton offers 125 Vac AFCI single-pole,

15 and 20 ampere breakers, plug-in

and bolt-on, to meet Article 210-12

of the 2002 NEC.

Lighting and Industrial Breakers

Recognizing the growing need for high

interrupting requirements on 240V

applications such as loadcenters,

metercenters, metering switchboards,

distribution switchboards and panel-

boards, etc., the Cutler-Hammer family

of lighting and industrial circuit breakers

is designed to meet all applications.

The Cutler-Hammer family of QUICKLAG

miniature circuit breakers is available in

bolt-on, plug-in and cable-in cable-out

conﬁgurations. For molded case circuit

breakers, Eaton offers the GB/GC

design up through 100 amperes and

the ED/EDH/EDC design up through 225

amperes up to 200 kA at 240 volts.

HACR Listed Circuit Breakers

HACR listed circuit breakers are circuit

breakers that have been tested per UL

for use in heating, air conditioning and

refrigeration applications. HACR type

circuit breakers are typically applied as

the protection device for multimotor or

combination loads in a group installa-

tion conﬁguration. Eaton has its family

of QUICKLAG QC miniature breakers

and Series C molded case breaker

frames G, F, J and K listed for HACR

applications.

Engine Generator Circuit Breakers

Engine generator circuit breakers are

designed speciﬁcally for application

on diesel engine powered standby

generator systems. Generator breakers

are equipped with a special trip unit that

provides standard overload protection

with low magnetic short circuit protec-

tion to suit generator applications that

call for close short circuit protection at

low interrupting ratings.

Eaton offers a family of engine generator

circuit breakers in six frames from 15

to 1200 amperes that conform to UL,

CSA and IEC standards.

100% Rated Circuit Breakers

100% rated circuit breakers are tested

inside a minimum size enclosure to

UL 489 for application at 100% of the

breakers continuous current rating.

100% rated circuit breakers are equipped

with electronic trip units and applied

with 90ºC cable rated at 75ºC ampacity.

To apply 100% rated breakers in

switchboards and panelboards, addi-

tional tests are required to meet UL 67

and UL 891. Cutler-Hammer molded

case circuit breaker frames K-, L-, N-

and R-, 70 through 2000 amperes can

be applied at 100% of their rated con-

tinuous current as long as the breaker

is installed in its minimum size enclo-

sure including ventilation. 100% rated

breakers are applied to

distribution sys-

tem to provide installation

cost savings.

The amount of savings that can be

realized is dependent on the application.

Series Rating Circuit Breakers

Series rating is a short circuit interrupt-

ing rating assigned to a combi-nation of

two or more overcurrent devices con-

nected in series. The short circuit inter-

rupting rating of the upstream device

must be equal to or greater than the

available fault current. Downstream

breakers, however, are not fully rated

for the system’s available fault current.

Series combinations must be tested to

UL 489. Series ratings are applied to

distribution systems where short circuit

coordination is not required. The Cutler-

Hammer listing of available series

rating combinations are shown in the

applications section of this document.

World Standard Circuit Breakers

(IEC 947-2)

Molded case circuit breakers meet all

major electrical standards of the

world. There are two branches of the

family tree. One meets applicable UL,

NEMA, CSA and IEC standards and

employs a ﬁxed thermal and ﬁxed or

adjustable magnetic trip. The second

meets

IEC 947-2 and has been assigned

ultimate

and service interrupting rat-

ings, and employs adjustable thermal

and adjustable magnetic trips. The

frame ratings of both types of breakers

are physically interchangeable with

each other. Eaton is the ﬁrst manufac-

turer in the industry to have a true

family of world circuit breakers.

Standards

■Canadian Standards Association

Standard C22.2 No. 5, Service

Entrance and Branch Circuit Breakers.

■National Electrical Manufacturers

Association Standards Publication

Number AB1, Molded Case

Circuit Breakers.

■Underwriters Laboratories

Standard UL 489, Molded Case

Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker

Enclosures, including Marine

Circuit Breakers File E7819.

■Underwriters Laboratories

Standard UL 1087, Molded

Case Switches.

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-6

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

General Description Sheet 0602

Time-Current Trip Curve

Characteristics

Time-current trip curve characteristics

are available in the Molded Case Circuit

Breaker CD-ROM (available on request)

and on the Eaton Web site.

The band curves shown for each

breaker type represent current tripping

limits for the breaker and are within

limits established by Underwriters

Laboratories. For a given current, at

rated ambient, a breaker will clear the

circuit automatically at some total time

within the two extreme values deﬁned

by “maximum” and “minimum” curves.

For example, a 1-pole, 15-ampere

QUICKLAG would trip in no less than

10 seconds and in no more than 150

seconds on a 30-ampere current.

Because of this allowed spread, users

should not specify exact tripping times.

The upper left portions of these curves

show the inverse time delay tripping

of the breakers due to thermal action.

The lower right segments for these

curves portray the magnetic tripping

action of the breakers. In the case of

the front adjustable thermal-magnetic

breakers, the magnetic tripping

elements may be adjusted to trip at

values within a speciﬁc current range.

This adjustment is shown their respec-

tive characteristic tripping curves.

When these breakers leave the factory,

their magnetic trip elements are set at

the high side of their tripping range.

Adjustment downward may be made to

ﬁt the requirements of the installation.

Currents equal to or greater than these

magnetic settings will cause instant

tripping. Curves can be family curves

and are suitable for most applications;

for more accurate applications, a detailed

curve of the particular type and ampere

rating of the breaker should be requested.

The total time taken by a breaker to

clear a fault consists of the mechanical

operating time plus the time of actual

current interruption. Characteristic

time/current curves show total clearing

times. Magnetic only breakers have

no time delay in tripping. The tripping

characteristics of these breakers are

similar to the right-hand portion of

the standard breakers, except with

the vertical lines extended to the top

of the curve.

Figure 21.3-1. Typical Time-Current Curves

CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF CIRCUIT BREAKER RATING

INSTANTANEOUS

PORTION

.5 1 5 10 50 100 500 1000

.01

.05

100

500

1000

5000

10000

LONG TIME

PORTION

MAXIMUM

MINIMUM

INST

ANT

ANEOUS

K-

LONG TIME DELA

CURRENT IN MUL

TIPLES OF RA

TING PLUG OR CURRENT SENSOR

500

000

5000

0000

500

000

5000

0000

TTIME

DELA

T TIME

K-

AMPERE RA

TING

TIME PI

K-

AUL

T PICK-UP

FRAME OR SENSOR RA

TING

GROUND F

AUL

TIME DELA

RAM

GROUND F

AUL

K-

TYPI

AL TIME-

RRENT

CUR

WITH

ADJUST

ABLE

AUL

RAM

Non-Adjustable Thermal-Magnetic

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Solid-State Trip Unit with Adjustable

Phase and Ground Current Settings

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-7

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Selection Guide and Interrupting Ratings

Sheet 0603

Table 21.3-1. Circuit Breaker Frame Reference Guide

Table 21.3-2. Industrial Circuit Breakers

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit.

Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.

Not presently available for panelboard or switchboard mounting.

Current limiting.

Not deﬁned in W-C-375b.

Frame Nominal Size

Amperes Circuit Breaker

Types

Q or B 5 – 125 HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW, QPGF, QPHGF, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP, BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW, QBGF, QBHGF, QBGFEP,

QBHGFEP, QC, QCD, QCF, QCR, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW, QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP

15 – 100

100 – 225

15 – 125

15 – 150

GHB, HGHB, GHBS, GHC, HGHC, GD

ED, EDH, EDC, EHD (100 ampere)

EGB, EGE, EGS, EGH

FDB, FD, HFD, FDC

63 – 250

70 – 250

70 – 400

300 – 600

100 – 600

JGE, JGS, JGH

JDB, JD, HJD, JDC

KDB, KD, CKD, HKD, CHKD, KDC

LDB, LD, CLD, HLD, CHLD, LDC, CLDC

LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC

400 – 800

600 – 1200

800 – 2500

MDLB, MDL, CMDL, HMDLB, HMDL, CHMDL

ND, CND, HND, CHND, NDC, CNDC

RD, CRD, RDC, CRDC

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Continuous

Ampere

Rating at

40°C

No.

Poles

Volts Type

Trip 

Federal

Speciﬁcation

W-C-375b

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

ac dc ac Ratings Volts dc 

120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 125/250

G-Frame

GHB

HGHB

15 – 100

15 – 30

15 – 20

2, 3

120

240

277

277/480

277

125

125/250

125

125/250

125

—

N.I.T. 11a

10b, 11b,

12b, 14b,

15b

12c, 13a, 13b

65,000

—

65,000

—

65,000

—

14,000

25,000

14,000

—

14,000

—

14,000

—

14,000

—

14,000

—

14,000

—

14,000

—

GHBS

GBHS 15 – 30

15 – 20 1, 2

1, 2 277/480

347/600 —

——

N.I.T. —

— 65,000

—65,000

——

—14,000

——

10,000 —

——

—

GD 15 – 50

15 – 100 2

3480

480 125/250

250 N.I.T.

N.I.T. 13b

13b —

——

— 65,000

65,000 —

— 14,000

22,000 —

——

10,000 10,000

—

GHC

HGHC

15 – 100

15 – 30

2, 3

120

240

277

277/480

277

125

125/250

125

125/250

125

N.I.T. 12c, 13a

13b

12c, 13a

13b

65,000

—

65,000

—

65,000

—

14,000

25,000

—

14,000

—

14,000

—

14,000

—

14,000

—

14,000

—

14,000

—

EG Frame 

EGB 15 – 125 1

2, 3, 4 277

480 250 N.I.T. —

— 35,000

——

— 25,000

25,000 18,000

——

18,000 —

—10,000

——

10,000 —

—

EGE 15 – 125 2, 3, 4 600Y/347 250 N.I.T. — — — 35,000 — 25,000 18,000 10,000 10,000 —

EGS 15 – 125 1

2, 3, 4 347

600Y/347 250 N.I.T.

N.I.T. —

—100,000

——

— 85,000

85,000 35,000

——

35,000 —

22,000 35,000

——

35,000 —

—

EGH 15 – 125 1

2, 3, 4 347

600Y/347 250 N.I.T. —

—200,000

——

—100,000

100,000 65,000

——

65,000 —

25,000 42,000

——

42,000 —

—

F-Frame

EDB

EDS

EDH

EDC 

100 – 225

2, 3

240

125

N.I.T.

—

12b

14b

—

22,000

42,000

65,000

100,000

200,000

—

10,000

—

EHD

EHD 15 – 100

15 – 100 1

2, 3 277

480 125

250 N.I.T. 13a

13b —

——

18,000 14,000

——

14,000 —

—10,000

——

10,000 —

—

FDB

FDB 15 – 150

15 – 150 2, 3

4600

600 250

250 N.I.T. 18a

—

——

— 18,000

18,000 —

— 14,000

14,000 14,000

14,000 —

—10,000

10,000 —

—

15 – 225

2, 3

277

600

125

250

N.I.T. 13a

22a



—

65,000

35,000

—

35,000

—

18,000

10,000

—

10,000

—

HFD

15 – 225

2,3

277

600

125

250

N.I.T. 13a

22a



—

100,000

65,000

—

65,000

—

25,000

10,000

—

22,000

—

FDC 

FDC  15 – 225

15 – 225 2, 3

4600

600 250

250 N.I.T. 24a

—

——

—200,000

200,000 —

—100,000

100,000 35,000

35,000 —

—22,000

22,000 —

—

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-8

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Selection Guide and Interrupting Ratings Sheet 0604

Table 21.3-2. Industrial Circuit Breakers (Continued)

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit.

Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.

Not presently available for panelboard or switchboard mounting.

Current limiting.

100% rated.

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Continuous

Ampere Rating

at 40°C

No.

Poles

Volts Type

Trip 

Federal

Speciﬁcation

W-C-375b

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

ac dc ac Ratings Volts dc 

120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 125/250

JG Frame 

JGE

JGS

JGH

63 – 250

2, 3, 4

600

250

I.T.

—

65,000

85,000

100,000

—

25,000

35,000

65,000

18,000

25,000

—

10,000

22,000

—

J-Frame

JDB

HJD

JDC 

70 – 250

2, 3

2, 3, 4

600

250

N.I.T.

I.T.

22a

—

65,000

100,000

200,000

—

35,000

65,000

100,000

18,000

25,000

35,000

—

10,000

22,000

—

K-Frame

DK 250 – 400 2, 3 240 250 N.I.T. 14b — — 65,000 — — — — 10,000 —

KDB

CKD 

HKD

CHKD 

KDC 

100 – 400

2, 3

2, 3, 4

600

250

N.I.T.

I.T.

23a

—

65,000

100,000

200,000

—

35,000

65,000

100,000

25,000

35,000

50,000

—

10,000

22,000

—

L-Frame

LGE

LGS

LGH

LGC

LDB

CLD 

HLD

CHLD 

LDC 

CLDC 

100 – 600

300 – 600

3, 4

2, 3

2, 3, 4

600

250

I.T.

N.I.T.

I.T.

23a

—

65,000

85,000

100,000

200,000

65,000

100,000

200,000

—

35,000

50,000

65,000

100,000

35,000

65,000

100,000

18,000

25,000

35,000

50,000

25,000

35,000

50,000

—

22,000

42,000

22,000

25,000

—

M-Frame

MDL

CMDL 

HMDL

CHMDL 

300 – 800

2, 3

600

250

I.T.

23a

—

65,000

100,000

—

50,000

65,000

25,000

35,000

—

22,000

25,000

—

N-Frame

CND 

HND

CHND 

NDC

CNDC 

600 – 1200

3, 4

600

—

N.I.T.

23A

—

65,000

100,000

200,000

—

50,000

65,000

100,000

25,000

35,000

50,000

—

R-Frame

RD 1600

CRD 1600 

RD 2000

RD 2500

CRD 2000 

RDC 1600

CRDC 1600 

RDC 2000

RDC 2500

CRDC 2000 

800 – 1600

1000 – 2000

1000 – 2500

1000 – 2000

800 – 1600

1000 – 2000

1000 – 2500

1000 – 2000

3, 4

600

—

N.I.T.

24a

25a

—

125,000

200,000

125,000

200,000

—

65,000

100,000

50,000

65,000

—

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-9

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Selection Guide and Interrupting Ratings

Sheet 0605

Table 21.3-2. Industrial Circuit Breakers (Continued)

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit.

Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Continuous

Ampere Rating

at 40°C

No.

Poles

Volts Type

Trip 

Federal

Speciﬁcation

W-C-375b

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

ac dc ac Ratings Volts dc 

120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 125/250

Current Limit-R Current Limiting Circuit Breakers — Non-Fused Type

FCL 15 – 100 2, 3 480 — N.I.T. — — — 200,000 — 150,000 — — — —

LCL 125 – 400 2, 3 600 — N.I.T. — — — 200,000 — 200,000 100,000 — — —

TRI-PAC Current Limiting Circuit Breakers — Fused Type

FB 15 – 100 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T. 16a, 16b, 17a, 26a — — 200,000 — 200,000 200,000 — — 100,000

LA 70 – 400 2, 3 600 250 I.T. 16a, 16b, 17a, 26a — — 200,000 — 200,000 200,000 — — 100,000

NB 300 – 800 2, 3 600 250 I.T. 16b, 17a, 26a — — 200,000 — 200,000 200,000 — — 100,000

PB 600 – 1600 2, 3 600 250 I.T. 17a, 26a — — 200,000 — 200,000 200,000 — — 100,000

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-10

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Selection Guide and Interrupting Ratings Sheet 0606

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers 

Table 21.3-3. Plug-in, Bolt-on, Cable-in/Cable-out

QUICKLAG circuit breakers are suitable for application in relative humidity 0 – 95% noncondensing.

Two-pole dc interrupting ratings based on 2 poles connected in series.

62.5 Vac interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 10 – 50 amperes and 2500 AIC 55 – 100 amperes continuous.

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Circuit

Breaker

Type Code

Continuous

Ampere Rating

at 40°C

Number

of Poles Volts Federal

Speciﬁcation

W-C-375b

Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

ac dc ac Ratings Volts dc 

120 120/240 240 24 – 48 62.5 80

HQP

P10 – 70

10 – 125

10 – 100

2, 3

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

—

10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 12a

10b, 11b, 12b

—

10,000

—

10,000

5,000

—



5,000

—

5,000

—

QPHW

P15 – 70

15 – 125

15 – 100

2, 3

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

—

14a

14b

—

22,000

—

22,000

5,000

—



5,000

—

5,000

—

QHPX

P15 – 70

15 – 100

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

—

42,000

—

42,000

5,000

—



5,000

—

5,000

—

QHPW

P15 – 30

15 – 30

15 – 20

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

—

15a

15b

—

65,000

—

65,000

5,000

—



5,000

—

5,000

—

QPGF

QPGF P, G F 15 – 40

15 – 50 1

2120

120/240 —

—10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 11a, 12a 10,000

——

10,000 —

——

—

QPHGF

QPHGF P, G F 15 – 30

15 – 50 1

2120

120/240 —

—10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 11a, 12a 22,000

——

22,000 —

——

—

QPGFEP

QPGFEP P, GFEP 15 – 40

15 – 50 1

2120

120/240 —

——

—10,000

——

10,000 —

——

—

QPHGFEP

QPHGFEP P, GFEP 15 – 30

15 – 30 1

2120

120/240 —

——

—22,000

22,000 —

——

—

BAB

B10 – 70

10 – 125

10 – 100

2, 3

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

—

10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 12a

10b, 11b, 12b

—

10,000

—

10,000

5,000

—



5,000

—

5,000

—

BABR, BABRS

BABR, BABRS B

B15 – 30

15 – 30 1

2120

120/240 —

——

—10,000

10,000 —

——

—

QBHW

B15 – 70

15 – 125

15 – 100

2, 3

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

—

14a

14b

—

22,000

—

22,000

5,000

—



5,000

—

5,000

—

HBAX

B15 – 70

15 – 100

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

—.

—

42,000

—

42,000

5,000

—



5,000

—

5,000

—

HBAW

B15 – 30

15 – 30

15 – 20

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

—

15a

15b

—

65,000

—

65,000

5,000

—



5,000

—

5,000

—

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-11

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Selection Guide and Interrupting Ratings

Sheet 0607

Table 21.3-3. Plug-in, Bolt-on, Cable-in/Cable-out (Continued)

Two-pole dc interrupting ratings based on 2 poles connected in series.

62.5 Vac interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 10 – 50 amperes and 2500 AIC 55 – 100 amperes continuous.

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Circuit

Breaker

Type Code

Continuous

Ampere Rating

at 40°C

Number

Poles

Volts Federal

Speciﬁcation

W-C-375b

Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

ac dc ac Ratings Volts dc 

120 120/240 240 24 – 48 62.5 80

QBGF

QBGF B, GF 15 – 40

15 – 50 1

2120

120/240 —

—10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 11a, 12a 10,000

——

10,000 —

——

—

QBHGF

QBHGF B, GF 15 – 30

15 – 30 1

2120

120/240 —

—10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 11a, 12a 22,000

——

22,000 —

——

—

QBGFEP

QBGFEP B, GFEP 15 – 40

15 – 50 1

2120

120/240 —

——

—10,000

——

10,000 —

——

—

QBHGFEP

QBHGFEP B, GFEP 15 – 30

15 – 30 1

2120

120/240 —

——

—22,000

22,000 —

——

—

C10 – 70

10 – 100

2, 3, 4

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

—

10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 12a

10b, 11b, 12b

—

10,000

—

10,000

5,000

—



5,000

—

5,000

—

QCD

C10 – 100

10 – 100

15 – 100

120

120/240

240

—

10,000

—

10,000

—

QCF

QCR

C10 – 60

15 – 20

15 – 30

10 – 60

15 – 20

15 – 30

1, 2

2, 3

1, 2

2, 3

120/240

240

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

—

10,000

22,000

—

10,000

22,000

—

10,000

—

10,000

—

10,000

—

3,000



3,000

2,000

3,000

—

QCHW

C15 – 70

15 – 100

2, 3

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

—

14a

14b

—

22,000

—

22,000

5,000

—



5,000

—

5,000

—

QHCX

C15 – 70

15 – 100

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

—

42,000

—

42,000

5,000

—



5,000

—

5,000

—

QHCW

C15 – 30

15 – 30

15 – 20

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

—

15a

15b

—

65,000

—

65,000

5,000

—



5,000

—

5,000

—

QCGF

QCGF C, GF 15 – 40

15 – 50 1

2120

120/240 —

——

—10,000

——

10,000 —

——

—

QCHGF

QCHGF C, GF 15 – 30

15 – 30 1

2120

120/240 —

——

—22,000

——

22,000 —

——

—

QCGFEP

QCGFEP C, GFEP 15 – 40

15 – 50 1

2120

120/240 —

——

—10,000

——

10,000 —

——

—

QCHGFEP

QCHGFEP C, GFEP 15 – 30

15 – 30 1

2120

120/240 —

——

—22,000

——

22,000 —

——

—

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-12

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — QUICKLAG Industrial Breakers Sheet 0608

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

Table 21.3-4. QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

Two-pole interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed.

Type of Breaker Mounting/Electrical Connections

Plug-on Bolt-on

Thermal-Magnetic

HQP, QPHW, QHPX Thermal-Magnetic

QHPW Thermal-Magnetic

QPGF, QPHGF, QPGFEP,

QPHGFEP

Thermal-Magnetic

BAB, QBHW, HBAX Thermal-Magnetic

HBAW

Circuit Breaker Ratings — Continuous Current Rating at 40°C and 0 – 95% Humidity (Noncondensing)

Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts

HQP QHPW QPGF BAB HBAW

5 – 70

10 – 150

10 – 100

2-3

120/240

240

15 – 30

15 – 20 1-2

3120/240

240 15 – 40

15 – 50 1

2120

120/240 5 – 70

10 – 150

10 – 100

2-3

120/240

240

15 – 30

15 – 20 1-2

3120/240

240

QPHW QPHGF QBHW

15 – 70

15 – 125

15 – 100

2-3

120/240

240

15 – 30

15 – 30 1

2120

120/240 15 – 70

15 – 125

15 – 100

2-3

120/240

240

QHPX QPGFEP HBAX

15 – 70

15 – 100

2-3

120/240

240

15 – 40

15 – 50 1

2120

120/240 15 – 70

15 – 100

120/240

240

QPHGFEP

15 – 30

15 – 30 1

2120

120/240

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Per Single-Pole Breaker

WHD W HD WHD WHD WHD

1.00

(25.4) 2.94

(74.6) 2.38

(60.3) 1.00

(25.4) 2.94

(74.6) 2.38

(60.3) 1.00

(25.4) 3.19

(81.0) 2.38

(60.3) 1.00

(25.4) 2.94

(74.6) 2.38

(60.3) 1.00

(25.4) 2.94

(74.6) 2.38

(60.3)

ac Interrupting Ratings — UL Listed Interrupting Ratings Shown (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts Amps I.R. Volts Amps I.R. Volts Amps I.R. Volts Amps I.R. Volts Amps I.R.

HQP QHPW QPGF, QPGFEP BAB HBAW

120/240, 240 10,000 120/240, 240 65,000 120, 120/240 10,000 120/240, 240 10,000 120/240, 240 65,000

QPHW QPHGF, QPHGFEP QBHW

120/240, 240 22,000 120, 120/240 22,000 120/240, 240 22,000

QHPX HBAX

120/240, 240 42,000 120/240, 240 42,000

dc Interrupting Ratings 

Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts Poles Amps I.R.

62.5

1-2

5,000

2,500

5,000

62.5

1-2

5,000

2,500

5,000

—

62.5

1-2

5,000

2,500

5,000

62.5

1-2

5,000

2,500

5,000

Accessories and Modiﬁcations — See MCCB CD-ROM for Description and UL Installation Status

Moisture-Fungus Treatment

Handle Lock Devices

Shunt Trip

Special Calibration

Shock Tested

Dummy Breaker

Optional Terminals

Moisture-Fungus Treatment

Handle Lock Devices

Shunt Trip

Special Calibration

Shock Tested

Dummy Breaker

Optional Terminals

Moisture-Fungus Treatment

Bell Alarm Contacts

Auxiliary Switch Contacts

Moisture-Fungus Treatment

Handle Lock Devices

Shunt Trip

Special Calibration

Shock Tested

Panelboard Accessories

Dummy Breaker

Optional Terminals

Moisture-Fungus Treatment

Handle Lock Devices

Shunt Trip

Special Calibration

Shock Tested

Panelboard Accessories

Optional Terminals

HQP, QPHW, QHPX QHPW QPGF, QPHGF,

QPGFEP, QPHGFEP BAB, QBHW, HBAX HBAW

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-13

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — QUICKLAG Industrial Breakers

Sheet 0609

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

Table 21.3-5. QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

Two-pole dc interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed.

Type of Breaker Mounting/Electrical Connections

Bolt-on Cable-in/Cable-out

Thermal-Magnetic

QBGF, QBHGF, QBGFEP,

QBHGFEP

Thermal-Magnetic

QCR, QCF Thermal-Magnetic

QC, QCHW, QHCX Thermal-Magnetic

QCD Thermal-Magnetic

QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP,

QCHGFEP

Circuit Breaker Ratings — Continuous Current Rating at 40°C and 0 – 95% Humidity (Noncondensing)

Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts

QBGF QCR, QCF QC QCD QCGF

15 – 40

15 – 50

—

120

120/240

—

10 – 60

15 – 30

2-3

120

120/240

240

5 – 70

10 – 125

10 – 100

2-3

120/240

240

10 – 100

10 – 100 1-2

3120/240

240 15 – 40

15 – 50

—

120

120/240

—

QBHGF QCHW QCHGF

15 – 30

—

120

120/240

—

15 – 70

15 – 100

2-3

120/240

240

15 – 30

15 – 50

—

120

120/240

—

QBGFEP QHCX QCGFEP

15 – 40

15 – 50

—

120

120/240

—

15 – 70

15 – 100

2-3

120/240

240

15 – 30

15 – 50

—

120

120/240

—

QBHGFEP QHCW QCHGFEP

15 – 30

15 – 30 1

2120

120/240 15 – 30

15 – 20 1-2

3120/240

240 15 – 50

15 – 30 1

2120

120/240

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Per Single-Pole Breaker

WHDWHDWHDWHDWHD

1.00

(25.4) 3.19

(81.0) 2.38

(60.3) .50

(12.7) 3.94

(74.6) 2.63

(66.7) 1.00

(25.4) 3.75

(95.3) 2.44

(61.9) 1.00

(25.4) 3.75

(95.3) 2.63

(66.7) 1.00

(25.4) 3.75

(95.3) 2.44

(61.9)

ac Interrupting Ratings — UL Listed Interrupting Ratings Shown (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts Amps I.R. Volts Amps I.R. Volts Amps I.R. Volts Amps I.R. Volts Amps I.R.

QBGF, QBGFEP QCR, QCF QC QCD QCGF, QCGFEP

120, 120/240 10,000 120/240 10,000 120/240, 240 10,000 120/240, 240 10,000 120/240 10,000

QBHGF, QBHGFEP QCHW QCHGF, QCHGFEP

120, 120/240 22,000 120/240, 240 22,000 120 22,000

QHCX

120/240, 240 42,000

QHCW

120/240, 240 65,000

dc Interrupting Ratings 

Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts Poles Amps I.R.

—

62.5

125

—

3,000

—

62.5

1-2

5,000

2,500

5,000

62.5

1-2

5,000

2,500

5,000

—

Accessories and Modiﬁcations — See MCCB CD-ROM for Description and UL Installation Status

Moisture-Fungus Treatment

Handle Lock Devices

Bell Alarm Contacts

Auxiliary Switch Contacts

Ring Terminals

Moisture-Fungus Treatment

Handle Lock Devices

QCR Mounting Clips

Ring Terminals

Quick Connect

Terminals

Shunt Trip

Shock Tested

DIN Rail Mounting Clip

Moisture-Fungus Treatment

Handle Lock Devices

Shunt Trip

Special Calibration

Shock Tested

Face Mounting Plate

Base Mounting Hardware

Optional Terminals

Dummy Breaker

DIN Rail Mounting Clip

Moisture-Fungus Treatment

Handle Lock Devices

Shunt Trip

Special Calibration

Shock Tested

Face Mounting Plate

Base Mounting Hardware

Optional Terminals

Dummy Breaker

DIN Rail Mounting Clip

Moisture-Fungus Treatment

Handle Lock Devices

Bell Alarm Contacts

Auxiliary Switch Contacts

DIN Rail Mounting Clip

QBGF, QBHGF,

QBGFEP, QBHGFEP QCR,QCF QC, QCHW, QHCX QHCW QCGF, QCHGF,

QCGFEP, QCHGFEP

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-14

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — QUICKLAG Industrial Breakers Sheet 0610

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breaker

Catalog Numbering System

Table 21.3-6. Catalog Numbering System — QUICKLAG

Table 21.3-7. Factory Modiﬁcations 

Contact the Eaton factory for modiﬁcations available for QCR and

QCF breakers.

Table 21.3-8. Factory Installed Breaker Terminals

Clamp on line side only.

HQP 1 070 V

Breaker

Type Poles

1= 1-Pole

120/240 Vac

2= 2-Poles

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

– use suffix H

3= 3-Poles

240 Vac

– use suffix H

Amperes Modification

Suffix

Type of

Modiﬁcation Breaker

Types Catalog

Sufﬁx

Shunt Trip (Requires 1 extra

pole space on right side)

120, 208, 240 Vac

12, 24, 48 Vac/dc

Draws 2.6A at 120 V

Draws 11A at 24 Vdc

QUICKLAG Types P, B and C

QUICKLAG Types P, B and C S

Special Calibration (50°C)

Shock Testing

Freeze Testing

QUICKLAG Types P, B and C

Moisture-Fungus Treatment

Marine Duty

Naval Duty

400 Hz Calibration

Speciﬁc dc Ratings (Breaker

marked with a Maximum

Vdc rating)

QUICKLAG Types P, B, C and

Ground Fault

QUICKLAG Types P, B, C

H08

H09

Q thru Q9

Breaker

Type Continuous

Ampere

Rating

Standard Line Terminal Standard Load Terminal Optional Terminals

Term

Type Wire

Range (AWG) Term

Type Wire

Range (AWG) Line Load

QUICKLAG Type P

HQP, QPHW,

QHPX, QHPW

10 to 30

35 to 50

55 to 125

Plug-on female clips which mate

with the bus stabs 1

Cu/Al

14 – 4

8 – 1/0

N/A 3

—

QUICKLAG Ground Fault

QPGF, QPHGF,

QPGFEP, QPHGFEP

10 to 30

Plug-on female clips which mate

with the bus stabs 1 (1-pole)

4 (2-pole)

Cu/Al

14 – 4

14 – 8

N/A 3

—

QUICKLAG Type B

BAB, QBHW,

HBAX, HBAW

10 to 30

35 to 50

55 to 125

Extended tangs which bolt

directly to the bus 1 (1- and 2-pole)

2 (3-pole)

Cu/Al

14 – 4

8 – 1/0

N/A 3

—

QUICKLAG Ground Fault

QBGF, QBHGF,

QBGFEP, QBHGFEP

10 to 30

Extended tangs which bolt

directly to the bus 1 (1-pole)

4 (2-pole)

Cu/Al

14 – 4

14 – 8

N/A N/A

QUICKLAG Type C

QC, QCHW,

QHCX, QHCW

10 to 20

25 to 60

70 to 100

Cu/Al

14 – 10

Cu/Al

14 – 10

14 – 4

8 – 1/0

6, 7

5, 7

6, 7, 8

5, 6, 7, 8

5, 7, 8

QUICKLAG

QCR, QCF 10 to 55

60 1

1Cu/Al

Cu 14 – 4

14 – 4 1

1Cu/Al

Cu 14 – 4

14 – 4 N/A N/A

QUICKLAG Ground Fault

QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP 10 to 20

25 to 50 5

6Cu/Al

Cu/Al 14 – 10

14 – 10 1

1Cu/Al

Cu/Al 14 – 4

14 – 4 6, 7

5, 7 5

4-Prong Quick Connect

Catalog Sufﬁx P

12 3 4

56 7 8



Steel Box Lug Steel Box Lug Steel Box Lug Aluminum Box Lug

Aluminum Box Lug Aluminum Box LugSteel Ring Type

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-15

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Solenoid-Operated

Sheet 0611

Types BABR and BABRS

Solenoid-Operated,

Remote-Controlled

BABR Breaker

Description

BABR and BABRS circuit breakers

are bolt-on branch circuit breakers

designed for use in panelboards and

are ideally suited for lighting control

or energy management applications.

In addition to providing conventional

branch circuit protection, they include a

unique solenoid-operated mechanism

that provides for efﬁcient

breaker

pulse-on and pulse-off operation

when

used with a suitable controller like

the Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Pow-R-

Command lighting control system.

BABR and

BABRS breakers can also

be operated by

pushbuttons, relays

or PLCs. A breaker status feature is

included on the BABRS version.

Note: The BABR breaker has monitoring

only of the status of the remote controlled

contact, while the BABRS has monitoring

only of the status of the breaker contacts.

Product Features

■Bolt-on line-side terminal.

■Cable connected load-side terminal.

■3- or 4-wire (BABR) control terminal.

■Status switch.

■Bi-metal assembly for thermal

overload protection.

■Fast acting short circuit protection.

■Arc-runner and arc-chute assembly

for fast acting arc extinction.

■Three-position handle: OFF, TRIP

(Center), ON.

■Handle permits manual switching

when control power is lost.

■Mechanical trip indicator.

■15 and 20 ampere breakers SWD

(switching duty) rated.

■HID ratings for HID (high intensity

discharge) lighting.

Note: For use in lighting control applica-

tions, see Pow-R-Command Section 28.

Table 21.3-9. BABR and BABRS UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings and Catalog Numbers

Continuous current rating at 40°C.

Table 21.3-10. BABR Wire Harness

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number

of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

Ampere

Rating Volts ac (50/60 Hz)

120 120/240

BABR1015, BABRS1015

BABR1020, BABRS1020

BABR1025, BABRS1025

BABR1030, BABRS1030

10,000

—

BABR2015, BABRS2015

BABR2020, BABRS2020

BABR2025, BABRS2025

BABR2030, BABRS2030

—

10,000

Description Catalog

Number

This 60-inch (1219.2 mm) wire pigtail provides a connection from a single

BABR or BABRS control plug to a customer’s pushbutton, relay or PLC. Each box

contains 12 pigtails. Wires are 22 AWG, 600 V. Order in multiples of 12.

SLBKRPTL1

Same as SLBKRPTL1 except 72 inches (1828.8 mm) long and connects up to four

BABR or BABRS breakers on the same pigtail. Each box contains 4 pigtails. Order in

multiples of 4.

SLBKRPTL4

Same as SLBKRPTL4 except it connects up to six BABR or BABRS breakers on the

same pigtail. Each box contains 4 pigtails. Order in multiples of 4. SLBKRPTL6

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-16

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Solenoid-Operated Sheet 0612

Types GHBS and GBHS

Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled

Description

GHBS and GBHS circuit breakers are bolt-on branch

circuit breakers designed for use in panelboards and are

ideally suited for lighting control or energy management

applications. In addition to providing conventional branch

circuit protection, they include a unique solenoid-operated

mechanism that provides for efﬁcient

breaker pulse-on and

pulse-off operation

when used with a suitable controller like

the Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Pow-R-Command lighting

control system.

Table 21.3-11. GHBS UL 489 Interrupting Ratings

All UL listed circuit breakers are HID (High Intensity Discharge) rated.

Continuous current rating at 40°C.

Table 21.3-12. GBHS CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings

Continuous current rating at 40°C.

Table 21.3-13. Terminal Type

Note: For load-side. Terminals are UL listed as suitable for wire type

and size given below.

Table 21.3-14. Dimensions Per Pole in Inches (mm)

Circuit

Breaker

Type 

Number

of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

Ampere

Rating Volts ac (50/60 Hz)

120 240 277/480

GHBS1015D

GHBS1020D

GHBS1030D

65,000

—

14,000

GHBS2015D

GHBS2020D

GHBS2030D

—

65,000

14,000

1-Pole 2-Pole

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number

of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

Ampere

Rating Volts ac (50/60 Hz)

347/600

GBHS1015D

GBHS1020D 1

115

20 10,000

10,000

GBHS2015D

GBHS2020D 2

215

20 10,000

10,000

Item Circuit

Breaker

Amperes

Terminal

Type Screw

Head

Type

Wire

Type AWG

Wire

Range

GHBS

GBHS

GHBS

15 – 20

Clamp

Box

Slotted

Cu/Al

14 – 10

14 – 2

GBHS

BABRS 30

15 – 30 Box

Box Slotted

Slotted Cu/Al

Cu/Al 14 – 2

14 – 6

Item Width Height Depth

GHBS 1.00 (25.4) 4.12 (104.8) 2.81 (71.4)

GBHS 1.00 (25.4) 4.12 (104.8) 2.81 (71.4)

BABR

BABRS 1.00 (25.4) 4.08 (104.8) 2.91 (74.0)

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-17

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Solenoid-Operated

Sheet 0613

Types GHBS, GBHS, BABR and BABRS Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled

Figure 21.3-2. Typical GHBS or GBHS Single-Pole Circuit Breaker

Schematic Diagram and Conductor Plug Wiring Connections

Note: 2-pole breakers have two solenoids.

Remote Control Operation

The remote-control capability of the breaker is “armed”

when the breaker handle is manually switched to the “ON”

position. Once armed, the breaker can be pulsed “ON” and

“OFF” by a controller device which provides an ac pulse of

speciﬁed magnitude and duration to the solenoid operated

mechanism. Control connections to the breaker are provided

through a conductor plug (supplied by others). A normally

open (a) auxiliary contact provides for “ON”/“OFF” status

indication to the remote controller and/or indicating lamp.

In the event the breaker automatically trips, the breaker

must be reset manually.

Figure 21.3-3. Circuit Breaker Schematic Diagram for the BABR and

BABRS Breakers

Note: 2-pole breakers have two solenoids.

Breaker Solenoid and Operating Data

■Ambient temperature: 0ºC – 40ºC.

■Nominal pulse magnitude:

28 Vac rms, 24 Vac (BABR).

■Tolerance: +10% to -15% of nominal voltage.

■Pulse duration: 1/2 cycle (8 – 10 ms).

■Minimum recommended pulse current at nominal voltage:

❑GHBS

– 1-Pole: 4.9 amperes peak,

3.5 amperes rms

– 2-Pole: 7.84 amperes peak,

5.6 amperes rms

❑BABR and BABRS

– 1-Pole: 1.0 amperes peak

– 2-Pole: 2.0 amperes peak

■Breaker operating time: 20 – 40 ms.

■Maximum breaker cycling: six operations per minute.

■Humidity: 0 – 95% non-condensing.

■The GHBS and GBHS are rated for 25,000 operations while

the BABR and BABRS are rated for 250,000 operations.

1-Pole Circuit Breaker

Solenoid

Common

28V AC

AMP Inc.

Conductor

Plug

1/2 Cycle

Maximum

28V AC

Pulse Source

Circuit Breaker

Open/Closed

Status

Auxiliary

Solenoid

Auxiliary

Switch

Common

Conductor

Plug (As

Viewed From

End)

BABRS

Remote

Status

BKR

Breaker

Status

OFF

Coil

BABR

Load Line

Remote Contact

Breaker Contact

Blue

Yellow

OFF

Coil

Black

Coil

Red

Load Line

Remote Contact

Breaker Contact

Blue

Yellow

Black

Red

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-18

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Industrial G-Frame Sheet 0614

G-Frame, Thermal-Magnetic,

15 – 100 Amperes

GHB Breaker

Table 21.3-15. G-Frame —

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Table 21.3-16. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

Table 21.3-17. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.

Two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker.

Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum.

Table 21.3-18. Terminal Types

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

Figure 21.3-4. Electrical Schematic

Do not ground neutral anywhere on load side of breaker.

Number

of Poles Width Height Depth

1P G-Frame 1.00

(25.4) 4.00

(101.6) 2.81

(71.4)

2P G-Frame 2.00

(50.8) 4.00

(101.6) 2.81

(71.4)

3P G-Frame 3.00

(76.2) 4.00

(101.6) 2.81

(71.4)

GHCGFEP 2.00

(50.8) 4.88

(124.0) 2.81

(71.4)

GHBGFEP 2.00

(50.8) 4.00

(101.6) 2.81

(71.4)

Frame Ratings

GHB, GHC 15, 20, 25, 30, 35,

40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80,

90, 100

GHCGFEP, GHBGFEP 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60

Circuit Breaker

Type Number

of Poles Type

of Trip Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts ac (50/60 Hz) Volts dc

120 240 277 480 125 250 

GHB, GHC

GHB, GHC 1

2, 3 N.I.T.

N.I.T. 65,000

——

65,000 14,000

——

14,000 14,000 

——

14,000

GHCGFEP, GHBGFEP 1 — — 65,000 14,000 — — —

Circuit Breaker

Amperes Terminal Body

Material Wire

Type AWG Wire

Range

15 – 20

25 – 100 Clamp (Plated Steel)

Pressure (Aluminum Body) Cu/Al

Cu/Al (1) #14 – 10

(1) #10 – 1/0

15 – 20

25 – 60 Clamp

Pressure Cu/Al

Cu/Al (1) #14 – #10 AWG

(1) #10 – 1/0 AWG

GHCGFEP, GHBGFEP

277 Volt 30 mA GF Breaker

Application Notes

■

On all 3-phase Delta (240 V) Grounded

B phase applications, refer to Eaton.

■480Y/277 V, circuit breakers

(Type GHB) not suitable for

3-phase Delta (480 V) Grounded

B phase applications.

■All 2- and 3-pole circuit breakers

are of the common trip type.

■Single-pole circuit breakers,

15 and 20 ampere. Switching

duty rated (SWD) for ﬂuorescent

lighting applications.

■Suitable for reverse feed applications.

■HACR rated.

■GHCGFEP and GHBGFEP are earth

leakage breakers, rated for 30 mA

ground fault protection.

■Type GHB are bolt-on panelboard

breakers while type GHC is a cable-

in and cable-out breaker for stand-

alone mounting typically in a control

panel or separate enclosure.

Terminals

Line side (on GHC) and load side (on

GHC and GHB) terminals are UL listed

as suitable for wire type and size listed

below. When used with aluminum

conductors, use joint compound.

Table 21.3-19. Terminals

Breaker

Amperes Terminal

Type Wire

Range

15 – 20

25 – 60 Clamp

Pressure Cu/Al

Cu/Al #14 – #10 AWG

#10 – 1/0 AWG

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-19

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Circuit Breakers

Sheet 0615

Circuit Breaker/Frame Catalog Numbering System

Table 21.3-20. Catalog Numbering System — Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Note: This chart is for interpretation of Cutler-Hammer catalog numbers and not for the creation of catalog numbers.

KD 3 400 T57 W

Circuit Breaker

Frame Type

EDH

EDC

EHD

FDB

HFD

FDC

JDB

HJD

JDC

KDB

CKD

HKD

CHDK

KDC

LDB

CLD

HLD

CHLD

LDC

CLDC

MDLB

MDL

CMDL

HMDLB

HMDL

CHMDL

CND

HND

CHND

NDC

CNDC

CRD

RDC

CRDC

Number

of Poles

Circuit Breaker Frame

Ampere Rating

100 (Max. G-Frame)

110

125

150 (Max. EHD-Frame)

175

200

225 (Max. ED&F-Frame)

250 (Max. J-Frame)

300

350

400 (Max. K-Frame)

450

500

600 (Max. L-Frame)

700

800 (Max. M-Frame)

900

1000

1200 (Max. N-Frame)

1250

1400

1500

1600

2000

2500 (Max. R-Frame)

Digitrip Trip Unit Type

T32 = Digitrip 310 LSI

T33 = Digitrip 310 LS

T35 = Digitrip 310 LSG

T36 = Digitrip 310 LSIG

T55 = OPTIM 550 LSI

T56 = OPTIM 550 LSIG

T57 = OPTIM 550 LSIA

T76 =OPTIM 1050 LSIG

T106=OPTIM 1050 LSIG

T107= OPTIM 1050 LSIA

Suffix

C= CU Terminals

E= Protected Neutral Pole

F= Frame Only

K= Molded Case Switch

T= Trip Unit Only

V= 50°C Calibration

W= Without Terminals

X= Load Side Terminals

Only

Y=Line Side Terminals Only

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-20

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — G-Frame Sheet 0616

G-Frame

Thermal-Magnetic

15 – 100 Amperes

G-Frame Breaker

Table 21.3-21. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Table 21.3-22. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

Number

of Poles Width Height Depth

32.00 (50.8)

3.00 (76.2) 4.88 (124.0)

4.88 (124.0) 2.81 (71.4)

2.81 (71.4)

Frame Ratings

GD 15, 20, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50,

60, 70, 80, 90, 100

Table 21.3-23. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.

Two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker.

Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum.

Table 21.3-24. Line and Load Terminals

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

Not UL listed sizes.

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number

of Poles Type

Trip 

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts ac (50/60 Hz) Volts dc

120 240 277 480 125 250 

GD 2, 3 N.I.T. — 65,000 — 22,000 — 10,000

Circuit Breaker

Amperes Terminal Body

Material Wire

Type AWG Wire

Range Metric Wire

Range (mm2) 

15 – 20

25 – 100 Clamp (Plated Steel)

Pressure (Aluminum Body) Cu/Al

Cu/Al (1) #14 – 10

(1) #10 – 1/0 2.5 – 4

4 – 50

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-21

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — E125-Frame

Sheet 0617

EG-Frame

Thermal-Magnetic

15 – 125 Amperes

E125-Frame Breaker

Table 21.3-25. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Table 21.3-26. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

Not UL listed.

Number

of Poles Width Height Depth

21.00 (25.4)

2.00 (50.8) 5.50 (139.7)

5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)

2.99 (75.9)

43.00 (76.2)

4.00 (101.6) 5.50 (139.7)

5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)

2.99 (75.9)

Frame Ratings

EG 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50,

60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125

EG 16, 32, 63

Table 21.3-27. UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

dc ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.

2-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker.

Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 42 kA.

Note: Contact Eaton for availability of E125 frame breakers in panelboards and switchboards.

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number

of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)

Volts ac (50/60 Hz) Volts dc 

120 220 – 240 277 347 380 – 415 480 600Y/347 125 250 

Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics

EGB 1

2, 3, 4 35

— 25

25 25

25 18

——

18 —

—10

——

10 —

EGE 2, 3, 4 — 35 35 — — — 25 25 25 18 — — 10 10

EGS 1

2, 3, 4 100

— 85

85 43

43 35

—22

——

40 —

30 —

35 —

22 35

—35

——

35 —

EGH 1

2, 3, 4 200

—100

100 50

50 65

—30

——

70 —

35 —

65 —

25 42

—42

——

42 —

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-22

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — F-Frame Sheet 0618

F-Frame

Thermal-Magnetic

10 – 225 Amperes

F-Frame Breaker

Table 21.3-28. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Table 21.3-29. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

Number

of Poles Width Height Depth

21.38 (34.8)

2.75 (69.9) 6.00 (152.4)

6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)

3.38 (85.7)

44.13 (104.8)

5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4)

6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)

3.38 (85.7)

Frame Ratings

ED, EDH, EDC 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225

EHD, FDB, FD,

HFD, FDC,

HFDDC

10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45,

50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110,

125, 150

FD, HFD, FDC 175, 200, 225

Table 21.3-30. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.

2-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker.

Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.

Current limiting.

HFDDC is UL only and is not tested to other standards.

Interrupting rating is 35,000 amperes at 600 Vdc with three poles in series, for ungrounded

systems only.

Table 21.3-31. Line and Load Terminals

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers.

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number

of Poles Type

Trip 

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts ac (50/60 Hz) Volts dc

240 277 480 600 125 250 

EDB

EDS 2, 3

2, 3 N.I.T. 22,000

42,000 —

——

—10,000

10,000 —

—

EDH

EDC 

2, 3

N.I.T. 65,000

100,000

200,000

—

10,000

—

EHD 1

2, 3 N.I.T. —

18,000 14,000

——

14,000 —

—10,000

——

10,000

FDB 2, 3, 4 N.I.T. 18,000 — 14,000 14,000 — 10,000

FD 1

2, 3, 4 N.I.T. —

65,000 35,000

——

35,000 —

18,000 10,000

——

10,000

HFD 1

2, 3, 4 N.I.T. —

100,000 65,000

—. —

65,000 —

25,000 10,000

——

22,000

FDC 2, 3, 4 N.I.T. 200,000 — 100,000 35,000 — 22,000

HFDDC 3N.I.T. — — — — — 42,000 

Maximum

Breaker

Amperes

Terminal

Body

Material 

Wire

Type AWG Wire

Range Metric Wire

Range (mm2)Catalog Number

Package of

3 Terminals

Standard Pressure Type Terminals

20 (EHD)

100

150

225

Steel

Aluminum

Cu/Al

(1) #14 – #10

(1) #14 – 1/0

(1) #4 – 4/0

2.5 – 4

2.5 – 50

25 – 95

3T20FB 

3T100FB

3TA150FB

3TA225FD

Optional Pressure Terminals

100

150

225

Aluminum

Stainless Steel

Aluminum

Cu/Al

(1) #14 – #4

(1) #14 – 1/0

(1) #4 – 4/0

(1) #6 – 300 kcmil

2.5 – 16

2.5 – 50

25 – 95

16 – 150

3TA50FB 

3TA100FD

3T150FB

3TA225FDK

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-23

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — J250-Frame

Sheet 0619

JG-Frame

Electronic RMS, 20 – 250 Amperes

Thermal-Magnetic, 63 – 250 Amperes

JG250-Frame Breaker

Table 21.3-32. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Table 21.3-33. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

Not UL listed.

Table 21.3-34. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Units

Number

of Poles Width Height Depth

2, 3 4.13 (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)

45.34 (135.6) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)

Frame Ratings

JG 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200,

225, 250

JG 63, 160

Frame Ratings

JG250 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225, 250

JG160 63, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 160

JG100 40, 45, 50, 63, 70, 80, 90, 100

JG50 20, 25, 30, 32, 40, 45, 50

Table 21.3-35. UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

dc ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.

2-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker.

Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.

Note: Contact Eaton for availability of J250 frame breakers in panelboards and switchboards.

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number

of Poles Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts ac (50/60 Hz) Volts dc 

220 – 240 380 – 415 480 600 690 250 

Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics

JGE 2, 3, 4 65 65 25 25 25 18 12 6 10 10

JGS 2, 3, 4 85 85 40 40 35 18 12 6 22 22

JGH 2, 3, 4 100 100 70 70 65 25 14 7 22 22

JGC 2, 3, 4 200 150 100 75 100 50 20 10 42 42

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-24

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — J-Frame Sheet 0620

J-Frame

Thermal-Magnetic, 70 – 250 Amperes

J-Frame Breaker

Table 21.3-36. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Table 21.3-37. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

Number

of Poles Width Height Depth

2, 3 4.13

(104.8) 10.00

(254.0) 4.06

(103.2)

45.50

(139.7) 10.00

(254.0) 4.06

(103.2)

Frame Ratings

JDB, JD, HJD

JDC, HJDDC 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,

225, 250

Table 21.3-38. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip; I.T. is interchangeable trip.

2-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of 3-pole circuit breaker.

Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.

8 milliseconds time constant.

Current limiting.

Three poles in series.

Two poles in series.

Table 21.3-39. Line and Load Terminals

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number

of Poles Type

of Trip Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts ac (50/60 Hz) Volts dc

240 480 600 250  600 

JDB

HJD

2, 3

2, 3, 4

N.I.T.

I.T.

65,000

100,000

35,000

65,000

18,000

25,000

10,000

22,000

—

JDC 

HJDDC 2, 3, 4

3 I.T.

I.T. 200,000

—100,000

—35,000

—22,000

42,000 —

35,000 

Maximum

Breaker

Amperes

Terminal

Body

Material 

Wire

Type AWG Wire

Range Metric

Wire

Range (mm2)

Catalog

Number

Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals

250

250 Aluminum

Stainless Steel Cu/Al

Cu (1) #4 – 350 kcmil

(1) #4 – 350 kcmil 25 – 185

25 – 185 TA250KB

T250KB

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-25

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — K-Frame

Sheet 0621

K-Frame

Electronic RMS,

70 – 400 Amperes

Thermal-Magnetic, 100 – 400 Amperes

K-Frame Breaker

Table 21.3-40. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Table 21.3-41. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

Table 21.3-42. Digitrip 310 and OPTIM

Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs

160 ampere is only available on Digitrip 310.

Adjustable rating plug available on

Digitrip 310.

Number

of Poles Width Height Depth

2, 3 5.50

(139.7) 10.13

(257.2) 4.06

(103.2)

47.22

(183.4) 10.13

(257.2) 4.06

(103.2)

Frame Ratings

DK, FDB, KD,

HKD,KDC, HKDDC,

CKD,CHKD

100, 125, 150, 175, 200,

225, 250, 300, 350, 400

Frame Rating Plugs 

KD, HKD, KDC,

CKD, CHKD 70, 90, 100, 110, 125 , 150,

160, 175, 200, 225, 250 ,

300, 350, 400 

Table 21.3-43. NEMA/UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip; I.T. is interchangeable trip.

2-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of 3-pole circuit breaker.

Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.

8 milliseconds time constant.

Current limiting.

100% rated.

Two poles in series.

Three poles in series.

Table 21.3-44. Line and Load Terminals

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

TA400K, T400K and TA401K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number

of Poles Type

of Trip Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts ac (50/60 Hz) Volts dc

240 480 600 250  600 

KDB

2, 3

2, 3, 4

N.I.T.

I.T.

65,000

—

35,000

—

25,000

10,000

—

HKD

KDC 

HKDDC

2, 3, 4

I.T.

100,000

200,000

—

65,000

100,000

—

35,000

50,000

—

22,000

42,000

—

35,000 

CKD 

CHKD 3

3I.T.

I.T. 65,000

100,000 35,000

65,000 25,000

35,000 10,000

22,000 —

—

Maximum

Breaker

Amperes

Terminal

Body

Material 

Wire

Type AWG/kcmil

Wire Range/Number

of Conductors

Metric

Wire

Range (mm2)

Catalog

Number

Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals

225

350

400

Aluminum

Cu/Al

(1) 3 – 350 kcmil

(1) 250 – 500 kcmil

(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil

35 – 185

120 – 240

95 – 120

TA300K

TA350K

2TA400K – 2-Pole Kit 

3TA400K – 3-Pole Kit 

4TA400K – 4-Pole Kit 

Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals

225

350

400

Copper

Aluminum

Cu/Al

(1) 3 – 350 kcmil

(1) 250 – 500 kcmil

(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil

(2) 2/0 – 250 kcmil

(1) 2/0 – 500 kcmil

35 – 185

120 – 240

95 – 120

70 – 120

70 – 240

T300K

T350K

2T400K – 2-Pole Kit 

3T400K – 3-Pole Kit 

4T400K – 4-Pole Kit 

2TA401K – 2-Pole Kit 

3TA401K – 3-Pole Kit 

4TA401K – 4-Pole Kit 

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-26

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — L-Frame Sheet 0622

L-Frame

Electronic RMS, 70 – 600 Amperes

Thermal-Magnetic, 300 – 600 Amperes

L-Frame Breaker

Table 21.3-45. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Table 21.3-46. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

Table 21.3-47. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Unit

Rating Plugs

Table 21.3-48. Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip

Unit Rating Plugs

Number

of Poles Width Height Depth

2, 3 8.25

(209.6) 10.75

(273.1) 4.06

(103.2)

411.00

(279.4) 10.75

(273.1) 4.06

(103.2)

Frame Ratings

LDB, LD, CLD,

HLD, CHLD,

LDC, CLDC,

HLDDC

300, 350, 400, 450,

500, 600

Frame Rating Plugs

LDB, LD, CLD,

HLD, CHLD,

LDC, CLDC

300, 350, 400, 500, 600

300/600 Adjustable

Frame Rating Plugs

LD, CLD, HLD,

CHLD, LDC,

CLDC

70, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175,

200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400,

500, 600

Table 21.3-49. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip; I.T. is interchangeable trip.

L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum.

2-pole circuit breaker or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Incorporating T/M trip unit only.

100% rated.

Current limiting.

2-poles in series.

3-poles in series.

Table 21.3-50. Line and Load Terminals

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number

of Poles Type

of Trip Interrupting Capacity (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts ac (50/60 Hz) Volts dc

240 480 600 250  600

LDB

LD, CLD 

HLD

2, 3

2, 3, 4

N.I.T.

I.T.

65,000

100,000

35,000

65,000

25,000

35,000

22,000

25,000

—

CHLD 

LDC 

CLDC 

HLDDC

2, 3, 4

I.T.

100,000

200,000

—

65,000

100,000

—

35,000

50,000

—

25,000

30,000

42,000 

—

35,000 

Maximum

Breaker

Amperes

Terminal

Body

Material 

Wire

Type AWG/kcmil

Wire Range/Number

of Conductors

Metric

Wire

Range (mm2)

Catalog

Number

Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals

400 Aluminum Cu/Al (1) 4/0 – 600 kcmil 120 – 300 2TA401LDK – 2-Pole Kit 

3TA401LDK – 3-Pole Kit 

4TA401LDK – 4-Pole Kit 

500

600 Aluminum

Aluminum Cu/Al

Cu/Al (2) 250 – 350 kcmil

(2) 400 – 500 kcmil 120 – 150

185 – 240 TA602LD

2TA603LDK – 2-Pole Kit 

3TA603LDK – 3-Pole Kit 

4TA603LDK – 4-Pole Kit 

Optional Copper Pressure Type Terminals

600 Copper Cu (2) 250 – 350 kcmil 120 – 150 T602LD

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-27

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — M-Frame

Sheet 0623

M-Frame

Electronic RMS, 400 – 800 Amperes

Thermal-Magnetic, 300 – 800 Amperes

M-Frame Breaker

Table 21.3-51. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Table 21.3-52. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

Table 21.3-53. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Unit

Rating Plugs

Width Height Depth

8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.2)

Frame Ratings

MDL 300, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800

Frame Rating Plugs

MDL 400, 500, 600, 700, 800,

400/800 Adjustable

Table 21.3-54. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.

Two poles or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL, HMDL

breakers with electronic trip unit are not dc rated.

Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.

100% rated. Not for use on dc.

Table 21.3-55. Line and Load Terminals

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number

of Poles Type of

Trip Interrupting Capacity (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts ac (50/60 Hz) Volts dc 

240 480 600 250

MDL, CMDL 

HMDL, CHMDL 2, 3

2, 3 N.I.T.

N.I.T. 65,000

100,000 50,000

65,000 25,000

35,000 22,000

25,000

Maximum

Breaker

Amperes

Terminal

Body

Material 

Wire

Type AWG/kcmil

Wire Range/Number

of Conductors

Catalog

Number

Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals

600

800

Aluminum

Cu/Al

(2) #1 – 500 kcmil

(3) 3/0 – 400 kcmil

(2) 500 – 750 kcmil

TA700MA1

TA800MA2

TA801MA

Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals

600

800 Copper

Copper Cu

Cu (2) 2/0 – 500 kcmil

(3) 3/0 – 300 kcmil T600MA1

T800MA1

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-28

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — N-Frame Sheet 0624

N-Frame

Electronic RMS, 400 – 1200 Amperes

N-Frame Breaker

Table 21.3-56. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Table 21.3-57. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Unit

Rating Plugs

Adjustable rating plug available.

Table 21.3-58. Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip

Unit Rating Plugs

Number

of Poles Width Height Depth

2, 3 8.25

(209.6) 16.00

(406.4) 5.50

(139.7)

411.13

(282.6) 16.00

(406.4) 5.50

(139.7)

Frame Rating Plugs

800 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 

1200 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100,1200 

Frame Ratings

800 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 700, 800

1200 600, 700, 800, 1000, 1200

Table 21.3-59. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.

100% rated.

Table 21.3-60. Line and Load Terminals

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number

of Poles Type

Trip 

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts ac (50/60 Hz)

240 277 480 600

ND, CND 

HND

CHND 

2, 3, 4

N.I.T.

65,000

100,000

—

50,000

65,000

25,000

35,000

NDC

CNDC 2, 3, 4

2, 3, 4 N.I.T.

N.I.T. 200,000

200,000 —

—100,000

100,000 50,000

50,000

Maximum

Breaker

Amperes

Terminal

Body

Material 

Wire

Type AWG/kcmil

Wire Range/Number

of Conductors

Metric

Wire

Range (mm2)

Catalog

Number

Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals

700

1000

1200

Aluminum

Cu/Al

(2) 1 – 500 kcmil

(3) 3/0 – 400 kcmil

(4) 4/0 – 500 kcmil

(3) 500 – 750 kcmil

50 – 300

95 – 185

120 – 300

300 – 400

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

TA1201NB1

Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals

700

1000

1200

Copper

(2) 2/0 – 500 kcmil

(3) 3/0 – 500 kcmil

(4) 3/0 – 400 kcmil

70 – 300

95 – 300

95 – 185

T700NB1

T1000NB1

T1200NB3

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-29

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — R-Frame

Sheet 0625

R-Frame

Electronic RMS, 800 – 2500 Amperes

R-Frame Breaker

Table 21.3-61. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Table 21.3-62. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Unit

Rating Plugs

Adjustable rating plug available.

Table 21.3-63. Digitrip RMS and Digitrip

OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs

Number

of Poles Width Height Depth

315.50

(393.7) 16.00

(406.4) 9.75

(247.7)

420.00

(508.0) 16.00

(406.4) 9.75

(247.7)

Frame Rating Plugs

1600 800, 1000, 1200, 1250,

1400, 1500, 1600 

2000 1000, 1200, 1250, 1400, 1600, 2000 

2500 1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500 

Frame Rating Plugs

1600

2000

2500

800, 1000, 1200, 1600

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000

1600, 2000, 2500

Table 21.3-64. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.

100% rated versions.

Table 21.3-65. Line and Load Terminals

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

Circuit

Breaker

Frame

Number

of Poles Type

Trip 

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts ac (50/60 Hz)

240 277 480 600

CRD 

RDC

CRDC 

3, 4

N.I.T.

125

200

—

100

Maximum

Breaker

Amperes

Terminal

Body

Material 

Wire

Type Hardware AWG/kcmil

Wire Range/Number

of Conductors

Metric

Wire

Range (mm2)

Catalog

Number

Wire Terminal

1600

2000

Aluminum

Copper

Aluminum

Cu/Al

English

(4) 500 – 1000 kcmil

(4) 1 – 600 kcmil

(6) 2 – 600 kcmil

300 – 500

50 – 300

35 – 300

TA1600RD

T1600RD

TA2000RD

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-30

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Current Limiting Sheet 0626

Current Limiting FCL Frame 15 – 100 Amperes, LCL Frame 125 – 400 Amperes

FCL Frame

FCL Frame Breaker

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Table 21.3-66. FCL Interrupting Capacity Ratings

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.

Note: On all 3-phase Delta, Ground B

phase applications, refer to Eaton.

Terminals

Breakers listed include line and load

terminals. Terminals are Underwriters

Laboratories listed for wire sizes and

types listed below. When used with

aluminum cable, use joint compound.

To order optional aluminum terminals,

add sufﬁx “Z” to breaker catalog

number listed.

Table 21.3-67. FCL Terminals

Table 21.3-68. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Breaker with built-in ground fault protection.

Table 21.3-69. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

Table 21.3-70. SELTRONIC Electronic Trip Unit

Rating Plug

Breaker with built-in ground fault protection.

Volts ac

(50/60 Hz) Type of

Trip Interrupting Capacity

(Symmetrical Amperes)

240

480 N.I.T.

N.I.T. 200,000

150,000

Maximum

Breaker

Amperes

Wire

Type AWG Wire

Range

Standard Pressure Terminals

100 Al/Cu #14 – 1/0

Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

100 Al/Cu

Al/Cu #14 – #4

#4 – 4/0

Frame Number

of Poles Width Height Depth

FCL 2, 3 4.13

(104.8) 8.75

(222.3) 3.50

(88.9)

LCL, LCLG 2, 3 8.25

(209.6) 16.00

(406.4) 4.00

(101.6)

Frame Ratings

FCL 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50,

60, 70, 80, 90, 100

Frame Ratings

LCL, LCLG 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250,

275, 300, 350, 400

LCL Frame

LCL Frame Breaker

Listed with Underwriters Laboratories

Except as Noted

Type LCL breakers are not deﬁned in

Federal Speciﬁcations W-C-375-b.

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Table 21.3-71. LCL Interrupting Capacity

Ratings

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.

Note: On all 3-phase Delta, Ground B

phase applications, refer to Eaton.

Terminals

Two terminals are required per pole.

Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories

listed for wire type and range listed

below. When used with aluminum

cable, use joint compound.

Table 21.3-72. LCL Terminals

Volts ac

(50/60 Hz) Type of

Trip Interrupting Capacity

(Symmetrical Amperes)

240

480

600

N.I.T.

200,000

100,000

Maximum

Breaker

Amperes

AWG/kcmil

Wire Range/Number

of Conductors

Terminal

Catalog

Number

Standard Copper Pressure Terminals

225

400 (1) #6 – 350 kcmil Cu

(1) #4 – 250 kcmil Cu,

plus

(1) 3/0 – 600 kcmil Cu

T225LA

T401LA

Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

225 (1) #6 – 350 kcmil Cu, or

(1) #4 – 350 kcmil Al TA225LA1

400 (1) #4 – 250 kcmil Al/Cu,

plus

(1) 3/0 – 600 kcmil Al/Cu

TA400LA1

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-31

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Current Limiting

Sheet 0627

Current Limiting FB TRI-PAC 15-100 Amperes, LA TRI-PAC 70 – 400 Amperes

FB TRI-PAC

FB TRI-PAC Breaker

Listed with Underwriters Laboratories

Except as Noted

TRI-PAC FB breakers meet the

requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a

and 26a circuit breakers as deﬁned

in Federal Speciﬁcation W-C-375b.

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Underwriters Laboratories Listed

600 Vac maximum: 200,000 amperes

symmetrical.

Based on NEMA Test Procedures

250 Vdc maximum: 100,000 amperes.

Note: On all 3-phase Delta, Ground B

phase applications, refer to Eaton.

Terminals

Breakers listed include line and load

terminals. Terminals are Underwriters

Laboratories listed for wire sizes and

types listed below. When used with

aluminum cable, use joint compound.

To order optional aluminum terminals,

add sufﬁx “Z” to breaker catalog

number listed.

Table 21.3-73. FB TRI-PAC Terminals

Table 21.3-74. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Table 21.3-75. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

Maximum

Breaker

Amperes

Wire

Type AWG Wire

Range

Standard Pressure Terminals

100 Al/Cu (1) #14 – 1/0

Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

100 Al/Cu

Al/Cu (1) #14 – #4

(1) #4 – 4/0

Frame Number

of Poles Width Height Depth

FB 2, 3 4.13

(104.8) 8.75

(222.3) 3.50

(88.9)

LA 2, 3 8.13

(206.4) 16.00

(406.4) 7.75

(196.9)

Frame Ratings

FB TRI-PAC 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 90, 100

LA TRI-PAC 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,

225, 250, 300, 350, 400

LA TRI-PAC

LA TRI-PAC Breaker

Listed with Underwriters Laboratories

Except as Noted

TRI-PAC LA breakers meet the

requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a

and 26a circuit breakers as deﬁned

in Federal Speciﬁcation W-C-375b.

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Underwriters Laboratories Listed

600 Vac maximum: 200,000 amperes

symmetrical.

Based on NEMA Test Procedures

250 Vdc maximum: 100,000 amperes.

Note: On all 3-phase Delta, Grounded B

phase applications, refer to Eaton.

Terminals

Two terminals are required per pole.

Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories

listed for wire size and type listed below.

When used with aluminum conductors,

use joint compound. To order optional

aluminum terminals, add sufﬁx “Z” to

complete breaker catalog number.

Table 21.3-76. LA TRI-PAC Terminals

Maximum

Breaker

Amperes

AWG/kcmil

Wire Range/Number

of Conductors

Terminal

Catalog

Number

Standard Copper Pressure Terminals

225

225 (1) #6 – 350 kcmil Cu

(1) #6 – 250 kcmil Cu T225LA

T225LBF

400 (1) #4 – 250 kcmil Cu,

plus

(1) 3/0 – 600 kcmil Cu

T401LA

Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

225 (1) #6 – 350 kcmil Cu, or

(1) #4 – 350 kcmil Al/Cu TA225LA1

400 (1) #4 – 250 kcmil Al/Cu,

plus

(1) 3/0 – 600 kcmil Al/Cu

TA400LA1

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-32

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Current Limiting Sheet 0628

Current Limiting NB TRI-PAC 300 – 800 Amperes, PB TRI-PAC 600 – 1600 Amperes

NB TRI-PAC

NB TRI-PAC Breaker

Listed with Underwriters Laboratories

Except as Noted

TRI-PAC NB breakers meet the

requirements for Class 16b, 17a and

26a circuit breakers as deﬁned in

Federal Speciﬁcation W-C-375b.

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Underwriters Laboratories Listed

600 Vac maximum: 200,000 amperes

symmetrical.

Based on NEMA Test Procedures

250 Vdc maximum: 100,000 amperes.

Note: On all 3-phase Delta, Grounded B

phase applications, refer to Eaton.

Terminals

Two terminals are required per pole.

Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories

listed for wire size and type listed below.

When used with aluminum conductors,

use joint compound. To order optional

aluminum terminals, add sufﬁx “Z” to

complete breaker catalog number.

Table 21.3-77. NB TRI-PAC Terminals

Table 21.3-78. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Table 21.3-79. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

PB TRI-PAC

PB TRI-PAC Breaker

Listed with Underwriters Laboratories

Except as Noted

TRI-PAC PB breakers meet the

requirements for Class 17a and 26a

circuit breakers as deﬁned in Federal

Speciﬁcation W-C-375b.

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Underwriters Laboratories Listed

600 Vac maximum: 200,000 amperes

symmetrical.

Based on NEMA Test Procedures

250 Vdc maximum: 100,000 amperes.

Note: On all 3-phase Delta, Ground B phase

applications, refer to Eaton.

Bus Bar Connectors

“T” Connector for Cu/Al Bus

Two required per pole. For rear bus

connection. Accepts up to four bus

bolts. May be rotated 90°.

“T” Connector for Cu/Al Bus

Cable Connector (Optional)

For “T” Connector. Accepts four

600 kcmil copper cables.

Optional Cable Connector

Maximum

Ampere

Rating

AWG/kcmil

Wire Range/Number

of Conductors

Terminal

Catalog

Number

Standard Copper Pressure Terminals

350

700

800

1 #1 – 600 kcmil Cu

2 2/0 – 500 kcmil Cu

3 3/0 – 500 kcmil Cu

T350NB

T700NB1

T1000NB1

Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

700

800

2 #1 – 500 kcmil Al/Cu

3 3/0 – 400 kcmil Al/Cu

3 500 – 750 kcmil Al/Cu

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1201NB1

Frame Number

of Poles Width Height Depth

NB 2, 3 8.25

(209.6) 22.00

(558.8) 5.50

(139.7)

PB 2, 3 12.06

(306.4) 22.13

(562.0) 9.06

(230.2)

Frame Ratings

NB TRI-PAC 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800

PB TRI-PAC 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1200,

1400, 1600

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-33

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Earth Leakage

Sheet 0629

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

F-, J- and K- Frame, Thermal-

Magnetic, 15 – 400 Amperes

Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker

Table 21.3-80. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Note: All dimensions are provided for

guidance and should not be used for

construction purposes unless approved.

Table 21.3-81. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

Table 21.3-82. UL 489 Interrupting

Capacity Ratings

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and

breaker is factory sealed.

Current limiting.

Frame Width Height Depth

3-Pole

4.13 (105.0)

5.51 (140.0)

11.20 (284.5)

13.70 (348.0)

13.84 (351.5)

4.14 (105.2)

4.94 (125.5)

4.91 (124.7)

4-Pole

5.51 (140.0)

7.20 (183.0)

11.20 (284.5)

13.70 (348.0)

13.84 (351.5)

4.14 (105.2)

4.94 (125.5)

4.91 (124.7)

Frame Ratings

F15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80,

90, 100, 110, 125, 150

J100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250

K200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400

Circuit

Breaker

Type

No.

Poles

Type

Trip 

Interrupting Capacity

(kA Symmetrical

Amperes)

Volts ac (50/60 Hz)

240 480

ELFD

ELHFD

ELFDC 

3, 4

N.I.T.

100

200

100

ELJD

ELHJD

ELJDC 

3, 4

N.I.T.

100

200

100

ELKD

ELHKD

ELKDC 

3, 4

N.I.T.

100

200

100

Table 21.3-83. Standard Line and Load Terminals — Included with Breakers

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

Table 21.3-84. Optional K-Frame Line and Load Terminals

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

Application Notes

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Earth Leakage

Breakers offer superior Class 1 ground

fault protection and improved ground

fault coordination capability.

Earth leakage ground fault protection

differs from other types of systems in

its level of sensitivity. The sensitivity

of traditional devices is limited by the

cumulative error of the residual current

sensors and the placement of the phase

and neutral conductors inside the

current sensor.

Leakage breakers are zero sequence

sensing devices. They are factory sup-

plied with a single sensor and ground

fault relay built-in. This technique allows

for protection sensitivities down to the

30 milliampere level.

Leakage breakers are provided with a

full complement of easy adjustments.

The ground fault pickup setting is

adjustable from .03 to 30 amperes in

eight steps, and the ground fault time

delay setting is adjustable from instan-

taneous to 2.0 seconds in six steps.

When the pickup is set to 30 mA, the

time delay setting defaults internally to

instantaneous only. Increased selectivity

provides for improved coordination

with upstream and downstream ground

fault devices, as well as the ﬂexibility

to adjust for transient currents.

Three-Phase, Four-Wire Loads

For 3-phase applications with

line-to-neutral loads, select 4-pole

earth leakage breakers and wire the

neutral through the fourth (right) pole.

Three-Phase, Three-Wire Loads

For applications with only 3-phase,

3-wire, line-to-line connected loads,

select 3-pole earth leakage breakers.

Single-Phase Loads

For single-phase, 2-wire or 3-wire

applications, use a 3-pole earth leakage

breaker and connect all conductors

through the breaker.

Frame Amperes Terminal

Body

Material 

Wire

Type AWG/kcmil

Wire Range/Number

of Conductors

Poles

F 15 – 100

110 – 150 Steel

Stainless Steel Cu/Al

Cu/Al (1) #14 – 1/0

(1) #4 – 4/0 3, 4

3, 4

J100 – 250 Aluminum Cu/Al (1) #4 – 250 kcmil 3, 4

K200 – 350

400 Aluminum

Aluminum Cu/Al

Cu/Al (1) 250 – 250 kcmil

(1) 3/0 – 250 kcmil 3, 4

3, 4

Terminal

Body

Material 

Wire

Type AWG/kcmil

Wire Range/Number

of Conductors

Number

of Poles Kit

Quantity Catalog

Number

Aluminum

Aluminum Cu/Al

Cu/Al (2) 250 kcmil

(1) 500 kcmil 3

23TA401K

3TA401K

Aluminum

Aluminum Cu/Al

Cu/Al (2) 250 kcmil

(1) 500 kcmil 4

24TA401K

4TA401K

Copper

Copper Cu

Cu (1) 3 – 350 kcmil

(1) 3 – 350 kcmil 3

8T300K

T300K

Copper

Copper Cu

Cu (1) 250 – 500 kcmil

(1) 250 – 500 kcmil 3

8T350K

T350K

Copper

Copper Cu

Cu (1) 3/0 – 250 kcmil

(1) 3/0 – 250 kcmil 3

23T400K

3T400K

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-34

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors Sheet 0630

Motor Circuit Protectors, 3 – 1200 Amperes

Motor Circuit Protectors 3 – 1200 Amperes

Catalog Numbering System

Note: This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers

for circuit breakers or trip units.

Table 21.3-85. Catalog Numbering System — HMCP

On J- and K-Frame HMCPs only.

Table 21.3-86. Catalog Numbering System — GMCP/HMCPE

Table 21.3-87. 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Minimum

UL listed for use with Cutler-Hammer Motor Starters.

Equipped with an electronic trip device.

Magnetic Trip Range/

NEMA Starter Size

A0 = 9 – 30/0

C0 = 21 – 70/0

E0 = 45 – 150/0

D0 = 40 – 60/0

H1 = 90 – 300/1

G2 = 80 – 120/2

K2 = 150 – 500/2

J2 = 115 – 170/2

M2 = 210 – 700/2

L3 = 160 – 240/3

R3 = 300 – 1000/3

T4 = 450 – 1500/4

U4 = 750 – 2500/4

A5 = 350 – 700/5

C5 = 450 – 900/5

D5 = 500 – 1000/5

F5 = 625 – 1250/5

G5 = 750 – 1500/5

J5 = 875 – 1750/5

K5 = 1000 – 2000/5

L5 = 1125 – 2250/5

W5 = 1250 – 2500/5

N5 = 1500 – 3000/5

R5 = 1750 – 3500/5

X5 = 2000 – 4000/5

L6 = 1800 – 6000/6

X6 = 500 – 2500

Y6 = 1000 – 4000

X7 = 1600 – 6400

Y8 = 2400 – 9600

HMCP 003 A0 C

Motor Circuit

Protector Type

HMCP = 3-Pole

HM2P = 2-Pole 

HMCPS= 3-Pole

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

003 = 3

007 = 7

015 = 15

025 = 25

030 = 30

050 = 50

070 = 70

100 = 100

150 = 150

250 = 250

400 = 400

600 = 600

800 = 800

12 = 1200

Suffix

C= Non-Aluminum Terminals

W= W/O Terminals

X= Load Terminals Only

Y= Line Terminals Only

S= Stainless Steel Terms

(150 A Frame Only)

No Sufﬁx = Standard Terminals on

Line and Load

(Electronic)

Continuous Amperes MCP Trip Range (Amperes) MCP Catalog Number

JG-Frame 

250 500 – 1000

625 – 1250

750 – 1500

HMCPJ250D5L

HMCPJ250F5L

HMCPJ250G5L

875 – 1750

1000 – 2000

1125 – 2250

1250 – 2500

HMCPJ250J5L

HMCPJ250K5L

HMCPJ250L5L

HMCPJ250W5L

LG-Frame 

600 1125 – 2250

1500 – 3000

1750 – 3500

HMCPL600L

HMCPL600N

HMCPL600R

2000 – 4000

2250 – 4500

2500 – 5000

3000 – 6000

HMCPL600X

HMCPL600Y

HMCPL600P

HMCPL600M

GMCP/HMCPE 003 A0 C

Motor Circuit

Protector Type

GMCP = 3-Pole

HMCPE = 3-Pole

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

003 = 3

007 = 7

015 = 15

030 = 30

050 = 50

060 = 60

063 = 63

070 = 70

100 = 100

Magnetic Trip Range

GMCP HMCPE

A0 = 15 – 30

C0 = 35 – 70

E0 = 75 – 150

H1 = 150 – 300

K2 = 250 – 500

J2 = 300 – 600

M2 = 320 – 630

A0 = 9 – 33

C0 = 21 – 77

E0 = 45 – 165

H1 = 90 – 330

K2 = 150 – 550

—

M2 = 210 – 770

R3 = 300 – 1100

T3 = 500 – 1500

Suffix

C= Non Aluminum

Terminals

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-35

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors

Sheet 0631

General Information

Designated as the Eaton’s Cutler-

Hammer Types GMCP, HMCPE and

HMCP are instantaneous-only motor

circuit protectors. The GMCP and

HMCPE are 480V devices rated

between 3 – 100 amperes. The HMCP

is a 600V device available in four

frames and rated between 3 – 600

amperes. The MCP is designed to

comply with the applicable require-

ments of Underwriters Laboratories

Standard UL 489, Canadian Standards

Association Standard C22.2 No. 5, and

International Electrotechnical Commis-

sion Recommendations IEC 157-1.

An innovative design of internal

components allows higher MCP-starter

combination interrupting ratings. The

MCP is marked to permit proper elec-

trical application within the assigned

equipment ratings.

The MCP is a recognized component

(UL File E7819) and complies with the

applicable requirements of Underwriters

Laboratories Standard UL 489. It is also

designed to comply with the applicable

requirements of Canadian Standards

Association Standard C22.2 No. 5, and

International Electrotechnical Commis-

sion Recommendations IEC 157-1. The

interrupting rating is deﬁned on the

assembled equipment nameplate.

Accessories

Termination Accessories

■Line and load terminals.

■Keeper nut/plug nut.

■Control wire terminal kit.

■Base mounting hardware.

■Terminal shields.

■Terminal end covers.

■Interphase barriers.

■ELC current limiter.

■Multiwire connector.

Internal Accessories

■Only one internal accessory per

pole maximum.

■Alarm lockout (Make/Break).

■Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break).

■Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B).

■Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B).

■Auxiliary switch/alarm lockout.

■Shunt Trip — standard.

■Shunt Trip — low energy.

■Undervoltage release mechanism.

External Accessories

■Non-padlockable handle block.

■Padlockable handle block.

■Padlockable handle lock hasp.

■Key interlock kit.

■Sliding bar interlock — requires

two breakers.

■Electrical (solenoid) operator.

■Handle mechanism.

■Door hardware/accessories.

■DIN rail adapter (GMCP only).

Modiﬁcations

■Moisture fungus treatment.

■Freeze test.

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-36

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors Sheet 0632

Motor Protection

Note: These recommendations are based on

previous code interpretations. See the current

NEC for exact up-to-date information.

In line with NEC 430-6(a), circuit breaker,

HMCP and fuse rating selections are

based on full-load currents for induction

motors running at speeds normal for

belted motors and motors with normal

torque characteristics using data shown

taken from NEC table 430-150 (3-phase).

Actual motor nameplate ratings shall

be used for selecting motor running

overload protection. Motors built special

for low speeds, high torque character-

istics, special starting conditions and

applications will require other consid-

erations as deﬁned in the application

section of the NEC.

Circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse ampere

rating selections are in line with maxi-

mum rules given in NEC 430-52 and

Table 430-152. Based on known char-

teristics of Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer

type breakers,

speciﬁc units are recom-

mended. The current ratings are no

more than the maximum limits set by

the NEC rules for motors with code let-

ters F to V or without code letters.

Motors with lower code letters will

require further considerations.

In general, these selections were

based on:

1. Ambient — outside enclosure

not more than 40°C (104°F).

2. Motor starting — infrequent

starting, stopping or reversing.

3. Motor accelerating time —

10 seconds or less.

4. Locked rotor — maximum six

times motor FLA.

5. Type HMCP motor circuit protector

may not set at more than 1300%

of the motor full-load current, to

comply with the NEC, Sec. 430-52.

(Except for new E rated motor

which can be set up to 1700%.)

Circuit breaker selections are based

on types with standard interrupting

ratings. Higher interrupting rating

types may be required to satisfy

speciﬁc system application

requirements.

For motor full load currents of 208 and

200 volts, increase the corresponding

230-volt motor values by 10 and 15%

respectively.

Table 21.3-88. Motor Circuit Protector (MCP), Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Selection Guide

Consult fuse manufacturer’s catalog for smaller fuse ratings.

Types are for minimum interrupting capacity breakers. Ensure that the fault duty does not exceed

breakers I.C.

Designers should verify and specify motor inrush currents to fall within the magnetic pick-up

range, or use a higher range product.

Hp Full Load

Amperes

(NEC) FLA

Fuse Size NEC 430-152

Maximum

Amperes 

Recommended Cutler-Hammer MCPs &

Circuit Breakers

Circuit

Breaker Motor Circuit

Protector Type HMCP 

Time Delay Non-Time Delay Amperes Type Amperes Adj. Range

230 Volts, 3-Phase

1-1/2

3.6

5.2

6.8

9.6

HFD

21 – 70

45 – 150

7-1/2

15.2

150

HFD

90 – 300

150 – 500

210 – 700

104

100

125

150

200

175

225

250

350

100

125

150

HFD

100

150

300 – 1000

450 – 1500

100

130

154

192

248

250

300

350

450

400

500

600

800

200

225

300

400

HFD

HKD

150

250

400

600

750 – 2500

1250 – 2500

2000 – 4000

1800 – 6000

125

150

200

312

360

480

600

700

1000

1200

1600

500

600

700

HLD

HND

600

—

1800 – 6000

—

460 Volts, 3-Phase

1-1/2

1.8

2.6

3.4

4.8

HFD

9 – 30

21 – 70

7-1/2

7.6

HFD

45 – 150

90 – 300

100

110

125

175

100

HFD

100

150 – 500

210 – 700

300 – 1000

100

124

125

150

175

225

200

150

300

400

110

250

150

175

HFD

HJD

100

150

300 – 1000

450 – 1500

750 – 2500

125

150

200

156

180

240

300

350

450

500

600

800

225

250

350

HJD

HKD

250

400

1250 – 2500

2000 – 4000

575 Volts, 3-Phase

1-1/2

1.4

2.1

2.7

3.9

HFD

9 – 30

21 – 70

7-1/2

6.1

HFD

45 – 150

90 – 300

100

125

HFD

150 – 500

210 – 700

100

110

150

175

200

250

300

100

125

150

175

HFD

HJD

100

150

300 – 1000

450 – 1500

125

150

200

125

144

192

225

300

350

400

450

600

200

225

300

HJD

HKD

250

400

875 – 1750

1250 – 2500

2000 – 4000

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-37

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors

Sheet 0633

Motor Circuit Protector Catalog Numbers and Ranges

The following tables provide speciﬁc catalog numbers and

application ranges for the G-Frame (GMCP), E-Frame (HMCPE),

J-Frame (HMCP) and K-Frame (HMCP) motor circuit protectors.

Motor circuit protector models are available with earth leakage

ground fault protection. Models are also available for motor

starters provided with electronic overload relays rather than

thermal overload relays, such as the Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer

Advantage

motor starter.

Similar tables for the selection of the settings are provided

with motor control products which use motor circuit protectors.

As required by the NEC, the HMCP setting is selected by using

the actual full load ampere data from the motor nameplate.

The corresponding trip settings provided are within 13 times

the minimum full load amperes of the motor as required by

the NEC. The NEC allows a higher setting for Design E motors.

Table 21.3-89. G-Frame

Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at

13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is

required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or

MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of

the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.

Table 21.3-90. E-Frame

Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at

13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is

required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or

MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of

the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.

For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher

than values shown.

Settings above 10x In are for special applications. NEC Article 430-110(a)

requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be no less

than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating.

MCP

Catalog

Number

NEMA

Starter

Size

Continuous

Amperes Cam

Setting Motor

Full Load

Current

Amperes 

MCP

Trip

Setting

GMCP003A0C 0, 1 3 A

1.1 – 1.2

1.3 – 1.5

1.6 – 1.7

1.8 – 1.9

2.0 – 2.2

2.3 – 2.5

GMCP007C0C 0, 1 7 A

2.6 – 3.1

3.2 – 3.6

3.7 – 3.9

4.3 – 4.7

4.8 – 5.2

5.3 – 5.7

GMCP015E0C 0, 1 15 A

5.7 – 6.8

6.9 – 7.9

8.0 – 9.1

105

9.2 – 10.3

10.4 – 11.4

11.5 – 12.6

120

135

150

GMCP030H1C 130 A

12.7 – 13.7

13.8 – 16.0

16.1 – 18.3

150

180

210

18.4 – 20.6

20.7 – 22.9

23.0 – 25.2

240

270

300

GMCP050K2C 250 A

19.3 – 22.9

23.0 – 26.8

26.9 – 30.6

250

300

350

30.7 – 34.5

34.6 – 38.3

38.4 – 42.1

400

450

500

GMCP060J2C 360 A

23.1 – 27.5

27.7 – 32.2

32.3 – 36.7

300

360

420

36.9 – 41.4

41.5 – 46.0

46.2 – 50.5

480

540

600

GMCP063M2C 363 A

24.2 – 32.1

29.1 – 34.8

33.9 – 39.4

320

380

440

38.8 – 46.4

43.6 – 48.9

48.5 – 53.7

500

570

630

MCP

Catalog

Number

NEMA

Starter

Size

Continuous

Amperes Cam

Setting Motor

Full Load

Current

Amperes 

MCP

Trip

Setting



HMCPE003A0C 0 3 A

.69 – .91

1.1 – 1.3

1.6 – 1.7

2.0 – 2.2

2.3 – 2.5

2.3 – 2.6

HMCPE007C0C 0 7 A

1.5 – 2.0

2.6 – 3.1

3.7 – 3.9

4.8 – 5.2

5.3 – 5.7

5.8 – 6.1

HMCPE015E0C 015 A

3.4 – 4.5

5.7 – 6.8

8.0 – 9.1

105

10.4 – 11.4

11.5 – 12.6

12.7 – 13.0

135

150

165

HMCPE030H1C 130 A

3.9 – 9.1

11.5 – 13.7

16.1 – 18.3

150

210

20.7 – 22.9

23.0 – 25.2

25.3 – 26.1

270

300

330

HMCPE050K2C 250 A

11.5 – 15.2

19.2 – 22.9

26.9 – 30.6

150

250

350

34.6 – 38.3

38.4 – 42.1

42.2 – 43.5

450

500

550

HMCPE070M2C 270 A

16.1 – 30.6

26.9 – 32.2

37.6 – 42.9

210

350

490

48.4 – 53.7

53.8 – 59.1

59.2 – 60.9

630

700

770

HMCPE100R3C 310

23.0 – 30.6

38.4 – 46.0

53.8 – 61.4

300

500

700

69.2 – 76.8

76.9 – 84.5

84.6 – 87.0

900

1000

1100

HMCPE100T3C 310

38.4 – 46.0

53.8 – 61.4

69.2 – 76.8

500

700

900

84.6 – 76.8



110

1300

1500

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-38

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors Sheet 0634

Table 21.3-91. F-Frame (Also Available with Earth Leakage Ground Fault)

Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at

13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is

required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or

MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of

the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.

For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher

than values shown.

(Continued)

Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at

13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is

required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or

MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of

the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.

For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher

than values shown.

MCP

Catalog

Number

NEMA

Starter

Size

Continuous

Amperes Cam

Setting Motor

Full Load

Current

Amperes 

MCP

Trip

Setting 

HMCP003A0 0, 1 3 A

.69 – .91

.92 – 1.0

1.1 – 1.2

1.3 – 1.5

1.6 – 1.7

1.8 – 1.9

H 2.0 – 2.2

2.3 – 2.5 27

HMCP007C0 0, 1 7 A

1.5 – 2.0

2.1 – 2.5

2.6 – 3.1

3.2 – 3.6

3.7 – 3.9

4.3 – 4.7

H 4.8 – 5.2

5.3 – 5.7 63

HMCP015E0 0, 1 15 A

3.4 – 4.5

4.6 – 5.6

5.7 – 6.8

6.9 – 7.9

8.0 – 9.1

9.2 – 10.3

105

120

H10.4 – 11.4

11.5 – 12.6 135

150

HMCP030H1 130 A

6.9 – 9.1

9.2 – 11.4

11.5 – 13.7

120

150

13.8 – 16.0

16.1 – 18.3

18.4 – 20.6

180

210

240

H20.7 – 22.9

23.0 – 25.2 270

300

HMCP050K2 250 A

11.5 – 15.2

15.3 – 19.1

19.2 – 22.9

150

200

250

23.0 – 26.8

26.9 – 30.6

30.7 – 34.5

300

350

400

H34.6 – 38.3

38.4 – 42.1 450

500

MCP

Catalog

Number

NEMA

Starter

Size

Continuous

Amperes Cam

Setting Motor

Full Load

Current

Amperes 

MCP

Trip

Setting 

HMCP070M2 2 70 A

16.1 – 21.4

21.5 – 26.8

26.9 – 32.2

210

280

350

32.3 – 37.5

37.6 – 42.9

43.0 – 48.3

420

490

560

H 48.4 – 53.7

53.8 – 59.1 630

700

HMCP100R3 3100 A

23.0 – 30.6

30.7 – 38.3

38.4 – 46.0

300

400

500

46.1 – 53.7

53.8 – 61.4

61.5 – 69.1

600

700

800

H 69.2 – 76.8

76.9 – 84.5 900

1000

HMCP150T4 4150 A

34.6 – 46.0

46.1 – 57.5

57.6 – 69.1

450

600

750

69.2 – 80.6

80.7 – 92.2

92.3 – 103.7

900

1050

1200

H103.8 – 115.2

115.3 – 126.7 1350

1500

HMCP150U4 4150 A

57.0 – 75.0

76.0 – 95.0

96.0 – 114.0

750

1000

1250

115.0 – 130.7



1500

1750

2000



2250

2500

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-39

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors

Sheet 0635

Table 21.3-92. MCPs for Application with Motor Starters Equipped

with Electronic Overload Relays (Also available with Earth Leakage

Ground Fault)

Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at

13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is

required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or

MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of

the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.

For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher

than values shown.

(Continued)

Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at

13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is

required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or

MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of

the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.

For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher

than values shown.

Settings above 130 amperes are for special applications. NEC Article

430-110(a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to

be not less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating.

MCP

Catalog

Number

NEMA

Starter

Size

Continuous

Amperes Cam

Setting Motor

Full Load

Current

Amperes 

MCP

Trip

Setting 

HMCPS003A0 0, 1 3 A

.69 – .91

.92 – 1.0

1.1 – 1.2

1.3 – 1.5

1.6 – 1.7

1.8 – 1.9

H 2.0 – 2.2

2.3 – 2.5 27

HMCPS007C0 0, 1 7 A

1.5 – 2.0

2.1 – 2.5

2.6 – 3.1

3.2 – 3.6

3.7 – 3.9

4.3 – 4.7

H 4.8 – 5.2

5.3 – 5.7 63

HMCPS015E0C 0, 1 15 A

3.4 – 4.5

4.6 – 5.6

5.7 – 6.8

6.9 – 7.9

8.0 – 9.1

9.2 – 10.3

105

120

H10.4 – 11.4

11.5 – 12.6 135

150

HMCPS030H1C 130 A

6.9 – 9.1

9.2 – 11.4

11.5 – 13.7

120

150

13.8 – 16.0

16.1 – 18.3

18.4 – 20.6

180

210

240

H20.7 – 22.9

23.0 – 25.2 270

300

MCP

Catalog

Number

NEMA

Starter

Size

Continuous

Amperes Cam

Setting Motor

Full Load

Current

Amperes 

MCP

Trip

Setting



HMCPS050K2C 2 50 A

11.5 – 15.2

15.3 – 19.1

19.2 – 22.9

150

200

250

23.0 – 26.8

26.9 – 30.6

30.7 – 34.5

300

350

400

H 34.6 – 38.3

38.4 – 42.1 450

500

HMCPS100R3C 3100 A

23.0 – 30.6

30.7 – 38.3

38.4 – 46.0

300

400

500

46.1 – 53.7

53.8 – 61.4

61.5 – 69.1

600

700

800

H 69.2 – 76.8

76.9 – 84.5 900

1000

HMCP150T4C 4150 A

34.6 – 46.0

46.1 – 57.5

57.6 – 69.1

450

600

750

69.2 – 80.6

80.7 – 92.2

92.3 – 103.7

900

1050

1200

H103.8 – 115.2

115.3 – 126.7 1350

1500

HMCP150U4C 4150 A

57.0 – 75.0

76.0 – 95.0

96.0 – 114.0

750

1000

1250

115.0 – 130.7



1500

1750

2000



2250

2500

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-40

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors Sheet 0636

Table 21.3-93. J-Frame (Also available with Earth Leakage Ground Fault)

Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin

with “HM2P” in place of “HMCP.”

Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at

13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is

required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or

MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of

the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.

For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher

than values shown.

(Continued)

Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin

with “HM2P” in place of “HMCP.”

Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at

13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is

required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or

MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of

the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.

For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher

than values shown.

Table 21.3-94. JG-Frame 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Minimum 

UL listed for use with Cutler-Hammer Motor Starters.

MCP

Catalog

Number 

NEMA

Starter

Size

Continuous

Amperes Cam

Setting Motor

Full Load

Current

Amperes 

MCP

Trip

Setting 

HMCP250A5 4

250 A

27.0 – 30.7

30.8 – 33.8

33.9 – 36.9

350

400

440

37.0 – 40.3

40.4 – 43.8

43.9 – 46.9

480

525

570

47.0 – 50.7

50.8 – 53.8

53.9 – 57.2

610

660

700

HMCP250C5 5

250 A

34.7 – 38.8

38.9 – 43.4

43.5 – 47.6

450

505

565

47.7 – 52.2

52.3 – 56.5

56.6 – 60.7

620

680

735

60.8 – 64.9

65.0 – 69.2

69.3 – 73.5

790

845

900

HMCP250D5 5

250 A

38.5 – 43.4

43.5 – 48.0

48.1 – 53.0

500

565

625

53.1 – 57.6

57.7 – 62.3

62.4 – 67.3

690

750

810

67.4 – 71.9

72.0 – 76.9

77.0 – 81.6

875

935

1000

HMCP250F5 5

250 A

48.1 – 53.8

53.9 – 59.9

60.0 – 66.1

625

700

780

66.2 – 72.3

72.4 – 78.4

78.5 – 83.8

860

940

1020

83.9 – 89.9

90.0 – 96.1

96.2 – 102.0

1090

1170

1250

HMCP250G5 5

250 A

57.7 – 64.6

64.7 – 71.9

72.0 – 79.2

750

840

935

79.3 – 86.5

86.6 – 93.8

93.9 – 101.1

1030

1125

1220

101.2 – 108.4

108.5 – 115.3

115.4 – 122.4

1315

1410

1500

MCP

Catalog

Number 

NEMA

Starter

Size

Continuous

Amperes Cam

Setting Motor

Full Load

Current

Amperes 

MCP

Trip

Setting 

HMCP250J5 5

250 A

67.4 – 75.3

75.4 – 83.8

83.9 – 92.3

875

980

1090

92.4 – 100.7

100.8 – 109.2

109.3 – 117.6

1200

1310

1420

117.7 – 126.1

126.2 – 134.6

134.7 – 142.8

1530

1640

1750

HMCP250K5 5

250 A

77.0 – 86.5

86.6 – 96.1

96.2 – 105.7

1000

1125

1250

105.8 – 115.3

115.4 – 124.9

125.0 – 134.6

1375

1500

1625

134.7 – 144.2

144.3 – 153.8

153.9 – 163.3

1750

1875

2000

HMCP250L5 5

250 A

86.6 – 97.3

97.4 – 108.4

108.5 – 118.8

1125

1265

1410

118.9 – 129.9

130.0 – 140.7

140.8 – 151.5

1545

1690

1830

151.6 – 162.3

162.4 – 173.0

173.1 – 183.6

1970

2110

2250

HMCP250W5 5

250 A

96.2 – 108.0

108.1 – 119.9

120.0 – 132.3

1250

1405

1560

132.4 – 144.2

144.3 – 156.1

156.2 – 168.0

1720

1875

2030

168.1 – 179.9

180.0 – 192.3

192.4 – 204.0

2185

2340

2500

Continuous

Amperes MCP Trip Range

(Amperes) MCP

Catalog Number

250 500 – 1000

625 – 1250

750 – 1500

HMCPJ250D5L

HMCPJ250F5L

HMCPJ250G5L

875 – 1750

1000 – 2000

1125 – 2250

1250 – 2500

HMCPJ250J5L

HMCPJ250K5L

HMCPJ250L5L

HMCPJ250W5L

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-41

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors

Sheet 0637

Table 21.3-95. K-Frame

Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin

with “HM2P” in place of “HMCP.”

Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at

13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is

required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or

MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of the

NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.

For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher

than values shown.

(Continued)

Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin

with “HM2P” in place of “HMCP.”

Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at

13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is

required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or

MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of the

NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.

For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher

than values shown.

MCP

Catalog

Number 

NEMA

Starter

Size

Continuous

Amperes Cam

Setting Motor

Full Load

Current

Amperes 

MCP

Trip

Setting 

HMCP400D5 5

400 A

38.5 – 43.4

43.5 – 48.0

48.1 – 53.0

500

565

625

53.1 – 57.6

57.7 – 62.3

62.4 – 67.3

690

750

810

67.4 – 71.9

72.0 – 76.9

77.0 – 81.6

875

935

1000

HMCP400F5 5

400 A

48.1 – 53.8

53.9 – 59.9

60.0 – 66.1

625

700

780

66.2 – 72.3

72.4 – 78.4

78.5 – 83.8

860

940

1020

83.9 – 89.9

90.0 – 96.1

96.2 – 102.0

1090

1170

1250

HMCP400G5 5

400 A

57.7 – 64.6

64.7 – 71.9

72.0 – 79.2

750

840

935

79.3 – 86.5

86.6 – 93.8

93.9 – 101.1

1030

1125

1220

101.2 – 108.4

108.5 – 115.3

115.4 – 122.4

1315

1410

1500

HMCP400J5 5

400 A

67.4 – 75.3

75.4 – 83.8

83.9 – 92.3

875

980

1090

92.4 – 100.7

100.8 – 109.2

109.3 – 117.6

1200

1310

1420

117.7 – 126.1

126.2 – 134.6

134.7 – 142.8

1530

1640

1750

HMCP400K5 5

400 A

77.0 – 86.5

86.6 – 96.1

96.2 – 105.7

1000

1125

1250

105.8 – 115.3

115.4 – 124.9

125.0 – 134.6

1375

1500

1625

134.7 – 144.2

144.3 – 153.8

153.9 – 163.3

1750

1875

2000

HMCP400L5 5

400 A

86.6 – 97.3

97.4 – 108.4

108.5 – 118.8

1125

1265

1410

118.9 – 129.9

130.0 – 140.7

140.8 – 151.5

1545

1690

1830

151.6 – 162.3

162.4 – 173.0

173.1 – 183.6

1970

2110

2250

MCP

Catalog

Number 

NEMA

Starter

Size

Continuous

Amperes Cam

Setting Motor

Full Load

Current

Amperes 

MCP

Trip

Setting 

HMCP400W5 5

400 A

96.2 – 108.0

108.1 – 119.9

120.0 – 132.3

1250

1405

1560

132.4 – 144.2

144.3 – 156.1

156.2 – 168.0

1720

1875

2030

168.1 – 179.9

180.0 – 192.3

192.4 – 204.0

2185

2340

2500

HMCP400N5 5

400 A

115.4 – 129.9

130.0 – 144.2

144.3 – 158.4

1500

1690

1875

158.5 – 173.0

173.1 – 187.6

187.7 – 201.9

2060

2250

2440

202.0 – 216.1

216.2 – 230.7

230.8 – 244.9

2625

2810

3000

HMCP400R5 5

400 A

134.7 – 151.5

151.6 – 168.4

168.5 – 185.3

1750

1970

2190

185.4 – 201.9

202.0 – 218.8

218.9 – 235.7

2410

2625

2845

235.8 – 252.6

252.7 – 269.2

269.3 – 285.7

3065

3285

3500

HMCP400X5 5

400 A

153.9 – 173.0

173.1 – 192.3

192.4 – 211.5

2000

2250

2500

211.6 – 230.7

230.8 – 249.9

250.0 – 269.2

2750

3000

3250

269.3 – 288.4

288.5 – 307.6

307.7 – 326.9

3500

3750

4000

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-42

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors Sheet 0638

Table 21.3-96. L-Frame 

Equipped with electronic trip device.

Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at

13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is

required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or

MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of

the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.

Table 21.3-97. N-Frame 

Equipped with electronic trip device.

Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at

13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is

required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or

MCP ratings should be used.

Table 21.3-98. LG-Frame 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Minimum 

UL listed for use with Cutler-Hammer Motor Starters.

Equipped with an electronic trip device.

MCP

Catalog

Number

NEMA

Starter

Size

Continuous

Amperes Cam

Setting Motor Full

Load Current

Amperes 

MCP

Trip

Setting

HMCP600L6W 6

600 A

138.5 – 184.5

184.6 – 230.7

230.8 – 276.8

1800

2400

3000

276.9 – 323.0

323.1 – 369.1

369.2 – 415.3

3600

4200

4800

H415.4 – 461.4

461.5 – 507.7 5400

6000

HMCP600L6W 6

600 A

138.5 – 184.5

184.6 – 230.7

230.8 – 276.8

1800

2400

3000

276.9 – 323.0

323.1 – 369.1

369.2 – 415.3

3600

4200

4800

H415.4 – 461.4

461.5 – 507.7 5400

6000

HMCP600X6W 6

600 A

38.5 – 46.1

46.2 – 61.4

61.5 – 76.8

500

600

800

76.9 – 96.1

96.2 – 115.3

115.4 – 153.7

1000

1250

1500

H153.8 – 192.2

192.3 – 230.7 2000

2500

HMCP600Y6W 6

600 A

76.9 – 96.1

96.2 – 115.3

115.4 – 153.7

1000

1250

1500

153.8 – 192.2

192.3 – 230.7

230.8 – 269.1

2000

2500

3000

H269.2 – 307.6

307.7 – 346.1 3500

4000

MCP

Catalog

Number

NEMA

Starter

Size

Continuous

Amperes Cam

Setting Motor Full

Load Current

Amperes 

MCP

Trip

Setting

HMCP800X7W 7

800 A

123.1 – 184.5

184.6 – 246.1

246.2 – 307.6

1600

2400

3200

307.7 – 369.1

369.2 – 430.7

430.8 – 492.2

4000

4800

5600

7G492.3 – 553.7 6400

HMCP12Y8W 7

1200 A

184.6 – 276.8

276.9 – 369.1

369.2 – 461.4

2400

3600

4800

461.5 – 553.7

553.8 – 646.1

646.2 – 738.4

6000

7200

8400

7G738.5 – 830.7 9600

Continuous

Amperes MCP Trip Range

(Amperes) MCP

Catalog Number

250 1125 – 2250

1500 – 3000

1750 – 3500

HMCPL600L

HMCPL600N

HMCPL600R

2000 – 4000

2250 – 4500

2500 – 5000

3000 – 6000

HMCPL600X

HMCPL600Y

HMCPL600P

HMCPL600M

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-43

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Trip Units

Sheet 0639

Electronic RMS Trip Unit

General

Eaton offers the most comprehensive

range of electronic trip units in the

industry for Molded Case Circuit

Breakers. All electronic trip units are

rms sensing and can be applied from

70 amperes up through 2500 amperes.

Eaton offers electronic trip units as

standard for circuit breakers rated

800 amperes and above and offers

electronic trip units as optional for

circuit breakers 70 amperes up

through 600 amperes.

Digitrip electronic trip units are ac

devices that employ microprocessor-

based technology that provides a true

rms current sensing means for proper

correlation with thermal characteristics

of conductors and equipment. The pri-

mary function of the Digitrip electronic

trip unit is to provide circuit protection.

This is achieved by analyzing the sec-

ondary current signals received from

the circuit breaker current sensors and

initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker

shunt trip when pre-set current levels

and time delay settings are exceeded.

Electronic trip units are applied to

distribution systems when high stan-

dards of protection and coordination

are called for. In addition, electronic

trip units can provide further enhanced

features such as alarming, diagnostics,

system monitoring and communications.

Cutler-Hammer rms sensing trip

units fall into two main categories:

■Front adjustable trip units

(Digitrip RMS 310, 310+, 510, 610,

810 and 910).

■Programmable trip units

(Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050).

Front Adjustable Trip Units

Front adjustable trip units are elec-

tronic trip units that have up to nine

time-current setting options that are

set by switches mounted on the front

of the trip unit. The application for

front adjustable trip units would be

distribution systems that can be coor-

dinated within the range of settings

available and that do not require

sophisticated coordination strategies

to be applied down through the distri-

bution system to small rated breakers.

Programmable Trip Units (OPTIM)

Programmable trip units are electronic

trip units that have up to ten time-

current setting options that are pro-

grammed electronically by the use of a

programming device. The application

for programmable trip units would be

high integrity distribution systems that

require superior levels of system coor-

dination coupled with system alarming,

diagnostics and monitoring.

Rating Plugs

Rating plugs provide a means to establish

the breaker’s continuous current rating.

Rating plugs are color-coded and inter-

changeable to make it easy to match

the correct rating plug with the correct

trip unit. The same rating plug can be

applied to both 50 and 60 Hz distribution

systems. In general, most rating plugs

are of the ﬁxed ampere rating type.

Eaton does offer an adjustable rating

plug as an option for the Digitrip RMS

310 trip unit.

Table 21.3-99. The Digitrip Family of Low Voltage Electronic Trip Units

Optional features.

RMS 310 RMS 310+ RMS 510 OPTIM 550 RMS 610 RMS 810 RMS 910 OPTIM 1050

rms Sensing

—

5 Functions

—

Front Adjustable

rms Sensing

—

6 Functions

—

Front Adjustable

rms Sensing

—

9 Functions

—

Front Adjustable

—

Zone Selective

Interlocking

rms Sensing

—

10 Functions

—

Programmable

—

Load Monitoring

—

Diagnostics

—

Zone Selective

Interlocking 

—

Communications 

rms Sensing

—

9 Functions

—

Front Adjustable

—

Zone Selective

Interlocking

—

Load Monitoring

—

Diagnostics

rms Sensing

—

9 Functions

—

Front Adjustable

—

Zone Selective

Interlocking

—

Load Monitoring

—

Diagnostics

—

Communications

—

Power and Energy

Monitoring

rms Sensing

—

9 Functions

—

Front Adjustable

—

Zone Selective

Interlocking

—

Load Monitoring

—

Diagnostics

—

Communications

—

Power and Energy

Monitoring

—

Harmonics

rms Sensing

—

10 Functions

—

Programmable

—

Zone Selective

Interlocking

—

Load Monitoring

—

Diagnostics

—

Communications

—

Power and Energy

Monitoring

—

Harmonics

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-44

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Data — Electronic Trip Units Sheet 0640

BIM = Breaker Interface Module

Is= Sensor Rating

In= Rating Plug

Ir= LDPU Setting x In

(A) = GF Alarm

Molded Case Circuit Breaker Digitrip Selection Guide

Table 21.3-100. Molded Case Circuit Breaker Digitrip Selection Guide

Adjust by rating plug.

Must install as ﬁeld upgrade, or factory option.

LS/LSG only.

Not to exceed 1200 amperes.

L and N Frames *20-100% x Is. R Frame *25-100% x In.

By OPTIMizer/BIM.

Yes with addition of Energy Sentinel.

Trip Unit

Type Digitrip

RMS 310 Digitrip

RMS 310+ Digitrip

RMS 510 Digitrip

OPTIM 550 Digitrip

RMS 610 Digitrip

RMS 810 Digitrip

RMS 910 Digitrip

OPTIM 1050

rms Sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Breaker Type

Frame

Ampere Range

Interrupting Rating at 480 V

K, L, N, R

70 – 2500 A

35, 65, 100 (kA)

JG, LG

20 – 600 A

35, 65, 100 (kA)

800 – 2500 A

65, 100 (kA)

K, L, N

70 – 2500 A

35, 65, 100 (kA)

800 – 2500 A

65, 100 (kA)

800 – 2500 A

65, 100 (kA)

800 – 2500 A

65, 100 (kA)

K, L, N, R

70 – 2500 A

35, 65, 100 (kA)

Protection

Ordering Options LS

LSG LSI

LSIG LS

LSG LSI

LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG,

LSG, LSIG LSI, LSI(A),

LSIG LI, LS, LSI,

LSG, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG,

LSG, LSIG LSI(A), LISG

Fixed Rated Plug (I

)

Overtemperature Trip Yes

Yes No

Yes Yes

Yes

Long Delay Protection (L)

Adjustable Rating Plug (I

)

Long Delay Pickup

Long Delay Time I

Yes

0.5 – 1.0(In)



12 Seconds

40 – 100% Frame

2 – 24 Seconds

0.5 – 1.0 x (I

)

2 – 24 Seconds

0.4 – 1.0 x (I

)

2 – 24 Seconds

0.5 – 1.0 x (I

)

2 – 24 Seconds

0.5 – 1.0 x (I

)

2 – 24 Seconds

0.5 – 1.0 x (I

)

2 – 24 Seconds

0.4 – 1.0 x (I

)

2 – 24 Seconds

Long Delay Time I

Long Delay

Thermal Memory

High Load Alarm

Yes

1 – 5 Seconds

Yes

0.5 – 1.0 x I

Yes

0.85 x I

Yes

0.85 x I

Yes

0.85 x I

1 – 5 Seconds

Yes

0.5 – 1.0 x I

Short Delay Protection (S)

Short Delay Pickup 200 – 800% x (I

)— 200 – 600%

S1&S2 x (I

)150 – 800%

x (I

)200 – 600%

S1&S2 x (I

)200 – 600%

S1&S2 x (I

)200 – 600%

S1&S2 x (I

)150 – 800%

x (I

)

Short Delay Time I

Short Delay Time Flat 100 ms

No No

Inst – 300 ms Yes

No No

Inst – 300 ms 100 – 500 ms

100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms

100 – 500 ms

Short Delay Time Z.S.I. No No Yes Optional



Yes Yes Yes Yes

Instantaneous Protection (I)

Instantaneous Pickup No 200 – 800%

x (I

)No 200 – 600%

M1&M2 x (I

)200 – 800% x (I

)200 – 600%

M1&M2 x (I

)200 – 600%

M1&M2 x (I

)20 – 600%

M1&M2 x (I

)200 – 800%

x (I

)

Discriminator

Instantaneous Override No

Yes No

Yes Yes



Yes Yes



Yes Yes



Yes Yes



Yes Yes

Yes

Ground Fault Protection (G)

Ground Fault Alarm

Ground Fault Pickup

Ground Fault Delay I

var/Frame



20 – 100% Frame

25 – 100% x I



100 – 500 ms

20/25 – 100%



20/25 – 100%



100 – 500 ms

25 – 100% x I



100 – 500 ms

25 – 100% x I



100 – 500 ms

25 – 100% x I



100 – 500 ms

20/25 – 100%



20/25 – 100%



100 – 500 ms

Ground Fault Delay Flat

Ground Fault Z.S.I.

Ground Fault

Thermal Memory

Ins – 500 ms

Yes

—

Yes

100 – 500 ms

Yes

100 – 500 ms

Optional



Yes

100 – 500 ms

Yes

100 – 500 ms

Yes

100 – 500 ms

Yes

100 – 500 ms

Yes

System Diagnostics

Cause of Trip LEDs

Magnitude of Trip

Information

Remote Signal Contacts

Yes

Optional



Yes

System Monitoring

Digital Display

Current

Voltage

Yes



Yes



Yes

Power and Energy

Power Quality-Harmonics

Power Factor



Yes

Yes (Over

PowerNet Only)

Yes

Communications

PowerNet No No No Optional



No Yes Yes Yes

Testing

Testing Method Test Set Test Kit Integral OPTIMizer,

BIM, PowerNet



Integral Integral Integral OPTIMizer,

BIM, PowerNet

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-45

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Accessories and Modiﬁcations

Sheet 0641

Internal Accessories

Note: Some UL listings pending: refer

to Eaton.

All internal accessories are of the plug-in

type and are listed for ﬁeld installation

under UL File E64983. Internal acces-

sories for sealed circuit breakers are

listed under UL File E7819 for factory

installation only. The available plug-in

accessories include the following:

■Alarm (signal)/lockout switch.

■Auxiliary switch.

■Shunt trip.

■Low energy shunt trip.

■Undervoltage release mechanism.

Typical Internal Plug-in Accessory Installed

in K-Frame Circuit Breaker

Different accessory wiring options are

available to satisfy most circuit breaker

mounting applications. The standard

wiring conﬁguration is pigtail leads exit-

ing the rear of the base directly behind

the accessory. Optional conﬁgurations

include a terminal block mounted on the

same side of the base as the accessory,

leads exiting the side of the base where

the accessory is mounted, and leads

exiting the rear of the base on the side

opposite the accessory. If accessory

leads longer than 18 inches (457.2) are

required, side-mounted terminal blocks

should be used.

Alarm (Signal)/Lockout Switch

Auxiliary Switch

Shunt Trip

PowerNet Communications Kit

Alarm (Signal)/Lockout Switch

The alarm (signal)/lockout switch

monitors circuit breaker trip status and

provides remote signaling and inter-

locking capabilities when the circuit

breaker trips. For 2-, 3- and 4-pole circuit

breakers, the alarm (signal)/lockout

switch consists of one or two SPDT

switches assembled to a plug-in module

mounted in retaining slots in the top of

the trip unit. The SPDT switch contacts

are identiﬁed as make and break con-

tacts. When the circuit breaker trips,

the make contact closes and the break

contact opens.

Auxiliary Switch

The auxiliary switch provides circuit

breaker contact status information by

monitoring the position of the molded

crossbar containing the moving con-

tact arms. The auxiliary switch is used

for remote signaling and interlocking

purposes, and consists of one or two

SPDT switches assembled to a plug-in

module mounted in retaining slots in

the top of the trip unit. Each SPDT

switch has one “a” and one “b” contact.

When the circuit breaker contacts are

open, the ”a“ contact is open and the

“b” contact is closed.

Shunt Trip

The shunt trip provides remote controlled

tripping of the circuit breaker. The shunt

trip consists of an intermittent rated

solenoid with a tripping plunger and

a cutoff switch assembled to a plug-in

module. When required for ground

fault protection applications, certain ac

rated shunt trips are suitable for oper-

ation at 55% of rated voltage.

Available in most ac and dc voltages.

Note: Approximate unlatching time —

6 milliseconds. Approximate total circuit

breaker contact opening time — 18 millisec-

onds. Endurance — 4000 electrical operations

plus 1000 mechanical operations. Supply volt-

ages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices.

Marking label included with accessory kits.

PowerNet Communications Kit

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer PowerNet

Communications

Kit provides the

option to ﬁeld install

PowerNet com-

munications into

a K-, L- or N-Frame

OPTIM 550 breaker.

Make

Break

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-46

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Accessories and Modiﬁcations Sheet 0642

Low Energy Shunt Trip

Low energy shunt trip devices are

designed to operate from low energy

output signals from dedicated current

sensors typically applied in ground fault

protection schemes. However, with a

proper control voltage source, they may

be applied in place of conventional trip

devices for special applications. Flux

paths surrounding permanent magnets

used in the shunt trip assembly hold

a charged spring poised in readiness

to operate the circuit breaker trip

mechanism. When a 100 microfarad

capacitor charged to 28 Vdc is discharged

through the shunt trip coil, the resultant

ﬂux opposes the permanent magnet ﬂux

ﬁeld, which releases the stored energy in

the spring to trip the circuit breaker. As

the circuit breaker resets, the reset arm

is actuated by the circuit breaker handle,

resetting the shunt trip. The plug-in module

is mounted in retaining slots in the top of

the trip unit. Coil is intermittent-rated only.

Cutoff provisions required in control circuit.

Undervoltage Release Mechanism

The undervoltage release mechanism

monitors a voltage (typically a line voltage)

and trips the circuit breaker when the

voltage falls to between 70 and 35% of

the solenoid coil rating.

Note: Undervoltage release mechanism

accessories are not designed for, and

should not be used as, circuit interlocks.

The undervoltage release mechanism

consists of a continuous rated solenoid

with a plunger and tripping lever

assembled to a plug-in module.

The tab on the tripping lever resets

the undervoltage release mechanism

when normal voltage has been restored

and the circuit breaker handle is moved

to the reset (OFF) position.

With no voltage applied to the under-

voltage release mechanism, the circuit

breaker contacts will not touch when a

closing operation is attempted.

on-

The nonlockable handle block secures

the circuit breaker handle in either the

ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation

allows the circuit breaker to trip when the

handle block holds the circuit breaker

handle in the ON position.) The device

is positioned over the circuit breaker

handle and secured by a setscrew to

deter accidental operation of the circuit

breaker handle. (Field installation only.)

asp

The padlockable handle lock hasp allows

the handle to be locked in the ON or OFF

position. (Trip-free operation allows the

circuit breaker to trip when the handle

lock holds the circuit breaker handle in

the ON position.) The hasp mounts on

the circuit breaker cover within the

trimline. The cover is predrilled on both

sides of the operating handle so that the

hasp can be mounted on either side of the

handle. The hasp will accommodate up

to three padlocks with 1/4-inch (6.4 mm)

shackles. One per circuit breaker. (Field

installation only.)

nter

The key interlock is used to externally

lock the circuit breaker handle in the OFF

position. When the key interlock is

locked, an extended deadbolt blocks

movement of the circuit breaker handle.

Uniquely coded keys are removable only

with the deadbolt extended. Each coded

key controls a group of circuit breakers

for a given speciﬁc customer installation.

The key interlock assembly consists of

a mounting kit and a purchaser supplied

deadbolt lock. The mounting kit com-

prises a mounting plate, which is

secured to the circuit breaker cover in

either the left- or right-pole position;

key interlock mounting hardware; and

a wire seal. Speciﬁc mounting kits are

required for individual key interlock types.

(Field installation only.)

Padlockable Handle Block

The device is positioned in the cover

opening to prevent handle movement.

Will accommodate one 5/16-inch

(8.0 mm) padlock.

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-47

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Accessories and Modiﬁcations

Sheet 0643

Table 21.3-101. Breaker Accessories and Modiﬁcations

Make only (one pole).

Requires two breakers.

Refer to the Eaton.

Breaker Frame G F J K L M N R

Termination Accessories

Line and Load Terminals ●● ●●●●●●

Plug Nut ●●

Control Wire Terminal Kit ●●●

Base Mounting Hardware ●● ●●●●●●

Terminal Shields ●●●●●

Interphase Barriers ●●●● ●

Multiwire Connectors ●●●●●

Internal Accessories

Alarm Lockout (1 Make/1 Break) ●● ●●●●●●

Alarm Lockout (2 Make/2 Break) ●●●●●

Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) ●● ●●●●●

Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) ●● ●●●●●●

Auxiliary Switch (3A, 3B) ●●● ●

Auxiliary Switch (4A, 4B) ●

Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B)/Alarm Lockout ●● ●●●●●

Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B)/Alarm Lockout ● ●

Auxiliary Switch (3A, 3B)/Alarm Lockout ●

Standard Shunt Trip ●● ●●●●●●

Low Energy Shunt Trip ●●●● ●●

Undervoltage Release Mechanism ●● ●●●●●●

External Accessories

Non-Padlockable Handle Block ●● ●●●●●

Padlockable Handle Block ●●●●●●

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp ●● ● ● ●

Cylinder Lock ●●●

Key Interlock Kit ●●●●●●●

Sliding Bar Interlock ●●●●●●

Walking Beam Interlock ●●●●●

Electrical (Solenoid) Operator ●●●●●●

Electrical (Motor) Operator ●

IQ Energy Sentinel ●●●

LFD Current Limiter ●

Plug-in Adapters ●●●●●●

Drawout Cassette ●

Rear Connecting Studs ●●●●●●

Panelboard Connecting Straps ●●●●●●

Handle Mechanisms ●● ●●●●●●

Door Hardware/Accessories ●●●●●

Solid-State (Electronic) Test Kit ●●●●●

Handle Extension ●●●●●●

Modiﬁcations 

Special Calibration ●●●●●●●

Moisture Fungus Treatment ●●●●●●●

Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers ●●●●●●●

Marine Application ●●●●●●●

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-48

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Accessories and Modiﬁcations Sheet 0644

EG-Frame Allowable Accessory Combinations

Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the

circuit breaker.

Table 21.3-102. Accessories

■Applicable in indicated pole position ❏May be mounted on left or right pole —

not both

● Accessory available/Modiﬁcation available

Description 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole

Center Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.

Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole)

Alarm Lockout Switch (Make Only)

Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) ■■■

Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) ■■■

Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) ■■■

Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) ■■■

Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination ■■■

Shunt Trip — Standard ■■

Shunt Trip — Low Energy ■■

Undervoltage Release Mechanism ■■

External Accessories

End Cap Kit ●● ●

Control Wire Terminal Kit ●● ● ●

Multiwire Connectors ●● ● ●

Base Mounting Hardware ●● ● ●

Terminal Shields ●● ● ●

Terminal End Covers ●

Interphase Barriers ●● ●

Non-padlockable Handle Block ■■■■

Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp ■■■■

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp ■❏ ❏❏ ❏

Walking Beam Interlock — Requires Two Breakers ●●

Plug-In Adapters ●● ●

Rear Connecting Studs ●● ● ●

Handle Mechanisms ●

Modiﬁcations (Refer to Eaton)

Moisture Fungus Treatment ●● ● ●

Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers ●● ● ●

Marine Application ●● ● ●

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-49

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Accessories and Modiﬁcations

Sheet 0645

JG-Frame Allowable Accessory Combinations

Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the

circuit breaker.

Table 21.3-103. Accessories

■Applicable in indicated pole position ❏May be mounted on left or right pole —

not both

●Accessory available/Modiﬁcation available

Description 2- and 3-Pole 4-Pole

Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.

Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole)

Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) ■■

Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) ■■

Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) ■■

Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination ■■

Shunt Trip — Standard ■■

Shunt Trip — Low Energy ■■

Undervoltage Release Mechanism ■■

External Accessories

End Cap Kit ●●

Plug Nut ●●

Control Wire Terminal Kit ●●

Multiwire Connectors ●●

Base Mounting Hardware ●●

Terminal Shields ●●

Interphase Barriers ●●

Non-padlockable Handle Block ■■

Padlockable Handle Block ■■

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp ❏❏❏❏

Cylinder Lock ❏❏

Key Interlock Kit ❏❏❏❏

Sliding Bar Interlock — Requires Two Breakers ●

Electrical Operator ●●

Plug-In Adapters ●●

Rear Connecting Studs ●●

Panelboard Connecting Straps ●●

Handle Mechanisms ●●

Handle Extension ●●

IQ Energy Sentinel ●

Modiﬁcations (Refer to Eaton)

Special Calibration ●●

Moisture Fungus Treatment ●●

Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers ●●

Marine/Naval Application ●●

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-50

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Application Information Sheet 0646

Circuit Voltage

Molded case circuit breakers are rated

by voltage class and should be applied

only to system voltages within their

rating. The voltage rating is determined

by the maximum voltage that can be

applied across its terminals, the type

of distribution system and how the

breaker is applied in the system.

Circuit breakers listed for use at 120/240

volts may be applied on 120/240 volt

grounded systems. For applications

on 240 volt ungrounded systems apply

only circuit breakers rated 240 volts

(with no “slash” rating) or higher.

Circuit breakers rated 277/480 volts are

suitable for application on 277/480 volt

grounded wye systems and are not for

application on 480 volt ungrounded

delta systems. Apply circuit breakers

rated 480 volts (with no “slash” rating)

or higher on 480 volt ungrounded

delta systems.

UL 489 provides standards for testing

the individual poles of 2-pole and

3-pole MCCBs. The test current is

generally lower than the interrupting

rating of the MCCB. This capability

is necessary for breakers applied on

corner-grounded delta systems where

single line-to-ground faults may be

interrupted by only a single pole of

a circuit breaker with full line-to-line

voltage across that single interrupting

pole. MCCBs should not be used on

circuits where the available fault current

exceeds the level at which individual

poles were short circuit tested at

line-to-line voltage.

Note: On all three-phase Delta, grounded

B Phase applications, refer to Eaton.

Circuit Frequency

The tripping characteristics of most

molded case circuit breakers remain

virtually constant when applied to

frequencies of 50 and 60 hertz. On higher

frequency applications, molded case

circuit breakers must usually be specially

calibrated and/or derated. The amount

of derating depends upon the frame

size and ampere rating as well as the

current frequency. In general, the higher

the ampere rating in a given frame

size, the greater the derating required.

Thermal-magnetic molded case circuit

breakers applied at frequencies above

60 hertz could require that individual

consideration be given to thermal

performance, magnetic performance

and interrupting capabilities.

Electronic trip units are usually

calibrated for 50/60 hertz, although

operation at higher frequencies is

achievable with the use of special

derating factors and specially sized

cable or bus.

Avoid making circuit breaker perfor-

mance assumptions on applications

above 60 hertz. Consult Eaton for any

Cutler-Hammer molded case circuit

breaker above 60 hertz.

Continuous Ampere Rating

Molded case circuit breakers are rated

in rms amperes at a speciﬁc ambient.

This ampere rating is the continuous

current they will carry in the ambient

temperature for which they are

calibrated. Cutler-Hammer thermal-

magnetic breakers are calibrated for

an ambient temperature 40°C (104°F)

which is the average temperature within

an enclosure; thus, they minimize the

need for derating. If the enclosure

ambient is known to exceed 40°C, the

breaker used should either be especially

calibrated for that ambient, or be

derated accordingly.

The selection of a speciﬁc ampere

rating for a given application is depen-

dent upon the type of load and duty

cycle, and is governed by the National

Electrical Code. In general, the NEC

requires overcurrent protection at the

supply and at points where wire sizes

are reduced. It further states that the

conductors be protected in accordance

with their current carrying capacity,

but lists exceptions for applications

such as motor circuits where a larger

rating is often required to override

motor inrush currents.

Cable Selection

UL listed circuit breakers rated 125 A

or less shall be marked as being

suitable for 60°C (140°F), 75°C (167°F)

only or 60/75°C (140/167°F) wire. All

Cutler-Hammer listed breakers rated

125 A or less are marked 60/75°C. All

UL listed circuit breakers rated over

125 A are suitable for 75°C conductors.

Conductors rated for higher tempera-

tures may be used, but must not be

loaded to carry more current than the

75°C ampacity of that size conductor for

equipment marked or rated 75°C or the

60°C ampacity of that size conductor

for equipment marked or rated 60°C.

However, the full 90°C (194ºF) ampacity

may be used when applying derated

factors, so long as the actual load does

not exceed the lower of the derated

ampacity or the 75°C or 60°C ampacity

that applies.

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-51

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Application Information

Sheet 0647

Circuit Breaker Sizing

Considerations

The following paragraphs outline

pertinent information from the NEC

according to the type of load and

duty cycle.

A. Service

A service includes the conductors and

equipment for delivering electrical

energy from the supply system to the

wiring system of the premises served.

NEC Article 230 contains the many

requirements for services of 600 volts or

less including the sizing, location and

overcurrent protection of conductors,

disconnect means, permissible number

of disconnects, grounding of conductors,

and ground fault protection require-

ments of service equipment.

B. Feeder Circuits

A feeder is composed of the conductors

of a wiring system between the service

equipment or the generator switchboard

of an isolated plant and the branch

circuit overcurrent device.

NEC Article 220: Where a feeder supplies

continuous loads or any combination of

continuous and noncontinuous loads,

the rating of the overcurrent device shall

not be less than the noncontinuous

load plus 125% of the continuous load.

Exception: Where the assembly includ-

ing the overcurrent devices protecting

the feeder(s) are listed for operation at

100% of their rating, neither the ampere

rating of the overcurrent device nor the

ampacity of the feeder conductors shall

be less than the sum of the continuous

load plus the noncontinuous load.

Only breakers listed for 100% applica-

tion, and so labeled, can be applied

under the exception (for example, type

CKD). Breakers without 100% applica-

tion listing and label are applied under

(B) above, or at 80% of rating.

NEC Article 430: Breakers for feeders

having mixed loads; i.e., heating

(lighting and heat appliances) and

motors, should have ratings suitable

for carrying the heating loads plus the

capacity required by the motor loads.

NEC Article 430: Breakers for motor

feeders shall have a rating not greater

than the sum of the highest breaker

rating of any of its branches and the

full load currents of all other motors

served by the feeder.

C. Branch Circuits

A branch circuit is the portion of a wiring

system extending beyond the ﬁnal

overcurrent device protecting the circuit.

(1) Lighting Circuits (NEC Article 310)

These are protected in accordance

with the conductor ratings as given.

High wattage incandescent lamp loads

may result in abnormally high inrush

currents that must be taken into

account to avoid nuisance tripping.

The lamp manufacturer should be

consulted for data relative to the

inrush currents.

(2) Motor Circuits (NEC Article 430)

Breakers are primarily intended for the

protection of conductors, motor control

apparatus and motors against short

circuits and ground fault conditions.

On motor overloads, the motor over-

current device will open the circuit

before the correctly applied breaker.

Currents higher than the locked rotor

value will be interrupted by the breakers,

protecting the circuit from these heavy

fault currents. The breaker must not

trip on normal starting.

While breakers may be applied for motor

running overcurrent protection when

the requirements of Article 430 of the

NEC are met, these applications are

not recommended for Eaton’s Cutler-

Hammer breakers and, therefore, this

discussion is conﬁned to the use of a

breaker as a circuit protector.

For many applications, particularly

those where starting behavior of the

motor is unknown, the NEC maximum

rules are followed. Usually, lower

rated breakers can be used success-

fully. This is further discussed under

motor circuit application and motor

application tables.

Motor Circuit Application (NEC

Article 430): The breaker must have a

continuous rating of not less than 115%

of the motor full load current. Before

applying a breaker, one should check

to determine the effect of any of the

following conditions: High ambient

temperature, heating within breaker

enclosure due to grouping of current

consuming devices, frequent motor

starting, and lengthy motor

acceleration period.

Breaker Rating or Setting (NEC

Article 430): The motor branch circuit

overcurrent device shall be capable of

the motor. The required protection shall

be considered as being obtained when

the overcurrent device has a rating or

setting not exceeding the values given

in Table 21.3-104, reference NEC

Article 430).

An instantaneous trip circuit breaker

(without time delay) shall be used only

if adjustable and if part of a combina-

tion controller having overcurrent

protection in each conductor and the

combination is especially approved

for the purpose. In the event a breaker

chosen on this basis still does not

allow motor starting, a higher rating is

permitted by the code. See Exceptions

listed with Table 21.3-104.

Due to the inﬁnite number of motor-

and-load combinations and because

comparable breakers of different

manufacture have different tripping

characteristics, NEC motor circuit

breaker rules are of a general nature

and are set up as maximum boundaries.

Protection is considered satisfactory if

the breaker rating does not exceed the

ﬁgure allowed by the NEC requirements.

Although Cutler-Hammer breakers rated

less than the NEC maximum values

may be applied in most cases. Many

operating engineers select breakers on

the basis of the NEC maximum rules

simply because consideration of other

factors is not usually necessary, or to

ensure motor starting when the starting

behavior of the motor is not known.

Tables 21.3-104 and 21.3-105 are

adapted from Article 430 of NEC.

When a certain motor is standard for

a given job, as on a volume produced

machine tool, it is practical (and often

more economical) to select a breaker

for closer protection than one chosen

on the basis of NEC maximum rules.

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-52

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Application Information Sheet 0648

Table 21.3-104. Maximum Rating or Setting of Motor Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and

Ground Fault Protective Devices — NEC Table 430-152

For certain exceptions to the values speciﬁed, see Sections 430-52 through 430-54. The values

given in the last column also cover the ratings of nonadjustable inverse time types of circuit

breakers that may be modiﬁed as in Section 430-52. Synchronous motors of the low-torque,

low-speed type (usually 450 rpm or lower), such as are used to drive reciprocating compressors,

pumps, etc., that start unloaded, do not require a fuse rating or circuit breaker setting in excess of

200 percent of full load current.

Table 21.3-105. Full-Load Current Three-Phase Alternating-Current Motors — NEC Table 430-150 

The following values of full load currents are typical for motors running at speeds usual for belted

motors and motors with normal torque characteristics. Motors built for low speeds (1200 RPM

or less) or high torques may require more running current, and multispeed motors will have

full-load current varying with speed. In these cases the nameplate current rating shall be used.

The voltages listed are rated motor voltages. The currents listed shall be permitted for system

voltage ranges of 110 to 120, 220 to 240, 440 to 480, and 550 to 600 volts.

For 90 and 80 percent power factor, the above ﬁgures shall be multiplied by

1.1 and 1.25 respectively.

Type of

Motor Percent of Full Load Current 

Instantaneous

Trip Breaker Inverse Time

Breaker

Single-Phase Motors

ac Polyphase Motors other than Wound Rotor

Squirrel Cage:

Other than Design E

Design E

Synchronous

Wound Rotor

Direct-Current (Constant Voltage)

800

1100

800

250

150

Hp Induction Type Squirrel-Cage

and Wound-Rotor

Amperes

Synchronous Type

Unity Power Factor 

Amperes

115

Volts 200

Volts 208

Volts 230

Volts 460

Volts 575

Volts 2300

Volts 230

Volts 460

Volts 575

Volts 2300

Volts

1/2

3/4

4.4

6.4

8.4

2.5

3.7

4.8

2.4

3.5

4.6

2.2

3.2

4.2

1.1

1.6

2.1

0.9

1.3

1.7

—

1-1/2

12.0

13.6

—

6.9

7.8

11.0

6.6

7.5

10.6

6.0

6.8

9.6

3.0

3.4

4.8

2.4

2.7

3.9

—

7-1⁄2

—

17.5

25.3

32.2

16.7

24.2

30.8

15.2

7.6

6.1

—

48.3

62.1

78.2

46.2

59.4

74.8

—

120

150

114

143

104

130

—

104

—

100

—

177

221

285

169

211

273

154

192

248

124

123

155

202

101

125

150

200

—

359

414

552

343

396

528

312

360

480

156

180

240

125

144

192

253

302

400

126

151

201

101

121

161

250

300

350

—

302

361

414

242

289

336

—

400

450

500

—

477

515

590

382

412

472

103

118

—

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-53

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Application Information — Capacitor Protection

Sheet 0649

C. Capacitor Protection (NEC Article 460)

In normal applications, breakers rated

about 150% of capacitor rated currents

are recommended. This factor allows

for switching surges, and possible

overcurrent due to overvoltage and

harmonic currents. Such selection

fully meets the NEC requirements in

460-8 for a conductor and disconnect

to be rated not less than 135% capaci-

tor rating. Where the operating cur-

rents exceed 135% of rated current

due to harmonic components, service

conditions may require the selection of

a breaker with a higher current rating.

For application in ambients higher

than the rated ambient of the breaker,

the breaker derating table should be

checked to determine the rating of the

breaker required to meet the minimum

of 135% capacitor rating.

Circuit breakers and switches for use

with capacitor must have a current rating

in excess of rated capacitor current to

provide for overcurrent from overvolt-

ages at fundamental frequency and

harmonic currents. The following

percent of the capacitor-rated current

should be used:

Fused and unfused switches . . . 165%

Enclosed Molded Case Circuit Breaker

(Includes additional de-rating for

enclosures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150%

Air circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . 135%

Contactors:

Open type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135%

Enclosed type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150%

Table 21.3-106. Recommended Switching Devices Enclosed 

Switching device ratings are based on percentage of capacitor-rated current as indicated.

The interrupting rating of the switch must be selected to match the system fault current available

at the point of capacitor application. Whenever a capacitor bank is purchased with less than the

ultimate kvar capacity of the rack or enclosure, the switch rating should be selected based on the

ultimate kvar capacity — not the initial installed capacity.

Capacitor Rating Amperes

Volts kvar Capacitor Rating

Current Safety Switch

Fuse Rating MCCB

Trip Rating Air Breaker

Trip Rating

240 2-1/2

7-1/2

24.1

36.1

48.1

72.2

108

100

125

200

100

125

175

100

150

120

144

180

200

250

300

200

225

275

175

200

250

100

120

217

240

289

400

500

350

400

500

300

350

400

125

135

150

301

325

361

500

600

500

600

450

500

180

200

225

433

480

541

800

900

700

800

900

600

700

800

240

250

270

578

602

650

1000

1200

900

1000

800

900

1000

300

360

375

720

866

903

1200

1600

1500

—

1200

480 2

7-1/2

2.41

6.01

36.1

48.1

60.1

100

72.2

90.2

96.2

125

150

175

125

150

100

125

150

100 108

120 200

200 175

200 150

175

120

125

150

144

150

180

250

300

225

300

200

160

180

200

192

216

241

350

400

300

350

400

300

350

225

240

250

271

289

301

500

400

300

320

360

361

385

433

600

700

800

600

700

500

600

375

400

450

451

481

541

800

900

700

800

900

600

800

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-54

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Application Information — Transformer Protection Sheet 0650

E. Transformer Protection

(NEC Article 450) Primary

Each transformer 600 volts or less

shall be protected by an individual

overcurrent device on the primary

side. Rated or set at not more than

125% of the rated primary current

of the transformer.

Exception No. 1: Where the rated

primary currents of a transformer is

9 amperes or more and 125% of this

current does not correspond to a stan-

dard rating of a fuse or nonadjustable

circuit breaker, the next higher stan-

dard rating described in Section 240

shall be permitted. Where the rated

primary current is less than 9 amperes,

an overcurrent device rated or set at

not more than 167% of the primary

current shall be permitted.

Where the rated primary current is less

than 2 amperes, an overcurrent device

rated or set at not more than 300%

shall be permitted.

Exception No. 2: An individual over-

current device shall not be required

where the primary circuit overcurrent

device provides the protection speciﬁed

in this Section.

Exception No. 3: As provided in (b)

(2) below.

(2) Primary and Secondary

A transformer 600 volts or less having

an overcurrent device on the second-

ary side rated or set at not more than

125% of the rated secondary current

on the transformer shall not be

required to have an individual overcur-

rent device on the primary side if the

primary feeder overcurrent device is

rated or set at a current value not more

than 250% of the rated primary current

of the transformer.

A transformer 600 volts or less,

equipped with coordinated thermal

overload protection by the manufac-

turer and arranged to interrupt the

primary current, shall not be required

to have an individual overcurrent

device on the primary side if the

primary feeder overcurrent device is

rated or set at a current value not more

than 6 times the rated current of the

transformer for transformers having

more than 6% impedance and not

more than 4 times the rated current

of the transformer for transformers

having more than 6 but not more

than 10% impedance.

Exception 4: Where the rated secondary

current of a transformer is 9 amperes

or more and 125% of this current does

not correspond to a standard rating of a

fuse or nonadjustable circuit breaker, the

next higher standard rating described

in Section 240 shall be permitted.

Where the rated secondary current is

less than 9 amperes, an overcurrent

device rated or set at not more than

167% of the rated secondary current

shall be permitted. Closer protection

can be provided by breakers having

shunt trips actuated by a temperature

sensing device imbedded in trans-

former windings.

Table 21.3-107. Single-Phase Primary Protection When Secondary Protection Provided

Table 21.3-108. Single-Phase Secondary Protection When Primary Protection Provided

kVA 208 V 240 V 277 V 480 V 600 V

FLA Breaker

Trip FLA Breaker

Trip

—

7.5

100

150

125

100

37.5

120

180

240

225

350

450

104

156

208

200

300

400

135

181

175

250

350

104

100

150

200

100

150

100

167

361

481

803

700

1000

1600

313

417

696

600

800

1200

271

361

603

500

700

1200

156

208

348

300

400

700

125

167

278

250

350

600

250

333

500

1202

1601

2404

2000

3000

3200

1042

1388

2083

1600

2000

3000

903

1202

1805

1600

2000

2500

521

694

1042

800

1200

1600

417

555

833

800

1200

kVA 208 V 240 V 277 V 480 V

FLA Breaker

Trip FLA Breaker

Trip

—

7.5

37.5

120

180

240

150

225

300

104

156

208

150

200

300

135

181

150

175

225

104

100

150

100

167

361

481

803

450

600

1000

313

417

696

400

600

900

271

361

603

350

450

800

156

208

348

200

300

450

250

333

500

1202

1601

2404

1600

2000

3000

1042

1388

2083

1400

1800

3000

903

1202

1805

1200

1600

2500

521

694

1042

700

900

1400

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-55

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Application Information

Sheet 0651

Table 21.3-109. Three-Phase Primary Protection When Secondary Protection Provided

Table 21.3-110. Three-Phase Secondary Protection When Primary Protection Provided

kVA 240 V 480 V 600 V

FLA Breaker

Trip FLA Breaker

Trip

—

37.5

150

200

108

120

180

200

225

350

110

120

200

100

150

112.5

150

225

271

361

541

500

700

1000

135

180

271

250

350

500

108

144

217

200

300

400

300

500

7550

1000

722

1203

1804

2406

1000

2000

2500

4000

361

601

902

1203

600

800

1200

2000

289

481

722

962

500

700

1000

1600

kVA 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V

FLA Breaker

Trip FLA Breaker

Trip

—

37.5

104

110

150

100

125

139

208

175

300

108

120

180

150

175

225

125

112.5

150

225

312

416

652

400

600

800

271

361

541

350

500

700

135

180

271

175

225

350

108

144

217

150

200

300

500

750

1000

833

1388

2082

2776

1200

1800

3000

3500

722

1203

1804

2406

900

1500

2500

3000

361

601

902

1203

500

800

1200

1600

289

481

722

962

400

600

900

1200

Interrupting Rating

The maximum amount of fault current

supplied by a system can be calculated

at any point in that system. One rule

must be followed for applying the

correct circuit breaker.

The interrupting rating of the breaker

must be equal to or greater than the

amount of fault current that can be

delivered at that point in the system

where the breaker is applied.

The interrupting rating of the breaker

is the maximum amount of fault current

it can safely interrupt without damaging

itself. A breaker’s interrupting rating

always decreases as the voltage

increases. Interrupting rating is one of

the most critical factors in the breaker

selection process.

Number of Poles

The number of poles in the breaker is

determined by the type of distribution

system. A pole is required for each

hot conductor, but usually not for the

neutral conductor, except in certain

special applications.

In general, a 1-pole breaker may be

used on grounded neutral systems

for single-phase applications and a

3-pole breaker on 3-phase applications.

There are instances, however, where

2-pole breakers are necessary on single-

phase systems and 4-pole breakers on

3-phase systems to interrupt the neutral.

Certain dc voltage applications also

use special multi-pole conﬁgurations.

Fixed or Interchangeable Trip Unit

Reverse Feed Applications

(Power Supply to Load Side)

Often due to physical equipment

arrangements in panelboards and

switchboards, it is desirable to reverse

feed a molded case circuit breaker.

For this application, circuit breakers

must be tested and listed accordingly.

For safety reasons, thermal-magnetic

circuit breakers having interchange-

able trip units are not acceptable for

this application, and are, therefore,

marked “Line” and “Load” on the

cover. Where circuit breakers are so

marked, the power source conductors

must be connected to the “Line” end

terminations.

Circuit breakers suitable for reverse

feed application generally have sealed

covers and not marked “Line” and

“Load” and are UL listed.

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-56

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Application Information — Unusual Operating Conditions Sheet 0652

Unusual Operating Conditions

Trip Unit Temperatures

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Thermal-

magnetic circuit breakers are tempera-

ture sensitive. At ambient

temperatures

below 40°C (104ºF), circuit

breakers

carry more current than their continu-

ous current rating. Nuisance tripping is

not a problem under these lower tem-

perature conditions, although consider-

ation should be given to closer

protection coordination to compensate

for the additional current carrying

capability. In addition, the actual

mechanical operation of the breaker

could be affected if the ambient

temperature is signiﬁcantly below

the 40°C standard.

For ambient temperatures above

40°C, breakers will carry less current

than their continuous current rating.

This condition promotes nuisance

tripping and can create unacceptable

temperature conditions at the terminals.

Under this condition, the circuit breaker

should be recalibrated for the higher

ambient temperature.

Electronic trip units are insensitive to

ambient temperatures within a certain

temperature range. The temperature

range for most Cutler-Hammer elec-

tronic trip units is -20°C to +55°C

(-4ºF to 131ºF). However, at very low

ambient temperatures, the mechanical

parts of the breaker could require

special treatment, such as the use of

special lubricants. If the ambient tem-

perature exceeds 40°C signiﬁcantly,

damage to the electronic circuitry and

other components could result. Eaton

includes temperature protective circuits

in its designs to initiate a tripping opera-

tion and provide self-protection, should

the internal temperature rise to an

unsafe level.

Circuit Breaker Temperatures

The temperature of the air surround-

ing a circuit breaker is the ambient

temperature. For some years, all molded

case circuit breakers were calibrated

for 25°C (77°F). This ambient tempera-

ture was not very representative of the

conditions in which most molded case

circuit breakers were applied, namely

in an enclosure. In the mid-1960s,

industry standards were changed to

make all standard breakers calibrated

to a 40°C ambient temperature. For any

ambient temperature application above

or below 40°C, it is recommended that

the breaker manufacturer be consulted

as to any possible rerating, recalibra-

tion or special procedures, before the

circuit breaker is selected and applied.

Table 21.3-111. Derating Chart for Non-

Compensated Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

Calibrated for 40°C

Moisture — Corrosion

High moisture content and/or the pres-

ence of corrosive elements can result

in damage to key operating compo-

nents and/or severely compromise the

breaker’s operational integrity. As is

the case with all electrical equipment,

this type of condition or environment

should be avoided. Good electrical

practice dictates that electrical equip-

ment always be applied in a clean

environment, free of moisture and

corrosion. If such operating conditions

cannot be avoided, special treatment

of the circuit breaker should be consid-

ered to minimize the possibility of

operational problems. Most Cutler-

Hammer molded case circuit breaker

cases are molded from glass polyester

which does not support the growth of

fungus. In addition, a special moisture

and fungus-resisting treatment is

recommended for any parts that are

susceptible to the growth of fungus.

In areas where daily temperature

changes have a tendency to cause

condensation, the inclusion of space

heaters in the enclosure is the best

preventative measure. The manufac-

turer should be consulted if either one

of these operational environments is

likely to exist. Consider the addition of

a Cutler-Hammer C799 series oxidation

inhibiting capsule in the assembly.

Altitude

Low voltage circuit breakers must

be progressively derated for voltage,

current carrying and interrupting

rating at altitudes above 6,000 feet

(1,829 m). The thinner air at higher

altitudes reduces cooling and dielec-

tric characteristics compared to the

denser air found at lower altitudes.

Refer to Eaton for additional application

details.

Shock/Vibration

Where high shock is an anticipated

condition, hi-shock Navy type breakers

are recommended. Molded case circuit

breakers can be supplied to meet the

following marine speciﬁcations: U.S.

Coast Guard CFR 46, ABS – American

Bureau of Shipping, IEEE 45, UL 489

Supplement SA Marine, and UL 489

Supplemental SB Naval.

Breaker Ampere

Rating at 40°C Ampere Rating

25°C

(77°F) 50°C

(122°F) 60°C

(140°F)

F-Frame/E125-Frame

100

125

150

110

137

165

116

138

105

125

J-Frame/J250-Frame

100

102

115

125

150

175

140

171

200

114

134

156

102

116

134

200

225

250

230

252

281

178

205

227

153

183

201

K-Frame

100

125

150

121

145

188

116

132

106

111

175

200

225

210

243

255

159

180

212

141

157

198

250

300

350

400

294

364

412

471

230

270

322

368

208

236

291

333

L-Frame

300

350

400

330

385

440

276

325

372

252

301

340

500

600 550

660 468

564 435

525

M-Frame

300

350

400

332

388

444

277

322

368

252

292

334

450

500

600

495

550

660

418

468

564

383

435

525

700

800 770

880 658

754 613

704

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-57

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Application Information — Special Applications

Sheet 0653

Special Applications

Molded Case Breakers for Application on

Resistance Welding Circuits

Short circuit protection for resistance

welding devices can be obtained by

properly applying instantaneous trip

molded case circuit breakers.

Note: Instantaneous only breakers for weld-

ing application are intended for application

within the welding equipment not as feeder

breakers to welding machines.

These breakers permit normally high

welding currents, but trip instanta-

neously if a short circuit develops.

These breakers include standard

molded case circuit breaker features

such as trip-free operation, deadfront

and single-phase protection. Because

the breakers are resettable after tipping,

replacement costs and downtime

are minimized.

Duty Cycle is based on the one minute

averaging time of the breaker, and can

be determined as follows:

“During-weld” amperes can be

obtained from the welder manufacturer,

or as follows:

Interrupting capacity of the breaker

should be within the maximum avail-

able at the point of application. Refer

to Eaton for additional application

details.

Mining Service Circuit Breakers

The full line of mining service circuit

breakers includes Standard ”Classic”

Mining Service, Series C and E

G Mining

Breaker, including 1000Y/577 Vac ratings.

Mining breakers are available with a

full line of accessories. These special

purpose circuit breakers are designed

speciﬁcally for underground trailing

cable application per MSHA 30 CFR 75.

Engine Generator Circuit Breakers

Engine generator molded case circuit

breakers are designed speciﬁcally for

application on diesel engine powered

standby generators where high

interrupting circuit breakers are not

required. Engine generator circuit

breakers conform to UL 489, CSA

and IEC 947-2.

Molded Case Switches

The molded case switch is used when

a compact, high capacity disconnect

switch is required. It provides no over-

current protection, overload or low

level fault. The MCS is equipped with a

high instantaneous magnetic ﬁxed trip

unit. The ﬁxed magnetic trip is factory

preset to interrupt high fault currents

at or above its preset level. MCS is self

protecting within its withstand rating.

The molded case switch accepts the

same accessories as the equivalent

thermal-magnetic circuit breaker.

See Table 21.3-112.

Application and Replacement of Breakers

Apply and replace breakers prudently,

within the design and operating

parameters of the power system.

Use the following tables to select the

size and type of Series C Circuit

Breaker needed to ﬁt virtually any

application in series connected and

other protective systems. Series C

Breakers are highly compatible across

ratings, capacities

and characteristic;

prudent replacements

are as important

as initial selection.

Unusual Mounting Conﬁgurations

Generally, circuit breakers may be

mounted in any position, up or down,

horizontal or vertical, without affecting

the tripping characteristics or interrupting

rating. However, mounting circuit

breakers in a vertical position with the

“ON” position other than “UP” will be

in violation of Article 240-81 of the

National Electrical Code.

Duty Cycle Weld Time 100

Weld Time Off Time+

----------------------------------------------------------=

During-weld

Amperes

During-weld

kVA 1000

Voltage

----------------------------------------------------=

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-58

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Application Information — Molded Case Switch Ratings Sheet 0654

Table 21.3-112. Molded Case Switch Short Circuit Current Ratings at

60 Hz Only (Maximum Fault Current at Which Device can be Applied

in kAIC) (Continued)

MCS

Catalog Number Short Circuit Current Rating

240 V 480 V 600 V 250 Vdc

GD3060K

GD3100K

EHD2100K

—

EHD3100K

FD2100KL

FD2150KL

—

FD3100KL

FD3150KL

FD4100KL

FD4150KL

HFD2100KL

HFD2150KL

100

HFD3100KL

HFD3150KL

HFD4100KL

100

HFD4150KL

JD2250KW

JDB2250KW

100

JD3250KW

JDB3250KW

JD4250KW

JDB4250KW

HJD2250KW

HJDB2250KW

100

HJD3250KW

HJDB3250KW

HJD4250KW

100

HJDB4250KW

DK2400KW

DK3400KW

100

—

KD2400KW

KDB2400KW

KD3400KW

KDB3400KW

KD4400KW 65

65 35

35 25

25 10

MCS

Catalog Number Short Circuit Current Rating

240 V 480 V 600 V 250 Vdc

KDB4400KW

HKD2400KW

HKDB2400KW

100

HKD3400KW

HKDB3400KW

HKD4400KW

100

HKDB4400KW

LD2600WK

LDB2600WK

100

LD3600WK

LDB3600WK

LD4600WK

LDB4600WK

HLD2600WK

HLDB2600WK

100

HLD3600WK

HLDB3600WK

HLD4600WK

100

HLDB4600WK

MDL2800WK

MDL3800WK

100

MDLS2800WK

MDLS3800WK

ND3800WK

—

ND4800WK

HND3800WK

HND4800WK

100

—

ND312WK

ND412WK

HND312WK

100

—

HND412WK

RD316WK

RD320WK

100

125

—

RD420WK

—125

125 65

65 50

50 —

—

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-59

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Application Information — DC Circuit Breakers

Sheet 0655

DC Circuit Breakers

UL listed Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer DC

Molded Case Circuit Breakers are for

use in general dc circuits. They are

also used in ungrounded battery

supply circuits of UPS systems which

provide continuous reliable ac power

to computer-controlled applications

for ﬁnancial institutions and telecom-

munications. These devices are an

excellent alternative to molded case

switches and fuses because they are

easier to install and require less

maintenance.

All DC breakers are designed speciﬁcally

for use in ungrounded dc circuits. The

various dc voltage ratings are obtained

by connecting one, two, three, or four

poles in series as noted. Connection

diagrams are shown on the breaker

nameplate. The DC breakers use the

same internal and external accessories

as the standard breakers for ac appli-

cation. Shorting straps for series

connecting poles are available.

Molded case circuit breakers for

transportation application requiring

750 Vdc are available 15 through

2500 amperes with 20 kA interrupting

capacity at 750 Vdc. Breakers require

4 poles in series for 750 Vdc applica-

tion. However, 750 V is not a UL rating.

Dimensions are the same as the stan-

dard thermal-magnetic equivalent.

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Table 21.3-113. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

dc ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 8 millisecond time constant.

1-pole in series.

2-poles in series.

3-poles in series.

4 poles in series. Not a UL listed voltage rating.

Figure 21.3-5. Series Connection Diagrams for 600 Volts dc Application

Note: Use rated cable per NEC. Connect to terminals as per breaker nameplate.

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Frame Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical kA)

Volts dc 

125 250 600 750 

HFDDC

HJDDC

HKDDC

150

250

400

HLDDC

NBDC

PBDC

600

1200

2500

LOAD

3-Poles in Series for dc (Typical) 4-Poles in Series

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-60

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Application Information — 400 – 415 Hz Sheet 0656

Application of Cutler-Hammer

Molded Case Circuit Breakers to

400 – 415 Hz Systems

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer molded case

circuit breakers, including breakers

with electronic trip units, can be

applied for overcurrent protection on

400 – 415 Hz systems. Commonly used

to power computer installations, 400 –

415 Hz systems are also employed in

conjunction with certain aircraft, mili-

tary and other specialty equipment.

This publication contains guidelines to

applying Cutler-Hammer molded case

circuit breakers on 400 – 415 Hz systems.

Circuit Breaker Derating Required

Table 21.3-114, lists the maximum

continuous current carrying capacity

at 400 – 415 Hz of Cutler-Hammer

molded case circuit breakers. Due to

the increased resistance of the copper

sections resulting from the skin effect

produced by eddy currents at 400 –

415 Hz, circuit breakers in many

cases require derating.

The thermal derating on these devices

is based upon 100%, 3-phase applica-

tion in open air in a maximum of 40°C

(104ºF) with 4 feet (1.2 m) of the speci-

ﬁed cable 75°C (167ºF) of bus at the

line and load side. Additional derating

of not less than 20% will be required if

the circuit breaker is to be utilized in an

enclosure. Further derating may be

required if the enclosure contains

other heat generating devices or if the

ambient temperatures exceed 40°C.

Table 21.3-114. Continuous Current of 400 Hz Breakers

The calibration of these breakers and the tolerance percentages of the time-current curves are the same as at 60 Hz.

FD and HFD only.

Breaker Frame

Series Maximum Continuous

Amperes at 60 Hz 400 – 415 Hz Application 

Maximum Continuous

Amperes Cable/Bus Bar

(Per Phase) Terminals (Fixed Front)

Catalog or Style Number

EHD, FDB, FD 15

1 #12 Cu

624B100G02

1 #10 Cu

1 #8 Cu

624B100G02

1 #6 Cu

1 #4 Cu

1 #2 Cu

624B100G02

100

125 

150 

115

135

1 #1 Cu

1 – 1/0 Cu

624B100G17

JDB, JD, HJD 70

100

1 #4 Cu

1 #2 Cu

1 #1 Cu

T250KB

125

150

175

100

125

150

1 – 1/0 Cu

1 – 2/0 Cu

T250KB

200

225

250

160

200

1 – 3/0 Cu

1 – 4/0 Cu

1 – 250 kcmil Cu

T250KB

KDB, KD, HKD 125

150

175

100

125

150

1 – 1/0 Cu

1 – 2/0 Cu

T300K

200

225

250

160

180

200

1 – 3/0 Cu

1 – 4/0 Cu

1 – 250 kcmil Cu

T300K

300

350

400

225

275

300

1 – 350 kcmil Cu

1 – 500 kcmil Cu

2 – 3/0 Cu

T300K

T350K

T400K

LDB, LD, HLD 250

300

350

210

240

275

1 – 250 kcmil Cu

1 – 350 kcmil Cu

1 – 500 kcmil Cu

T600LA

400

500

600

310

370

425

2 – 250 kcmil Cu

2 – 350 kcmil Cu

2 – 500 kcmil Cu

T600LA

LD with Digitrip RMS 310 300

600 300

500 2 – 250 kcmil Cu

2 – 350 kcmil Cu T401LA

T401LA

MD with Digitrip RMS 310 400

500

600

340

405

470

2 – 3/0 Cu

2 – 300 kcmil Cu

2 – 350 kcmil Cu

601MA

T601MA

700

800 355

400 2 – 4/0 Cu

2 – 300 kcmil Cu T601MA

T601MA

ND with Digitrip RMS 310 1200 700

750

3 – 300 kcmil Cu

3 – 350 kcmil Cu

4 – 350 kcmil Cu

T1000 NBI

T1200 NBI

RD with Digitrip RMS 310 2000 1500 4-1/2 x 4 Cu Rear Connected Cu T-Bar

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-61

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Application Information — 400 – 415 Hz

Sheet 0657

Cable and Bus Sizing

The cable and bus sizes to be utilized at

400 – 415 Hz are not based on standard

National Electrical Code tables for 60 Hz

application. Larger cross sections are

necessary at 400 – 415 Hz to avoid

exceeding component temperature

limits. All bus bars speciﬁed are based

upon mounting the bars in the vertical

plane to allow maximum air ﬂow. All

bus bars are spaced at a minimum of

1/4-inch (6.35 mm) apart. Mounting of

bus bars in the horizontal plane will

necessitate additional drafting. Edgewise

orientation of the bus may change the

maximum ratings indicated. If addi-

tional information is required for other

connections of cable or bus, contact

the Eaton Customer Support Center.

Interrupting Capacity

400 – 415 Hz interrupting capacities of

the Cutler-Hammer molded case circuit

breakers found in Table 21.3-115.

Application Recommendations

It is recommended that thermal

indicating devices such as “tempi

plates” be placed on the line and load

terminals or T-connectors of the center

pole. These are usually the hottest

terminals with a balanced load. A

maximum temperature of 90°C (50°C

over a maximum ambient of 40°C)

would verify the maximum rating for

the particular application. Temperature

proﬁles taken on these breakers can be

correlated to insure that the hottest

points within the breaker care are

within the required temperature limits.

A thermal cutoff switch can also be

used to actuate a shunt trip to open

the breaker if the thermal limits are

exceeded. Consult the Customer

Support Center for further information

on special applications.

400 – 415 Hz Breakers

When required, molded case circuit

breakers may be factory calibrated

for 400 – 415 Hz application. These

breakers are specially labeled for

400 – 415 Hz usage and their name-

plate current rating will include the

necessary derating factor. The highest

“Maximum Continuous Amperes”

rating at 400 – 415 Hz found in Tables

A and B is approximately equal to the

highest specially calibrated 400 – 415

Hz nameplate amperes rating available

for a given frame size. The EHD, FDB

and FD frames have style numbers des-

ignated for breakers calibrated at 400 –

415 Hz. Contact Eaton for ordering

information on other Cutler-Hammer

breakers to be applied in 400 – 415 Hz

systems.

Table 21.3-115. Interrupting Capacities of 400 Hz Breakers

The above interrupting ratings are estimates based on the design parameters and operating

characteristics of each breaker as well as on the limited amount of test data thus far available

for circuit breakers applied to 400 – 415 Hz systems.

Not UL listed.

Breaker Frame

Series Estimated 400 – 415 Hz Interrupting Capacities  (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

240 V 480 V 600 V

Thermal Magnetic

EHD

FDB

3,600

13,000

2,800

5,000

—

2,800

3,600

JDB, JD

HJD

KDB, KD, HKD

8,000

14,000

21,000

7,000

10,000

11,000

7,000

8,000

LDB, LD

HLD

14,000

21,000

14,000

10,000

11,000

10,000

7,000

8,000

7,000

Electronic Trip Units

LD, MD, ND

HLD 14,000

21,000 10,000

11,000 7,000

8,000

HND

RD 21,000

40,000 16,000

33,000 8,000

33,000

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-62

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Application Information — 100% Rated Circuit Breakers Sheet 0658

100% Rated Circuit Breakers

The amount of protection designed

into a distribution system is often based

on economics. However, each project

should be furnished with a reliable dis-

tribution system that delivers the most

effective protection possible for each

investment dollar.

Reliable and economic system design

can be usually achieved with Eaton’s

Cutler-Hammer circuit breakers that

are UL listed for application at 100%

of their ratings — instead of standard

breakers that in actual use are applied

at 80% of their frame ratings in

an enclosure.

The concept between a system design

using standard breakers and that using

100% rated breakers is uncomplicated

— but there are no shortcut methods

for determining which design (and

devices) is the best choice for a given

system. Good engineering practice

requires a careful system analysis

beginning with the lowest feeder

and concluding with the main device.

Also included in the system analysis

must be all present and future factors

that could affect the size and/or quan-

tity of the breakers and associated

hardware, such as switchboard bus,

busway, cable and conduit. Other

factors to consider are loads (continu-

ous and noncontinuous) and system

expansions and transformers with

provisions for forced air cooling.

Figure 21.3-6. Breaker Nameplate

A 100% rated breaker receives its UL listing

based on tests conducted in a minimum

size enclosure with minimum ventilation

(if required) and minimum cable sizes,

as stated on this nameplate example.

All Cutler-Hammer 100% rated breakers

have standard electronic trip units.

The NEC

The rules and intent of the National

Electrical Code governing the use of

standard or 100% rated breakers must

be understood before recommending

or applying such devices.

Section 220-10(b) Continuous and

Noncontinuous Loads of the National

Electrical Code addresses differences

between applications of standard rated

breakers and 100% rated breakers.

(Signiﬁcant sections are in bold

face type.)

Figure 21.3-7. NEC Reference

Section 220-10(b) covers standard

breakers, and the exception 100%

rated breakers. NEC Section 220-10(b)

and the Section 220-10(b) exception

can be expressed by these formulas:

Standard 80% Rated Design

Noncontinuous Load +

125% of the Continuous Load

= Total Minimum Load

Special 100% Rated Design

Noncontinuous Load +

Continuous Load

= Total Minimum Load

The necessity for these NEC require-

ments results from circuit breaker

testing procedures.

A molded case circuit breaker is tested

in open air to verify its nameplate

ampere rating. The nameplate speci-

ﬁes a value of current the circuit

breaker is rated to carry continuously

without tripping within speciﬁc operat-

ing temperature guidelines.

In most instances, a breaker is applied

in an enclosure and performance could

be adversely affected by slow heat

dissipation and temperature rise. These

factors must be considered regarding

the ability of the breaker to comply

with its nameplate ampere rating.

Breaker

Nameplate

Example

100%

Application–

enclosure

and

wire ampacity

requirements.

“Where a feeder supplies continu-

ous loads or any combination of

continuous and noncontinuous

loads, the rating of the overcur-

rent device shall not be less than

the noncontinuous load plus

125% of the continuous load.”

The minimum circuit conductor

size without the application of any

ampacity adjustment or correction

factors shall have an allowable

ampacity equal to or greater than

the noncontinuous load plus

125% of the continuous load.

“Exception: Where the assembly

including the overcurrent devices

protecting the feeder(s) are listed

for operation at 100% of their

rating, neither the ampere rating

of the overcurrent device nor the

ampacity of the feeder conductors

shall be less than the sum of

the continuous load plus the

noncontinuous load.”

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-63

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Application Information — 100% Rated Circuit Breakers

Sheet 0659

Testing Conditions and Operating Conditions

There are distinct differences between

these conditions that are addressed in

the NEC Section 220-10(b) by introduc-

ing an overcurrent device and associ-

ated hardware sizing factor. The sizing

factor ensures reliable equipment per-

formance under realistic conditions.

Section 220-10(b) is the key to making

the best system design choice.

For feeders, Section 220-20(b)

addresses the rating of all overcurrent

devices that have been tested in open

air but are applied in an enclosure. The

thermal response of an overcurrent

device applied in an enclosure will

usually be faster than in open air,

thus dictating the 125% requirement.

The exception allows for properly tested

and listed overcurrent devices to be

applied at 100% of their nameplate rating.

There is a Difference Between 100% Rated

Breakers and 100% Rated Assemblies

Special attention should be given

to the word “assembly” in the NEC

Exception. Normally, an assembly

is listed for 100% operation only

after being successfully tested as

an assembly per UL requirements.

For an assembly to receive a 100%

rated UL listing, it must be tested

separately by UL project engineers.

Panelboards are tested to UL 67,

switchboards tested to UL 891.

Installing 100% rated breakers in

an assembly does not automatically

make it acceptable for a 100% rating.

Figure 21.3-8. Conductor Requirements

90°C Wire

The NEC allows

the breaker to be

rated at 100% of

its frame size in

an assembly,

provided that

90°C wire is

applied at the

75°C ampacity.

All 100% rated

circuit breakers

have electronic

trip units.

Table 21.3-116. The Application — These Examples Illustrate the Cost Savings when the 100%

Rated Approach is Utilized 

Selection of either a 100% rated design or standard design must result from a system analysis

beginning with the lowest feeder and concluding with the system’s main device. For these system

examples, assume that all assembly testing has been successfully completed and either the 100%

rated design or standard design can be selected. Each system is hypothetical and either approach

will meet safety requirements. Loads were arbitrarily selected. The load table includes the calcu-

lations for minimum total loads in conformance with NEC Section 22-10(b).

Table 21.3-117. Available 100% Rated Circuit Breakers

Use with 9-inch (228.6 mm) Tee connector.

A visual comparison of breaker, bus and cable sizes in the Three-Phase Distribution System

examples (line diagrams) reveals how a 100% rated system design can provide cost savings.

Load Feeder #1 Feeder #2 Feeder #3 Main Description

Continuous 400 A 800 A 0 1200 A Three-Phase Distribution

System Line Diagrams

Noncontinuous 200 A 0 1000 A 1200 A

Frames Rating

at 480 V Trip

Units

K-Frame 125/250/400 A

Minimum Enclosure Size

24 x 15 x 6-inches (609.6 x 381.0 x 152.4 mm)

CKD 35 kA

CHKD 65 kA Digitrip 310

L-Frame 125/250/400/600 A

Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation

24 x 15 x 6-inches (609.6 x 381.0 x 152.4 mm)

CLD 35 kA

CHLD 65 kA

CLDC 100 kA

Digitrip OPTIM

L-Frame 600 A

Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation

24 x 15 x 6-inches (609.6 x 381.0 x 152.4 mm)

CLD 35 kA

CHLD 65 kA

CLDC 100 kA

Digitrip 310

M-Frame 800 A

Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation

42 x 18 x 7.5-inches (1066.8 x 457.2 x 190.5 mm)

CMDL 50 kA

CHMDL 65 kA Digitrip 310

N-Frame 800/1200 A

Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation

42 x 22.75 x 11.5-inches (1066.8 x 577.9 x 292.1 mm)

CND 50 kA

CHND 65 kA

CNDC 100 kA

Digitrip OPTIM

N-Frame 800/1200 A

Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation

42 x 22.75 x 11.5-inches (1066.8 x 577.9 x 292.1 mm)

CND 50 kA

CHND 65 kA

CNDC 100 kA

Digitrip 310

R-Frame 1600/2000 A

Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation

21.5 x 18 x 13-inches (546.1 x 457.2 x 330.2 mm) 

CRD 65 kA

CRDC 100 kA Digitrip OPTIM

R-Frame 1600/2000 A

Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation

21.5 x 18 x 13-inches (546.1 x 457.2 x 330.2 mm) 

CRD 65 kA

CRDC 100 kA Digitrip 510/610/810/910

R-Frame 1600/2000 A

Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation

21.5 x 18 x 13-inches (546.1 x 457.2 x 330.2 mm) 

CRD 65 kA

CRDC 100 kA Digitrip 310

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-64

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Application Information — 100% Rated Circuit Breakers Sheet 0660

Table 21.3-118. Standard 80% Rated Design

(Noncontinuous Load) + (125%) (Continuous Load) per NEC Section 220-10(b).

Nearest standard size, not less than calculated value.

Table 21.3-119. Standard 100% Rated Design

(Noncontinuous Load) + (Continuous Load) per NEC Section 220-10(b) Exception.

Sum of all NEC calculated minimum feeder loads.

Nearest standard size, not less than calculated value.

Table 21.3-120. The Result — Savings in Both Switchboard and Cable Costs

Noncontinuous Load + 125% of the Continuous Load = Total Minimum Load Line Diagram

Calculation

per NEC

of Minimum

Total Load 

200 + (1.25) (400)

=700 A 0 + (1.25) (800)

=1000 A 1000 + 0 = 1000 A 2700 A 

Breaker

Frame (F)

Trip (T)

Rating

(F) (T)

800 A /700 A (F) (T)

1200 A /1000 A (F) (T)

1200A /1000 A (F) (T)

3000 A /3000 A

Bus/Cable

Rating 800 A 1000 A 1000 A 3000 A 

Noncontinuous Load + Continuous Load = Total Minimum Load Line Diagram

Calculation

per NEC

of Minimum

Total Load 

200 + 400 = 600 A 0 + 800 = 800 A 1000 + 0 = 1000 A 2400 A 

Breaker

Frame (F)

Trip (T)

Rating

(F) (T)

600 A/600 A (F) (T)

800 A/800 A (F) (T)

1200 A /1000 A (F) (T)

2500 A /2500 A

Bus/Cable

Rating 600 A 800 A 1000 A 2500 A 

Design Minimum Total Load

(Amperes) Rated

Breaker

Standard 700 1000 1000 2700 100% Rated Breaker

Systems Save Money:

Signiﬁcant economic

advantages — in lower rated

and sized breakers, less cable,

and signiﬁcant reductions in

equipment ﬂoor and wall

space — can be realized when

the results of a systems

analysis favor the 100% rated

design approach.

100% Rated 600 800 1000 2400

Results The standard design

requires higher rated,

more expensive breaker

and bus. Although the

minimum total load is

700 amperes, most

breakers and hardware

are available only in stan-

dard sizes requiring even

more expensive “nearest

standard size” breakers

and hardware.

Dramatic economic

advantages are

achieved by using

the 100% rated

design. Substantial

savings result from

using an 800 ampere

busway and signiﬁ-

cant savings are also

provided by the

smaller breaker frame

and cable size.

Calculations indicate

either approach

results in the same

size breaker and hard-

ware. A 100% rated

breaker would be

more expensive

although the ﬁnal

decision could rest

on whether or not

future load growth

is anticipated.

The 100% approach pro-

vides signiﬁcant economic

advantages. It not only

permits use of the smaller

size 2500 ampere breaker

(nearest standard size)

and main bus. Eaton offers

a 2500 ampere frame

breaker which further

enhances the economic

value of the 100% rated

design.

3000A F

3000A T

800A F

700A T 1200A F

1000A T 1200A F

1000A T

3000A Bus

Swbd. 1000A BusMCC 800A Bus

3-400 kcmil,

Cu per phase

2-500 kcmil,

Cu per phase

3-400 kcmil,

Cu per phase

1000A Busway

Feeder

#1 Feeder

#2 Feeder

2500A F

2500A T

600A F

600A T 800A F

800A T 1200A F

1000A T

2500A Bus

Swbd. 1000A BusMCC 600A Bus

3-400 kcmil,

Cu per phase

2-350 kcmil,

Cu per phase

2-600 kcmil,

Cu per phase

800A Busway

Feeder

#1 Feeder

#2 Feeder

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-65

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Application Information — Series Rated System

Sheet 0661

Series Rated Systems

Under most circumstances, selection

of a series rated system will reduce

initial cost and size, since downstream

breakers are not fully rated for the

prospective short circuit fault current

at their point of application. The inter-

rupting rating of the upstream breaker

must always be equal to or greater

than the available fault current at its

line terminals. In addition, downstream

breakers must have been tested in

combination with the upstream breaker

and shown to be protected by the

upstream breaker at the assigned series

rated interrupting rating. The net result

is that the system can be assigned a

“series rated” or “integrated” rating

higher than the rating of the downstream

breaker when it is tested or applied

alone. Design of the system and selection

of breakers is based on short circuit

interruption test speciﬁed and

witnessed by UL.

Because of their blow-open design,

most molded case circuit breakers are

current limiting to some degree. In a

series rated application and in the event

of a major fault, both upstream and

downstream breakers open, protecting

the lower-rated downstream devices

by limiting the let-through current.

To develop a series rated protective

system, it is suggested that the

design engineer, after completing

preliminary steps:

■Deﬁne available fault current at

the line side terminals of the

upstream breaker.

■Select an upstream breaker with an

interrupting rating equal to or greater

than the available fault current.

■Verify the series tested interrupting

ratings of the selected combination

of breakers by referring to the tables

in this section.

■Conﬁrm, during installation, that the

correct breakers have been selected

by checking the nameplates appearing

on the end-use equipment.

Evaluating the Protection Systems

Designed properly, all three systems

protect electrical equipment with

equal effectiveness. But initial cost

and continuity of service can vary

widely depending on the inherent

characteristics of the system, and

on the design philosophy adopted.

Fully Rated System

A fully rated system is typically less

costly than a selectively coordinated

system and more costly than a series

rated system. All breakers are rated

for full fault current at their point of

application in accordance with the

National Electrical Code. The continuity

of service provided by the system is

less than with a selectively coordinated

system, and can be more than a series

rated system.

Selectively Coordinated System

A selectively coordinated system is the

most costly of the three. All breakers

are fully rated and upstream breakers

must have adequate short-time delay

adjusting capabilities. Continuity of

service is the highest possible.

Series Rated System

A series rated system is the least

costly. The upstream breaker is always

fully rated, but the interrupting ratings

of downstream breakers are normally

lower. Service continuity can be

acceptable after initial start-up, since

the lower-level arcing faults most

likely occur after that time can be

cleared by the downstream breaker

alone. However, under high fault

conditions, both the upstream and

downstream breakers would open,

eliminating service to the affected

portion of the system.

National Electrical Code Requirements

Requirements of the National Electrical

Code for short circuit ratings may now

be met by equipment that is marked

with ratings adequate for the available

fault current at their point of application

in the electrical system. Refer to the

current NEC for speciﬁc requirements.

General Discussion

Available Short Circuit Current.

Service equipment shall be suitable

for the short circuit current available

at its supply terminal.

Approval. The conductors and equipment

required or permitted by the Code

shall be acceptable only if approved.

See Examination of Equipment for

Safety and Examination, Identiﬁcation,

Installation and Use of Equipment. See

deﬁnitions of “Approved,” “Identiﬁed,”

“Labeled” and “Listed.”

Examination, Identiﬁcation, Installation

and Use of Equipment

1. Examination: In judging equip-

ment, considerations such as the

following should be evaluated.

a. Suitability for installation

and use in conformity with

the provisions of this Code.

Suitability of equipment use

may be identiﬁed by a descrip-

tion marked on or provided

with a product to identify the

suitability of the product for a

speciﬁc purpose, environment

or application. Suitability of

equipment may be evidenced

by listing or labeling.

b. Mechanical strength and

durability, including, for parts

designed to enclose and protect

other equipment, the adequacy

of the protection thus provided.

c. Wire-ending and

connection space.

d. Electrical insulation.

e. Heating effects under normal

conditions of use and also

under abnormal conditions

likely to arise in service.

f. Arcing effects.

g. Classiﬁcation by type, size,

voltage, current capacity

and speciﬁc use.

h. Other factors which contribute

to the practical safeguarding of

persons using or likely to come

in contact with the equipment.

2. Installation and Use: Listed or

labeled equipment shall be used

or installed in accordance with

any instructions included in the

listing or labeling.

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-66

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Application Information — Series Rated System Sheet 0662

Interrupting Rating

Equipment intended to break current

at fault levels shall have an interrupt-

ing rating sufﬁcient for the system

voltage and the current which is avail-

able at the terminals of the equipment.

Equipment intended to break current

at other than fault levels shall have an

interrupting rating at system voltage

sufﬁcient for the current that must

be interrupted.

Circuit Impedance and Other

Characteristics

The overcurrent protective devices,

the total impedance, the component

short circuit withstanding ratings, and

other characteristics of the circuit to

be protected shall be so selected and

coordinated as to permit the circuit

protective devices used to clear a fault

without the occurrence of extensive

damage to the electrical components

of the circuit. This fault shall be

assumed to be either two or more of

the circuit conductors, or between any

circuit conductor and the grounding

conductor or enclosing metal raceway.

Motor Contribution

The fault current contribution of

motors connected between series

rated breakers must be considered.

Article 240-86(b) in the 1999 edition of

the National Electrical Code states that

for series ratings the sum of the motor,

full-load currents cannot exceed 1% of

the interrupting rating of the lower-

rated circuit breaker. The actual fault

current contribution from induction

motors is about 4 times their full-load

current (impedance value of 25%).

For example, if the downstream branch

circuit breakers used in a series rated

combination have an interrupting rat-

ing of 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical

for a 480 volt system, the maximum

full-load current of motors connected

to that panel from the branch circuit

breakers is 140 amperes (1%). For typi-

cal induction motors this is equivalent

to a total horsepower at 480 volts of

approximately 115 horsepower.

Design/Test Considerations for Series

Coordinated Circuit Breakers

Test Procedures for all Cutler-Hammer

molded case circuit breakers intended

for application in series connected

systems are in full compliance with

all applicable paragraphs of the latest

edition of UL 489.

Note: For further information, see IEEE

Standards 141, 242 and 446.

The entire system is tested, since such

tests are the only way to correctly ver-

ify the performance of overcurrent

devices under short circuit conditions.

Calibration, interruption, trip-out

and dielectric withstand tests are per-

formed. Breakers in their as-received

condition are used for the interrupting

and intermediate interrupting capability

tests. If agreeable to concerned parties,

previously tested samples may be

used. The interrupting rating of the

line-side circuit breaker is equal to or

greater than the maximum available

fault current on the distribution system

at its point of intended application.

Tests comply also with the intent of the

proposed revisions to applicable IEC

documents.

Tests are completed in a well-deﬁned

sequence:

■Interrupting tests.

■Intermediate interrupting tests.

■Trip-out tests.

■Dielectric voltage-withstand tests.

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Series C Circuit

Breakers intended for application in

series rated systems are subjected, in

the following sequence, to interrupting

ability, intermediate interrupting

ability, trip-out, and dielectric

voltage-withstand tests.

During testing of the series rated circuit

breakers, each breaker is mounted in

the smallest enclosure in which it is

to be used; openings in the enclosure

do not exceed 10% of its total external

area, and there are no openings

directly opposite a vent in a circuit

breaker case. The two enclosures are

connected by a 12-inch (304.8 mm)

conduit of any diameter. Each lead

from test terminals to the line-side

breaker is less than 4 feet (1.2 m) per

breaker(s), and each load shorting the

load-side breaker(s) is sized based on

the rating of the load-side breaker. The

combined length of the lead from the

line-side overcurrent protective device

of the load-side breaker and from the

load-side breaker to the shorting point,

is less than 4 feet (1.2 m) per pole.

Exception: the breakers may be

mounted in the end-use equipment

that will contain them and is marked

for use with the series combination.

The load-side breaker is positioned

as close as possible to the line-side

breaker(s). Line and load leads are

less than 4 feet (1.2 m).

A fuse is connected between the

enclosure and line terminal of the pole

least likely to arc to the enclosure, or

the neutral, if the breaker is rated 120/

240 or 480Y/277 Vac. The connection

to the load-side of the limiting imped-

ance is #10 AWG copper wire less than

6 feet (1.8 m) long. The fuse is a 30 A

non-renewable type acceptable for

branch circuit protection; its voltage

rating is not less than the rating of the

device, and its interrupting rating is

not less than the available current.

1. Interrupting tests:

a. The test circuit is closed on

the series combination with

all breakers fully closed; and

b. The load-side breaker is closed

on the circuit while the line-side

breaker is fully closed.

Note: Random closing is used in all 3-phase

tests. When the circuit is closed on the

combination, closing is controlled in single-

phase tests so that closing occurs within ten

electrical degrees of the zero-point of the

supply voltage wave.

2. Intermediate interrupting tests at

the speciﬁed available current and

maximum voltage. Procedures are

identical to those described in 1a

and 1b (above) but at the maximum

current level that causes the load-

side breaker to open, but not the

line-side breaker. If the line-side

breaker is current-limiting, the series

combination shall be evaluated in

the region below its current- limiting

threshold. (There is no need for

these tests if the current is less

than the interrupting rating on

the load-side breaker.)

3. Trip-out tests of the load-side

breaker at 250% of the marked

ampere rating.

4. Dielectric voltage-withstand tests

verify that the breaker can with-

stand, without breakdown, a 60

(48 – 62) Hz essentially sinusoidal

potential for one minute.

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-67

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Application Information — Series Rated System

Sheet 0663

Circuit Breaker Identiﬁcation

Marking of all Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer

circuit breakers is clear for easy identi-

ﬁcation of type, rating and operating

status. Nameplates are color-coded for

immediate identiﬁcation of rating, and

a color-coded bar identiﬁes the type

and interrupting rating at common

application voltages. Operating status is

indicated clearly by the position of the

handle and color-coded ﬂags. On and

off positions are identiﬁed by English

words and international symbols.

Scientists and engineers at the Eaton

Testing Laboratory ensure that Cutler-

Hammer circuit breakers are the most

reliable and develop new concepts and

improvements in breaker design.

Designs and reliability are veriﬁed,

products are improved continuously

and qualiﬁed to meet UL, NEMA and

other standards. In addition, engineers

from any breaker or panelboard manu-

facturer can work along-side their

peers from Eaton to test their products

in the lab.

The consolidated nameplate on all

breakers provides complete identiﬁca-

tion and rating information in a format

that is easy to read and understand.

The interrupting rating of the series

combination is never permitted to be

marked on the downstream breaker.

However, the series rating may be

marked on panelboards in which the

combination has been tested and

listed if:

■The upstream breaker is installed in

the panelboard as a main breaker.

■The panelboard is a main-lug-only

type and is speciﬁcally marked to

indicate the type and rating of the

upstream listed series tested breaker

that must be applied with the

panelboard.

Marking of Panelboards

Marking of panelboards conforms to

the latest edition of UL 67. Markings

are clear and understandable, and

include the short circuit rating in rms

amperes; maximum voltage rating for

each short circuit rating; a statement

indicating that additional or replace-

ment devices shall be of the same type

and of equal or greater interrupting

capacity; and, when applicable, the

identity of combinations of integral

and branch circuit overcurrent devices

that are required when applying the

marked short circuit current rating.

Fuses

Fuses can be used instead of circuit

breakers in fully rated, selectively

coordinated and series connected

protection systems. See the tables

in the back of this brochure for fuse

breakout data applied to series

connected designs.

Don’t apply fuses using the up-over-

down method, which has been recom-

mended by some fuse manufacturers

for sizing a current-limiting fuse that

protects a downstream molded case

circuit breaker with a speciﬁed rms

symmetrical interrupting rating. The

method can lead to erroneous and unsafe

conclusions, and should not be used.

Example: Assume a speciﬁc type of

current-limiting fuse rated 2000 A.

Then using the ﬁgure below:

1. Draw a vertical line from the pro-

spective short circuit current of

200 kA to intersect the “typical

peak let-through curve at “A.”

2. Draw a horizontal line left

from Point “A” to intersect the

“prospective peak” curve at “B.”

3. Drop a vertical line from “B” to

intersect the horizontal axis and

read the recommended rating,

65 kA rms, concluding that a circuit

breaker with a 65 kA interrupting

capacity will be protected by

a speciﬁed 2000 A current-

limiting fuse.

This conclusion is wrong when the

downstream service has a blow-open

contact assembly, as does a molded

case circuit breaker or similar device. It

may be valid when the current-limiting

fuse is sized to protect a passive bus

bar system.

The reason: The up-over-down method

ignores dynamic impedance (the inherent

current-limiting of the downstream

molded case circuit breaker). Such

impedance is developed directly by the

forces of the let-through current created

when the contacts are blown open.

For proper application of current-

limiting fuses, always refer to recom-

mendations by the manufacturer of

the circuit breaker, which are based

on actual test data.

Figure 21.3-9. Up-Over-Down Misapplication

Application and Replacement of Breakers

Apply and replace breakers prudently,

within the design and operating

parameters of the power system. Use

the following tables to select the size

and type of circuit breaker needed to

ﬁt virtually any application in series

rated and other protective systems.

Breakers are highly-compatible across

ratings, capacities and characteristic;

prudent replacements are as important

as initial selection.

65,000 200,000

150,000

460,000

Asymmetrical

Prospective

Peak Curve

at 15%

Power

Factor

2000A

Current

Limiter

Fuse Curve

Prospective Short-Circuit rms Amperes

Prospective Peak Let-Through

Current in Amperes

Do Not Use This Method

Up-over-down method.

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-68

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems Sheet 0664

Table 21.3-121. Index for Series Rating Tables

Series Connected Ratings: Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers

A wide range of breakers and combi-

nations in the Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer

line is available that has been tested in

accordance with UL procedures for

series connected ratings: individually

enclosed breakers in series with main

lug panelboards, main breakers integral

with branch breakers in panelboards,

in switchboards, and in meter centers.

You can rely on the enclosed data for

applications with other undeﬁned

distribution equipment where series

application ratings can be an advantage.

Table 21.3-122. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations  — 600 Volt System

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory

(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”

Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book

or contact Eaton.

●A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column

provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in

parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for

applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

Devices –

Upstream/Downstream System

Voltage Pages

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker 600 V

480 V

480Y/277 V

240 V

120/240 V

21.3-68, 21.3-69

21.3-70, 21.3-71

21.3-72, 21.3-73

21.3-74 to 21.3-76

21.3-77 to 21.3-80

Fuse/Circuit Breaker 600, 480, 480/277

240, 120/240 V 21.3-81, 21.3-82

Upstream

Breaker Type FD, FDB, HFD FD, FDB, HFD LCL LCL KDC KDC HLD, HLDB HKD JDC

Amperes, Maximum 150 70 400 250 400 400 600 400 250

Limiter Type LFD3150R LFD3070R — — — — — — —

System kA 200 200 100 100 50 42 35 35 35

System Volts 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600

Downstream

Breaker Range

Amperes Poles

FDB 15 – 70 2, 3 ●●● ● ●●

FD 15 – 70 2, 3 ●●● ● ●●

HFD 15 – 70 2, 3 ●●● ● ●●

FDC 15 – 70 2, 3 ●●●

FDB 80 – 150 2, 3 ●●●●●●

FD 80 – 150 2, 3 ●●●●●●

HFD 80 – 150 2, 3 ●●●●●●

FDC 80 – 150 2, 3 ●●●

JD 70 – 250 2, 3 ●● ● ● ●

JDB 70 – 250 2, 3 ●● ● ● ●

HJD 70 – 250 2, 3 ●● ● ● ●

JDC 70 – 250 2, 3 ●

KD 100 – 400 2, 3 ●● ●

KDB 100 – 400 2, 3 ●● ●

HKD 100 – 400 2, 3 ●●

KDC 100 – 400 2, 3 ●

LD, LDB 300 – 600 2, 3 ●

LC, LCG, LCA, LCGA 75 – 400 2, 3 ●● ●

HLC, HLCG, HLCA, HLCGA 75 – 400 2, 3 ●● ●

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-69

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

Sheet 0665

Table 21.3-122. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations  — 600 Volt System (Continued)

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory

(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”

Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book

or contact Eaton.

●A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column

provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in

parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for

applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

Upstream

Breaker Type FDC FDC HLD,

HLDB KD, KDB HJD HFD HFD JD, JDB FD FD

Amperes, Maximum 225 150 600 400 250 225 150 250 225 150

Limiter Type ——————————

System kA 35 35 25 25 25 25 25 18 18 18

System Volts 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600

Downstream

Breaker Range

Amperes Poles

FDB 15 – 70 2, 3 ●● ●●●●●●●

FD 15 – 70 2, 3 ●●●●●●●●●

HFD 15 – 70 2, 3 ●

FDC 15 – 70 2, 3

FDB 80 – 150 2, 3 ●● ●●●●●●●

FD 80 – 150 2, 3 ●●●●●●● ●

HFD 80 – 150 2, 3 ●

FDC 80 – 150 2, 3

JD 70 – 250 2, 3 ●●●

JDB 70 – 250 2, 3 ●●●

HJD 70 – 250 2, 3

JDC 70 – 250 2, 3

KD 100 – 400 2, 3

KDB 100 – 400 2, 3

HKD 100 – 400 2, 3

KDC 100 – 400 2, 3

LD, LDB 300 – 600 2, 3

LC, LCG, LCA, LCGA 75 – 400 2, 3 ●

HLC, HLCG, HLCA, HLCGA 75 – 400 2, 3

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-70

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems Sheet 0666

Table 21.3-123. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations  — 480 Volt System

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory

(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”

Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book

or contact Eaton.

●A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column

provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in

parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for

applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

Upstream

Breaker Type FDB, FD,

HFD FDB, FD,

HFD LCL LCL FCL NB

TRI-PAC NB

TRI-PAC KDC JDC LA

TRI-PAC

Amperes, Maximum 150 70 400 250 100 800 500 400 250 400

Limiter Type LFD3150R LFD3070R — — — P20 P12 — — P10

System kA 200 200 150 150 150 100 100 100 100 100

System Volts 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480

Downstream

Breaker Range

Amperes Poles

EHD 15 – 100 2, 3 ●

(80 – 100)

●

(15 – 70)

●●● ●●

FDB 15 – 150 2, 3 ●

(80 – 150)

●

(15 – 70)

●●●

(15 – 100)

●●

FD 15 – 150 2, 3 ●

(80 – 150)

●

(15 – 70)

●●●

(15 – 100)

●●

HFD 15 – 150 2, 3 ●

(80 – 150)

●

(15 – 70)

●●●

(15 – 100)

●●

FDC 15 – 150 2, 3 ●

(80 – 150)

●

(15 – 70)

●●

JD, JDB 70 – 250 2, 3 ●● ● ● ● ●

HJD 70 – 250 2, 3 ●● ● ● ● ●

KD, KDB 100 – 400 2, 3 ●●●●

HKD 100 – 400 2, 3 ●●●●

LD, LDB 300 – 600 2, 3

LC, LCG, LCA,

LCGA 75 – 600 2, 3 ●

(75 – 400)

●●

(75 – 500)

●

(75 – 400)

HLC, HLCG, HLCA,

HLCGA 75 – 600 2, 3 ●

(75 – 400)

●

(75 – 400)

LA, LAB, HLA 125 – 600 2, 3 ●●

(125 – 500)

MA 125 – 800 2, 3 ●●

(125 – 500)

MC, MCA, MCG,

MCGA 400 – 800 2, 3 ●●

(400 – 500)

NB 700 – 800 2, 3 ●●

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-71

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

Sheet 0667

Table 21.3-123. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations  — 480 Volt System (Continued)

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory

(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”

Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book

or contact Eaton.

●A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column

provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in

parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for

applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

Upstream

Breaker Type LA

TRI-PAC FDC FDC FB

TRI-PAC HLD,

HLDB HKD HJD HFD HFD KD,

KDB JD,

JDB FD FD

Amperes, Maximum 200 225 150 100 600 400 250 225 150 400 250 225 150

Limiter Type P08 ——P06 —— ———— — ——

System kA 100 100 100 100 65 65 65 65 65 35 25 25 25

System Volts 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480

Downstream

Breaker Range

Amperes Poles

EHD 15 – 100 2, 3 ●●●● ●●●●●●●●

FDB 15 – 150 2, 3 ●

(15 – 100)

●● ●

(15 – 100)

●●●● ● ●●●

FD 15 – 150 2, 3 ●

(15 – 100)

●●

(15 – 100)

●● ●●

HFD 15 – 150 2, 3 ●

(15 – 100)

●●

(15 – 100)

FDC 15 – 150 2, 3

JD, JDB 70 – 250 2, 3 ●

(70 – 200)

●●

HJD 70 – 250 2, 3 ●

(70 – 200)

KD, KDB 100 – 400 2, 3 ●

HKD 100 – 400 2, 3

LD, LDB 300 – 600 2, 3 ●

LC, LCG, LCA,

LCGA 75 – 600 2, 3 ●

(75 – 400)

●

(75 – 400)

HLC, HLCG, HLCA,

HLCGA 75 – 600 2, 3

LA, LAB, HLA 125 – 600 2, 3 ●

(125 – 400)

MA 125 – 800 2, 3

MC, MCA, MCG,

MCGA 400 – 800 2, 3

NB 700 – 800 2, 3

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-72

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems Sheet 0668

Table 21.3-124. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations  — 480Y/277 Volt System

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory

(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”

Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book

or contact Eaton.

●A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column

provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in

parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for

applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

Upstream

Breaker Type FD, FDB, HFD FD, FDB, HFD LCL LCL FCL KDC JDC FDC FDC LA

TRI-PAC

Amperes,

Maximum 150 70 400 250 100 400 250 225 150 200

Limiter Type LFD3150R LFD3070R ———————P08

System kA 200 200 150 150 150 100 100 100 100 100

System Volts 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277

Downstream

Breaker Range

Amperes Poles

EHD 15 – 100 1 ●●●●● ●●

EHD 15 – 100 2, 3 ●

(80 – 100)

●

(15 – 70)

●●●●● ●●

FDB 15 – 150 2, 3 ●

(80 – 150)

●

(15 – 70)

●●●●● ●●

(15 – 100)

FD 15 – 150 1 ●●●●● ●●

(15 – 100)

FD 15 – 150 2, 3 ●

(80 – 150)

●

(15 – 70)

●●●●● ●●

(15 – 100)

HFD 15 – 150 1 ●●●●● ●●

(15 – 100)

HFD 15 – 150 2, 3 ●

(80 – 150)

●

(15 – 70)

●●●●● ●●

(15 – 100)

GHB, GHC 15 – 100 1 ●●●●●●●

GHB, GHC 15 – 100 2, 3 ●

(80 – 100)

●

(15 – 70)

●●●●

(15 – 50)

●

(15 – 50)

●●

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-73

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

Sheet 0669

Table 21.3-124. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations  — 480Y/277 Volt System (Continued)

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory

(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”

Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book

or contact Eaton.

●A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column

provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in

parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for

applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

Upstream

Breaker Type FB

TRI-PAC HKD HJD HFD HFD KD,

KDB KDC HKD JDC HJD JD,

JDB FD FD KD,

KDB JD,

JDB

Amperes,

Maximum 100 400 250 225 150 400 400 400 250 250 250 225 150 400 250

Limiter Type P06 ————— ————— ————

System kA 100 65 65 65 65 35 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 22 22

System Volts 480Y/

277 480Y/

277

Downstream

Breaker Range

Amperes Poles

EHD 15 – 100 1 ●●● ●●●●●● ● ●●●

EHD 15 – 100 2, 3 ●●● ●●●●●● ● ●●●

FDB 15 – 150 2, 3 ●

(15 – 100)

●● ●●●●●● ●●

FD 15 – 150 1 ●

(15 – 100)

●● ●●●●●● ●

FD 15 – 150 2, 3 ●

(15 – 100)

●● ●●●●●● ●

HFD 15 – 150 1 ●

(15 – 100)

●

HFD 15 – 150 2, 3 ●

(15 – 100)

●

GHB, GHC 15 – 100 1 ●●●● ● ●●●● ● ●●●●

GHB, GHC 15 – 100 2, 3 ●

(15 – 50)

●

(15 – 50)

●● ●

(15 – 50)

●●●● ●

(15 – 50)

●●●●

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-74

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems Sheet 0670

Table 21.3-125. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations  — 240 Volt System

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory

(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”

Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book

or contact Eaton.

●A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column

provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in

parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for

applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

Upstream

Breaker Type LCL KDC LCL JDC FDC FCL FD, FDB, HFD FD, FDB, HFD HLD, HLDB

Amperes, Maximum 400 400 250 250 150 100 150 70 600

Limiter Type —— ———— LFD

3150R LFD

3070R —

System kA 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 100

System Volts 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240

Downstream

Breaker Range

Amperes Poles

BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 100 2, 3 ●● ●●

(80 – 100)

●

(15 – 70)

QBHW, BRH, QPHW, QCHW 15 – 100 2, 3 ●● ●●

(80 – 100)

●

(15 – 70)

HBAX, QHPX, QHCX 15 – 100 3 ●● ●●

(80 – 100)

●

(15 – 70)

HBAW, QHPW, QHCW 15 – 20 3 ●● ● ●

GB, GHB 15 – 100 2, 3 ●●●●● ● ●

(80 – 100)

●

(15 – 70)

●

GC, GHC 15 – 100 2, 3 ●●●●● ● ●

(80 – 100)

●

(15 – 70)

●

CA, CAH, HC 100 – 225 2, 3 ●●●●

BJ, BJH 100 – 225 2, 3 ●●●●

ED 100 – 225 2, 3 ●●●● ● ● ●

EDH 100 – 225 2, 3 ●●●●

EHD 15 – 100 2, 3 ●●●●● ● ●

(80 – 100)

●

(15 – 70)

FD, FDB 15 – 150 2, 3 ●●●●● ●

(15 – 100)

●

(80 – 150)

●

(15 – 70)

●

HFD 15 – 150 2, 3 ●●●●● ●

(15 – 100)

●

(80 – 150)

●

(15 – 70)

JD, JDB 70 – 250 2, 3 ●●●● ●

HJD 70 – 250 2, 3 ●●●●

DK 250 – 400 2, 3 ●● ●

KD, KDB 100 – 400 2, 3 ●● ●

HKD 100 – 400 2, 3 ●●

LD, LDB 300 – 600 2, 3 ●

HLD 300 – 600 2, 3

LC, LCG, LCA, LCGA 75 – 400 2, 3 ●●

HLC, HLCG, HLCA, HLCGA 75 – 400 2, 3 ●●

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-75

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

Sheet 0671

Table 21.3-125. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations  — 240 Volt System (Continued)

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory

(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”

Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book

or contact Eaton.

●A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column

provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in

parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for

applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

Upstream

Breaker Type NB TRI-PAC NB TRI-PAC LA TRI-PAC FB TRI-PAC KDC HKD JDC HJD EDH FDC HFD KDC HKD

Amperes, Maximum 800 500 200 100 400 400 250 250 225 150 150 400 400

Limiter Type P20 P12 P08 P06 — — — — — — — — —

System kA 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 65 65

System Volts 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240

Downstream

Breaker Range

Amperes Poles

BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 100 2, 3 ●● ●●●●●●

QBHW, BRH, QPHW,

QCHW 15 – 100 2, 3 ●●●●● ●●●●

HBAX, QHPX, QHCX 15 – 100 3 ●●●● ●●●

HBAW, QHPW, QHCW 15 – 20 3 ●●● ●●

GB, GHB 15 – 100 2, 3 ●●●● ●●● ●

GC, GHC 15 – 100 2, 3 ●●●● ●●● ●

CA, CAH, HCA 100 – 225 2, 3 ●●●●●●●●

BJ, BJH 100 – 225 2, 3 ●● ●

ED 100 – 225 2, 3 ●●

EDH 100 – 225 2, 3

EHD 15 – 100 2, 3 ●●●●●●●●● ●

FD, FDB 15 – 150 2, 3 ●

(15 – 100)

●

(15 – 100)

●●●● ●●● ●

HFD 15 – 150 2, 3 ●●● ● ●

JD, JDB 70 – 250 2, 3 ●● ●●●● ●●

HJD 70 – 250 2, 3 ●● ●

DK 250 – 400 2, 3 ●● ●● ●

KD, KDB 100 – 400 2, 3 ●● ●● ●

HKD 100 – 400 2, 3 ●●

LD, LDB 300 – 600 2, 3

HLD 300 – 600 2, 3

LC, LCG, LCA, LCGA 75 – 400 2, 3 ●● ●

HLC, HLCG, HLCA,

HLCGA 75 – 400 2, 3 ●● ●

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-76

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems Sheet 0672

Table 21.3-125. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations  — 240 Volt System (Continued)

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory

(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”

Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book

or contact Eaton.

●A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column

provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in

parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for

applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

Upstream

Breaker Type KD,

KDB,

HJD JD,

JDB ED HFD FD GB,

GC KD,

KDB,

KD,

KDB,

CAH BJH QBHW,

QPHW

QCHW,

BRH

FDB EHD

Amperes, Maximum 400 250 250 225 150 150 100 400 400 225 225 100 150 100

Limiter Type ————————— —————

System kA 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 42 22 22 22 22 18 18

System Volts 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240

Downstream

Breaker Range

Amperes Poles

BA, BR,

HQP, QC 15 – 100 2, 3 ●●

(15 – 70)

●

(15 – 70)

●●

(15 – 70)

●● ●

(15 – 70)

●

(15 – 70)

●● ● ●

(15 – 70)

●

(15 – 70)

QBHW, BRH,

QPHW, QCHW 15 – 100 2, 3 ●● ●●●●● ●

HBAX, QHOX,

QHCX 15 – 100 3 ●● ●●●

HBAW, QHPW,

QHCW 15 – 20 3

GB, GHB 15 – 100 2, 3 ●●

GC, GHC 15 – 100 2, 3 ●●

CA, CAH, HCA 100 – 225 2, 3 ●● ● ●●

BJ, BJH 100 – 225 2, 3 ●● ●

ED 100 – 225 2, 3

EDH 100 – 225 2, 3

EHD 15 – 100 2, 3 ●● ● ●●

FD, FDB 15 – 150 2, 3 ●● ● ●●

HFD 15 – 150 2, 3

JD, JDB 70 – 250 2, 3 ●

HJD 70 – 250 2, 3

DK 250 – 400 2, 3

KD, KDB 100 – 400 2, 3

HKD 100 – 400 2, 3

LD, LDB 300 – 600 2, 3

HLD 300 – 600 2, 3

LC, LCG,

LCA, LCGA 75 – 400 2, 3

HLC, HLCG,

HLCA, HLCGA 75 – 400 2, 3 ●

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-77

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

Sheet 0673

Table 21.3-126. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations  — 120/240 Volt System

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory

(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”

Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book

or contact Eaton.

●A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column

provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in

parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for

applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

Upstream

Breaker Type LCL KDC LCL JDC FDC FCL FD, FDB, HFD FD, FDB, HFD KDC

Amperes, Maximum 400 400 250 250 225 100 150 70 400

Limiter Type ——————LFD3150R LFD3070R —

System kA 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 100

System Volts 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240

Downstream

Breaker Range

Amperes Poles

BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 70 1 ●●●● ●

BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 125 2 ●

(15 – 100)

●

(15 – 100)

●

(15 – 70)

●

(15 – 100)

●

(80 – 100)

●

(15 – 70)

QBHW, BRH,

QPHW, QCHW 15 – 70 1 ●●●● ●●

QBHW, BRH,

QPHW, QCHW 15 – 125 2 ●

(15 – 100)

●

(15 – 100)

●

(15 – 100)

●

(15 – 100)

●

(80 – 100)

●

(15 – 70)

●

HBAX, QHPX,

QHCX 15 – 70 1 ●●●● ●●

HBAX, QHPX,

QHCX 15 – 100 2 ●●●●●

(80 – 100)

●

(15 – 70)

●

QHPW, HBAW,

QHCW 15 – 30 1, 2 ●●●● ●

QBGF, QPGF,

QHCB 15 – 30 1, 2 ●●●● ●

GB, GHB 15 – 100 1, 2 ●●●●● ● ●

(80 – 100)

●

(15 – 70)

●

GC, GHC 15 – 100 1, 2 ●●●●● ● ●

(80 – 100)

●

(15 – 70)

●

EHD 15 – 100 1, 2 ●●●●● ● ●

(80 – 100)

●

(15 – 70)

●

FD 15 – 150 1, 2 ●●●●● ●

(15 – 100)

●

(80 – 150)

●

(15 – 70)

●

HFD 15 – 150 1, 2 ●●●●● ●

(15 – 100)

●

(80 – 150)

●

(15 – 70)

●

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-78

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems Sheet 0674

Table 21.3-126. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations  — 120/240 Volt System (Continued)

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory

(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”

Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book

or contact Eaton.

●A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column

provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in

parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for

applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

Upstream

Breaker Type HKD JDC HJD EDH FDC HFD FB TRI-PAC LA TRI- PAC KDC

Amperes, Maximum 400 250 250 225 150 225 100 100 400

Limiter Type ———— —— P06 P08 —

System kA 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 65

System Volts 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240

Downstream

Breaker Range

Amperes Poles

BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 70 1 ●●●●●●●

BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 125 2 ●●●●

(15 – 70)

●

(15 – 100)

●

(15 – 100)

●

(15 – 70)

QBHW, BRH,

QPHW, QCHW 15 – 70 1 ●●●●●

QBHW, BRH,

QPHW, QCHW 15 – 125 2 ●●●

(15 – 100)

●

(15 – 100)

●

(15 – 100)

HBAX, QHPX,

QHCX 15 – 70 1 ●●●●●

HBAX, QHPX,

QHCX 15 – 100 2 ●●●●●

QHPW, HBAW,

QHCW 15 – 30 1, 2

QBGF, QPGF,

QHCB 15 – 30 1, 2 ●

(15 – 40)

●

(15 – 40)

●

GB, GHB 15 – 100 1, 2 ●●● ● ●

GC, GHC 15 – 100 1, 2 ●●● ● ●

EHD 15 – 100 1, 2 ●●● ● ● ● ●

FD 15 – 150 1, 2 ●●● ● ● ● ●

HFD 15 – 150 1, 2 ●● ●

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-79

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

Sheet 0675

Table 21.3-126. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations  — 120/240 Volt System (Continued)

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory

(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”

Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book

or contact Eaton.

●A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column

provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in

parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for

applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

Upstream

Breaker Type JDC FDC HKD KD, KDB, DK HJD JD, JDB ED HFD FD GB, GC

Amperes, Maximum 250 150 400 400 250 250 225 150 225 100

Limiter Type ———— ——————

System kA 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65

System Volts 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240

Downstream

Breaker Range

Amperes Poles

BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 70 1 ●

(15 – 100)

●●●●●●●●●

BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 125 2 ●●● ●●● ● ●

(15 – 100)

●

(15 – 100)

QBHW, BRH,

QPHW, QCHW 15 – 70 1 ●●●●●●●●●

QBHW, BRH,

QPHW, QCHW 15 – 125 2 ●●● ●●●

(15 – 100)

●

(15 – 100)

●

(15 – 100)

●

(15 – 100)

HBAX, QHPX,

QHCX 15 – 70 1 ●●● ●● ●●●

HBAX, QHPX,

QHCX 15 – 100 2 ●●● ●● ●●●

QHPW, HBAW,

QHCW 15 – 30 1, 2

QBGF, QPGF,

GFCB 15 – 30 1, 2 ●

(15 – 20)

●

(15 – 20)

●

(15 – 20)

●

(15 – 40)

●

GB, GHB 15 – 100 1, 2 ●●● ● ● ●

GC, GHC 15 – 100 1, 2 ●●● ● ● ●

EHD 15 – 100 1, 2 ●●●●●● ●●

FD 15 – 150 1, 2 ●●● ● ● ●

HFD 15 – 150 1, 2 ●●●

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-80

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems Sheet 0676

Table 21.3-126. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations  — 120/240 Volt System (Continued)

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory

(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”

Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book

or contact Eaton.

●A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column

provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in

parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for

applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

Upstream

Breaker Type KD, KDB,

DK KD, KDB,

DK CAH QBHW, QPHW,

QCHW BWH BJH FDB EHD

Amperes, Maximum 400 400 225 100 225 225 150 100

Limiter Type —— —— — — ——

System kA 42 22 22 22 25 22 18 18

System Volts 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240

Downstream

Breaker Range

Amperes Poles

BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 70 1 ●●● ● ● ● ●●

BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 125 2 ●●

(15 – 70)

●●

(15 – 100)

●

(15 – 100)

●

(15 – 100)

●●

QBHW, BRH,

QPHW, QCHW 15 – 70 1 ●●

QBHW, BRH,

QPHW, QCHW 15 – 125 2 ●●

HBAX, QHPX,

QHCX 15 – 70 1

HBAX, QHPX,

QHCX 15 – 100 2

QHPW, HBAW,

QHCW 15 – 30 1, 2

QBGF, QPGF,

GFCB 15 – 30 1, 2 ●● ● ●

GB, GHB 15 – 100 1, 2

GC, GHC 15 – 100 1, 2

EHD 15 – 100 1, 2 ●

FD 15 – 150 1, 2

HFD 15 – 150 1, 2

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-81

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

Sheet 0677

Table 21.3-127. Fuse/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations  — Active Circuit Breakers

Fuse/Circuit Breaker and Fuse/Motor Circuit Protector series connected combinations shown in above tabulations listed by Underwriters Laboratories

in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”

Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book

or contact Eaton.

RK ratings shown are applicable for both RK1 and RK5 fuses. RK1 fuses in higher ampere ratings may also provide series protection.

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for

applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

Upstream

Fuse Type J, T RK J, T J, T RK RK J, T J, T RK J, T J, T RK J, T J, T RK J, T RK

Amperes, Maximum 200 100 400 600 400 200 400 200 100 400 200 100 400 200 100 200 100

System kA 100 100 100 100 100 100 200 200 200 100 200 200 100 100 100 100 100

System Volts 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 120/240 120/240 120/240 240 240 240 480 480 277 277

Downstream

Breaker Range

Amperes Poles

FD, HFD, FDC,

FDB 15 – 150 2, 3, 4 ●●

JD, HJD, JDC,

JDB 70 – 250 2, 3, 4 ●●

KD, HKD, KDC,

KDB 100 – 400 2, 3, 4 ●●● ●

BA, BR, HQP,

QC, QBHW,

BRH, QPHW,

HBAX, QHPX,

QHCX

15 – 70 1 ●●●

BA, BR, HQP,

QC, QBHW,

BRH, QPHW,

QCHW, HBAX,

QHPX, QHCX

15 – 100 2 ●●●

QHPW, HBAW,

QHCW 15 – 30 1, 2 ●●●

BA, BR, HQP,

QC, QBHW,

BRH, QPHW,

QCHW

15 – 100 2, 3 ●●●

HBAX, QHPX,

QHCX 15 – 100 3 ●●●

HBAW, QHPW,

QHCW 15 – 20 3 ●●●

EHD 15 – 100 2, 3, 4 ●●

EHD 15 – 100 1 ●●

FD, HFD 15 – 150 1 ●●

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-82

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems Sheet 0678

Table 21.3-128. Fuse/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations  — Active Circuit Breakers

Fuse/Circuit Breaker and Fuse/Motor Circuit Protector series connected combinations shown in above tabulations listed by Underwriters Laboratories

in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”

Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book

or contact Eaton.

RK ratings shown are applicable for both RK1 and RK5 fuses. RK1 fuses in higher ampere ratings may also provide series protection.

Table 21.3-129. Fuse/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations  — Active Circuit Breakers

Fuse/Circuit Breaker and Fuse/Motor Circuit Protector series connected combinations shown in above tabulations listed by Underwriters Laboratories

in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”

Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book

or contact Eaton.

RK ratings shown are applicable for both RK1 and RK5 fuses. RK1 fuses in higher ampere ratings may also provide series protection.

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for

applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

Upstream

Fuse Type J, T RK J, T RK J, T RK J, T J, T J, T J L RK L

Amperes, Maximum 400 200 200 200 400 200 400 600 200 100 800 600 2000

System kA 200 100 200 200 100 100 200 100 65 100 200 200 200

System Volts 480/277 480/277 240 240 240 240 240 240 277 277 480 600 480

Downstream

Breaker Range

Amperes Poles

GHBS 15 – 20 1 ●●

GHB, GHC 15 – 100 2, 3 ●●

CA 125 – 225 2, 3 ●●

CAH, HCA 125 – 225 2, 3 ●●●●●●

MA, HMA, MC,

MCAM MCG,

MCGA, HMCA,

HMCGA, HMCG,

MDL, HMDL, ND,

HND

125 – 800 2, 3 ●●

PC, PCG, PCA,

PCGA 1000 – 3000 2, 3 ●

Upstream

Fuse Type J, T RK L RK J, T RK L RK J, T RK RK RK J, T RK J, T RK

Amperes, Maximum 600 400 1200 600 600 400 1200 600 400 100 200 200 400 100 400 100

System kA 200 200 100 100 200 200 100 100 200 200 100 100 100 200 200 200

System Volts 600 600 600 600 480 480 480 240 120/240 120/240 120/240 277 277 240 240 480/277

Downstream

Breaker Range

Amperes Poles

LC, LCA, LCG,

LCGA, HLC,

HLCA, HLCG,

HLCGA

125 – 600 2, 3 ●●●●

LC, LCA, LCG,

LCAG, HLC,

HLCA, HLCG,

HLCGA

74 – 400 2, 3 ●●●●

GB, GC, GHB,

GHC 15 – 100 1 ●●●

GHB, GHC 15 – 100 1 ●●

GB, GC, GHB,

GHC 15 – 100 2, 3 ●●

GHB, GHC 15 – 100 2, 3 ●

MA, HMA, MC,

MCA, MCG,

MCGA, HMCA,

HMCGA,

HMCG, MDL,

HMDL, ND,

HND

125 – 800 2, 3 ●●

NB, NC, NCA,

NCG, NCGA,

HNB, HNC,

HNCA, HNCG,

HNCGA, MDL,

HMDL, ND,

HND

600 – 1200 2, 3 ●

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-83

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Guide — Panelboard Replacement Breakers

Sheet 0679

Panelboard Replacement Breaker Selection Guide

Panelboard Replacement Breakers are

generally for use as replacement for

out-of-production panelboard circuit

breakers where both physical and

electrical interchangeability is

required.

Where possible, consider-

ation should be

given to application

of either Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer or

original Westinghouse circuit breakers

For additional information on replace-

ment circuit breakers and accessories

refer to the Cutler-Hammer YES Catalog.

Table 21.3-130. Replacement Breakers

Table 21.3-131. Replacement Breakers

Last manufacture date — 1974.

Last manufacture date — 1967.

Replacement of all out-of-production

panelboard circuit breakers other than

the “JK” and “JKL” types are desig-

nated by the easily identiﬁable addi-

tion of an “R” preﬁx to the out-of-

production circuit breaker catalog

number that they replace.

An Example:

RF3100 is a newly manufactured,

3-Pole, 100 Ampere Trip Panelboard

Replacement Breaker for an out-of-

production F3100.

RDesignates new panelboard

replacement breaker

FIdentiﬁes the out-of-production

circuit breaker frame

3Number of poles

100 Trip ampere rating

Notes:

1. Panelboard Replacement Circuit

Breakers have non-interchangeable

trip units and the same interrupting

capacity as the out-of-production

circuit breakers that they replace.

2. The RE breaker has off-center

terminals just like the E breaker

it is replacing.

3. For out-of-production breakers,

the “B” sufﬁx denotes 277 Vac

rating for the Panelboard

Replacement Breaker.

(Example: RE3020B)

4. Some Panelboard Replacement

Breakers do not have the same

physical dimensions or mounting

holes as the breakers that they

replace. For example, the types

REH, RFA and RHFA are 6 inches

(152.4 mm) in length and the

breakers they replace, EH, FA and

HFA are 6-1/2 inches (165.1 mm)

in length. Mounting hardware is

provided with each breaker to

resolve these differences, and

must be installed to ensure a

proper ﬁt.

5. Panelboard Replacement Breakers

can be installed in the following

style of out-of-production

Westinghouse panelboards:

ABH NEB

A2B NHDP

CDP NHEB

NAB NH1B

NA1B NLAB-AB

NA1B-LX NLAB-ABH

NDP

Breaker

Type Amperes Panelboard Replacement Breaker Interrupting Ampere Rating

120 Vac 240 Vac 277 V (1-Pole) 480 Vac 600 Vac 125 V

(1-Pole) 250 Vdc

Sym. Asym. Sym. Asym. Sym. Asym. Sym. Asym. Sym. Asym.

REA

15 – 20

15 – 100

15 – 20

—

7,500

—

7,500

—

7,500

—

7,500

—

10,000

—

5,000

—

5,000

—

REA

REH

15 – 100

7,500

—

7,500

—

7,500

18,000

7,500

20,000

—

10,000

—

10,000

—

14,000

—

15,000

—

14,000

—

15,000

5,000

—

5,000

10,000

RFA

RHF

RHFA

15 – 150

15 – 100

15 – 150

—

18,000

65,000

20,000

75,000

—

14,000

25,000

15,000

30,000

14,000

18,000

15,000

20,000

—

10,000

20,000

70 – 225

125 – 400

—

22,000

42,000

25,000

50,000

—

18,000

30,000

20,000

35,000

14,000

22,000

15,000

25,000

—

10,000

20,000

RKL

RLM

70 – 225

125 – 400

125 – 800

—

25,000

42,000

30,000

50,000

—

22,000

30,000

25,000

35,000

22,000

25,000

—

10,000

20,000

RHK

RHKL

RHLM

70 – 225

125 – 400

125 – 800

—

65,000

75,000

—

35,000

40,000

25,000

30,000

—

20,000

Current

Panelboard

Circuit

Breaker Type

Out-of-

Production

Circuit

Breaker Type

Volts ac

(50/60 Hz)

240 480 600

REA

REH

E 

EA 

EH 

●

RFA

RHFA

FA 

HFA 

F 

●

RHF

HF 

J 

K 

●

RHK

RKL

RHKL

HK 

KL 

HKL 

●

RLM

RHLM

LM 

HLM 

JK 

JKL 

●

Home

TOC

Index

21.3-84

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Sheet 0680

This page intentionally left blank.

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.4-1

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Microprocessor Trip Units

General Description

Sheet 0681

Table 21.4-1. Digitrip RMS Circuit Breaker Trip Unit Selection Chart

Optional feature.

Requires auxiliary alarm module below R-Frames.

Not available in J250-Frame yet.

Note: For time current curves for the trip units, see the Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breaker CD-ROM SA.73A.01.T.E.

Description Digitrip

310 Digitrip

310+ Digitrip

510 OPTIM

550 Digitrip

610 Digitrip

810 OPTIM

750 Digitrip

910 OPTIM

1050 Digitrip

520 Digitrip

520M Digitrip

520MC Digitrip

1150

Circuit Breaker Type

Molded Case J250-Frame 250 Ampere X X ———————————

Molded Case K-Frame 400 Ampere X — — X ————X ————

Molded Case L-Frame 600 Ampere X X — X ————X ————

Molded Case M-Frame 800 Ampere X ————————————

Molded Case N-Frame 1200 Ampere X — — X ————X ————

Molded Case R-Frame 2500 Ampere X — X — X X — X X — — — —

Insulated Case SPB — — X — XXXXX————

Power Breaker DSII/DSLII ——X —XXXXX————

Power Breaker Magnum DS —————————XXXX

Features

Curve Shaping Functions 55910991091099910

Front Adjustable XXX—XX—X—XXX—

Programmable ———X ——X —X ———X

Zone Selective Interlocking — — X X XXXXXXXXX

Load Monitoring ———XXXXXX—XXX

Diagnostics — — XXXXXXXXXXX

Power/Energy Monitoring —————X —X X ———X

Harmonics ———————X X ———X

Waveform Capture ———————X X ———X

Communications ———X

—XXXX——XX

Ground Fault Alarm X  ——X

 ————X

—XXX

ontents

Trip Unit Selection Chart . . . . . 21.4-1

Molded Case, SPB and DSII

Trip Units (Digitrip and OPTIM)

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4-2

Protection Features . . . . . . . 21.4-3

System Communications . . 21.4-4

Time-Current Curve Shaping

. 21.4-5

Zone Selective Interlocking. . 21.4-6

Digitrip OPTIM . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4-7

Digitrip Selection Guide. . . . 21.4-8

Magnum DS Trip Units

(Digitrip 520, 520M, 520MC and 1150)

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4-9

Zone Selective Interlocking. . 21.4-9

Digitrip Selection Guide. . . . 21.4-10

Circuit Breakers with Microprocessor Trip Units

Home

TOC

Index

21.4-2

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Microprocessor Trip Units

General Description — Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units Sheet 0682

Digitrip and OPTIM Trip Units

The Eaton Corporation offers the most

comprehensive range of electronic trip

units in the industry for Cutler-Hammer

Molded Case Circuit Breakers, SPB

Insulated Case Circuit Breakers, and

DSII Power Circuit Breakers. All elec-

tronic trip units are rms sensing and

can be applied from 70 amperes up

through 5000 amperes.

Eaton offers electronic trip units as

standard for molded case circuit break-

ers rated 1000 amperes and above

and

offers electronic trip units as optional

for

molded case circuit breakers 70 amperes

up through 800 amperes.

Digitrip electronic trip units are ac

devices that employ microprocessor-

based technology that provides a true

rms current sensing means for proper

correlation with thermal characteristics

of conductors and equipment. The pri-

mary function of the Digitrip electronic

trip unit is to provide circuit protection.

This is achieved by analyzing the sec-

ondary current signals received from

the circuit breaker current sensors and

initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker

shunt trip when pre-set current levels

and time delay settings are exceeded.

Digitrip 310

Digitrip 310+

OPTIM 550

OPTIM 1050

Electronic trip units are applied

to distribution systems when high

standards of protection and coordination

are called for. In addition, electronic

trip units can provide further enhanced

features such as alarming, diagnostics,

system monitoring and communications.

Cutler-Hammer rms sensing trip units

fall into two main categories:

■Front adjustable trip units

(Digitrip RMS 310, 310+, 510, 610,

810 and 910).

■Programmable trip units

(Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050).

Note: OPTIM 750 programmable trip units

not available in molded case circuit breakers.

Front Adjustable Trip Units

Front adjustable trip units are elec-

tronic trip units that have up to nine

time-current setting options that are

set by switches mounted on the front

of the trip unit. The application for

front adjustable trip units would be

distribution systems that can be coor-

dinated within the range of settings

available and that do not require

sophisticated coordination strategies to

be applied down through the distribution

system to small rated breakers.

Digitrip 910

Programmable Trip Units

Programmable trip units are electronic

trip units that have up to ten time-

current setting options that are pro-

grammed electronically by the use of a

programming device. The application

for programmable trip units would be

high integrity distribution systems that

require superior levels of system

coordination coupled with system

alarming, diagnostics and monitoring.

Rating Plugs

Rating plugs provide a means to

establish the breaker’s continuous

current rating. Rating plugs are color-

coded and interchangeable to make it

easy to match the correct rating plug

with the correct trip unit. The same

rating plug can be applied to both 50

and 60 Hz distribution systems. In

general, most rating plugs are of the

ﬁxed ampere rating type. Eaton offers

an adjustable rating plug as an option

for the Digitrip RMS 310 trip unit.

Digitrip 1050

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.4-3

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Microprocessor Trip Units

General Description — Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units

Sheet 0683

Additional Protection Features

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Digitrip RMS

Electronic trip units are designed and

built with safety and reliability in mind,

both to protect the user and the equip-

ment as well as making sure the trip

functions within its design parameters.

By providing a SURE Start discriminator

circuit to Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810 and

910 trip units as well as to Digitrip

OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 trip units that

do not have an instantaneous setting,

the user is protected should a faulted

circuit exist. The discriminator (or mak-

ing current releases as it is often called)

is set at 11 times the rating plug ampere

rating and is enabled for approximately

the ﬁrst 10 cycles of current ﬂow.

Should a fault condition exist, the

breaker will trip with no intentional time

delay on closing, protecting the user

from a potentially unsafe condition.

In addition to a discriminator, an

instantaneous override is present in all

molded case and insulated case circuit

breakers to provide additional protec-

tion for the breaker. The instantaneous

override is factory set nominally just

below the breaker withstand rating.

Digitrip electronic trip units can oper-

ate reliably in ambient temperatures

that range from -20°C to +85°C. In

the unlikely event that temperatures

exceed this ambient, the trip unit has a

built-in overtemperature trip to protect

the trip unit should the temperature

exceed these design parameters.

Thermal Memory

Digitrip RMS and Digitrip OPTIM elec-

tronic trip units incorporate powered

thermal memory, i.e., the units remem-

ber recent overcurrent events which may

have initiated the trip timing sequence,

and then returned to nominal levels,

halting the sequence prior to trip initia-

tion. In the event that the current levels

again exceed the pickup set point within

a few cycles of the original pickup, the

unit’s memory recalls the previous near

trip and automatically imposes a shorter

delay time. In effect, the unit treats multi-

ple time related events as a single con-

tinuous event thereby preventing system

damage due to cumulative overheating.

As a further enhancement, the trip

units incorporate an unpowered ther-

mal memory feature. In the event

that current levels cause the breaker

to trip and the breaker is immediately

reclosed, the trip unit remembers the

previous overcurrent trip and again

imposes a shorter delay time should

a further overcurrent occur before a

sufﬁcient cooldown period has elapsed.

Thermal memory protects the distribu-

tion system from cumulative overheat-

ing caused by repeated overcurrent

conditions. OPTIM trip units allow this

to be turned ON or OFF.

System Alarms

Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 elec-

tronic trip units incorporate a high

load alarm capability. Set at 85% of

Ir, the alarm will be initiated once

the load current exceeds 85% for 40

seconds. Once this occurs, the HILD

message will ﬂash in the display win-

dow and the power/relay module will

operate to send a remote signal.

Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units

also offer a high load alarm capability

but with more ﬂexibility. OPTIM trip

units have a high load alarm that can

be programmed to operate between

50% and 100% of Ir.

Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units

incorporate a ground fault alarm

capability. Settings available for ground

fault alarm are the same as for ground

fault trip. Once a ground fault alarm

occurs, both local and remote signal

indication is available. (OPTIM 550

is remote only.)

Peak demand exceeded alarms are

available with Digitrip RMS 810 and

910 as well as Digitrip OPTIM 1050.

Power quality and total harmonic

distortion levels can be set with Digitrip

RMS 910 and Digitrip OPTIM 1050 and

an alarming feature can be initiated

should these levels be exceeded.

System Diagnostics

Whenever a circuit breaker trips, it is

normally imperative that the cause of

trip be determined quickly, the faulty

conditions rectiﬁed, and the breaker

put back into service. Digitrip RMS

510, 610, 810, 910, and Digitrip OPTIM

electronic trip units incorporate a com-

plete package of systems diagnostics

to meet this challenge.

Four cause-of-trip LEDs are embedded

in the front of the trip unit case, indicat-

ing that the cause-of-trip was either a

long delay, short delay, instantaneous

or ground fault. Remote signal indica-

tion for cause of trip as well as magni-

tude of trip information is also available.

Systems Monitoring

Digitrip RMS and Digitrip OPTIM elec-

tronic trip units offer a complete menu

of monitoring capability to include cur-

rent, power and energy, power factor,

power quality harmonics, and other

related parameters with a high level

of accuracy.

Digital Display

Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 have

a large, easy-to-read 4-digit alpha-

numeric display mounted on the trip

unit. The display is supported by LEDs

that indicate which parameter is being

displayed along with the unit the

value is displayed in, e.g., kA etc.

Current Monitoring

Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 trip units

are capable of monitoring currents in

individual phases (A, B, C) as well as

ground currents. Digitrip OPTIM 550,

750 and 1050 trip units are capable

of monitoring currents in individual

phases (A, B, C) as well as neutral

and ground currents.

Values are displayed in the digital

display window in kA. Accuracy of the

current monitored values is ±2 percent

of full scale sensor rating.

Power and Energy Monitoring

For the trip unit to calculate true power

and energy values, a Potential Trans-

former Module is required. This PTM

is mounted internally (R frame and

larger) or externally (N frame or

smaller) to the breaker, and provides

voltage to the trip unit.

Digitrip RMS 810 and 910 trip units

are capable of monitoring peak power

demand, present power demand, and

reverse power ﬂow in MW. Additionally,

both forward and reverse energy con-

sumption in MWh can be monitored.

Digitrip OPTIM 1050 trip units can also

monitor the same power and energy

parameters but the units are displayed

in kW and kWh.

The accuracy of power monitored

values is ±4 percent of full scale

sensor/frame rating.

The accuracy of energy monitored

values is ±5 percent of full scale

sensor/frame rating.

Both the RMS 910 and OPTIM 1050

report power factor. Digitrip RMS 910

trip units have the additional capability

of monitoring line-to-line voltage.

Harmonics Monitoring

Digitrip RMS 910 and Digitrip OPTIM 1050

trip units are capable of monitoring

values of current harmonics. Percentage

of total harmonic content can be moni-

tored for each level of harmonic content

up to the 27th harmonic. Additionally, a

total harmonic distortion (THD) value can

be calculated and displayed providing

the user with total system current

harmonic monitoring capability.

Home

TOC

Index

21.4-4

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Microprocessor Trip Units

General Description — Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units Sheet 0684

System Communications

The Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer PowerNet

monitoring, protection, and control

communications system is the most

highly reliable, cost-effective commu-

nications system available. Digitrip

RMS 810 and 910 as well as Digitrip

OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 electronic

trip units include a capability to com-

municate within a PowerNet System.

Note: Communications is an optional

accessory on the Digitrip OPTIM 550.

PowerNet system communications are

over a shielded twisted pair communi-

cations cable that connects devices

daisychain style.

PowerNet system communications

with Digitrip electronic trip units can be

applied for variable levels of sophisti-

cation as described as follows:

Display

Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 electronic

trip units are front adjustable trip units

where all settings and display informa-

tion is accessible from the front of the

trip unit. Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and

1050 electronic trip units are program-

mable by the use of a hand-held pro-

grammer called a Digitrip OPTIMizer.

The Digitrip OPTIMizer accesses,

displays and conﬁgures trip settings

and information.

Sub-Network Displays

Digitrip RMS 810 and 910 electronic

trip units can be connected as part

of a sub-network system to a panel-

mounted user interface device known

as an Assemblies Electronic Monitor

(AEMII). All trip units connected to the

sub-network can have their settings

and monitoring information displayed

on the AEMII which is normally

mounted on the front of the

switchgear or switchboard.

Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 elec-

tronic trip units can also be connected

as part of a sub-network system to a

panel-mounted user interface device

called a Breaker Interface Module II

(BIMII). A Breaker Interface Module

accesses, conﬁgures and displays

OPTIM trip unit information as well as

for Digitrip RMS 810 and 910 trip units

as well as Energy Sentinels. The BIMII,

like the AEMII, is normally mounted

on the front of an electrical assembly.

(See Section 4 for more information

on the BIMII.)

PowerNet Network

Digitrip RMS 810, 910, and Digitrip

OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 electronic

trip units can be connected into a ﬁeld

bus system which is called PowerNet.

All control, monitoring and conﬁgura-

tion of the trip units can be carried

out from a central personal computer.

Please see Section 2 of this catalog for

more information on PowerNet.

Breaker Interface Module (BIM)

Control and monitoring features

provided by Digitrip RMS 810 or 910

and Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 or 1050

trip units include:

■Breaker status (open, closed, tripped).

■Address and baud rate.

■Trip event time.

■Trip event counter.

■View protection settings.

■Change protection settings. 

■Load current values.

■Power and energy values. 

■Power factor. 

■Line-to-line voltage. 

■Power quality current

harmonic values. 

■Waveform capture. 

■Remote status messages.

■Remote control-trip/close/reset.

■Reset demand/energy/trip event.

Digitrip OPTIM only.

Digitrip RMS 910 and

Digitrip OPTIM 1050 only.

Digitrip RMS 910 only.

Field Testing

System maintenance is an extremely

important part of any distribution system

and the capability to test electronic trip

units is an essential requirement.

Digitrip RMS 310 and 310+ electronic

trip units can be tested using a test

set to perform long delay, short delay,

and ground fault functional testing.

The test set is connected to the trip

unit via a built-in test receptacle.

Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810 and 910 as

well as Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050

electronic trip units have an integral test

capability and do not require an external

test set. Both phase and ground, trip and

no trip, testing can be carried out with

the breaker in the connected cell position.

An Auxiliary Power Module can be

provided for bench testing Digitrip

RMS 510, 610, 810, 910, and Digitrip

OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 electronic

trip units, or when the breaker is

disconnected from the cell. The Auxiliary

Power Module operates from a 120 Vac

supply and provides control power to

test the trip unit.

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.4-5

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Microprocessor Trip Units

General Description — Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units

Sheet 0685

Time-Current Curve Shaping

Figure 21.4-1. Time-Current Curve Shaping

Note: See selection guide charts for avail-

ability of adjustments.

Long Delay (L)

1. Long Delay Pickup

Determines the continuous

ampere rating of the breaker.

2. Long Delay Time

Determines the amount of time

the breaker will carry a low level

overload before tripping.

a. I2t Response

t in: For coordination with other

circuit breakers with electronic

trip devices and for coordination

with thermal-magnetic

circuit breakers.

b. I4t Response

I4t in: For coordination with

fuses and upstream trans-

former damage curves.

Short Delay (S)

3. Short Delay Pickup

Determine or set the level of fault

current at which the short time trip

delay countdown is actuated.

4. Short Delay

Sets the amount of time the breaker

will carry both a low level and high

fault currents before tripping.

a. Flat Response

I2t out: For coordination with

other circuit breakers with

electronic trip devices.

b. I2t Response

I2t in: For coordination with

fuses and thermal-magnetic

breakers.

Instantaneous (I)

5. Instantaneous Pickup

Determines the level of fault

current which will actuate a trip

with no time delay.

Ground Fault (G)

6. Ground Fault Pickup

Determines the level of fault

current at which the ground fault

trip delay countdown is actuated.

7. Ground Fault Delay

Determines the amount of time

the breaker will carry a ground

fault before tripping.

a. Flat Response

I2t out: For coordination with

other circuit breakers with

electronic ground fault settings.

b. I2t Response

I2t in: For coordination with

zero sequence ground fault

relays, fuses, and thermal-

magnetic breakers.

Curve Shaping Economy

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Digitrip RMS 310

trip units are available with up to ﬁve

phase and ground adjustments on the

front of the trip unit. Selective system

coordination with both upstream and

downstream devices can be achieved to

provide an economic solution for less

sophisticated distribution systems.

Dependent Curve Shaping

For more sophisticated selective

coordination systems Digitrip RMS 510,

610, 810 and 910 trip units are available

with up to nine curve shaping choices

via switches on the front of the unit.

Curve shaping ﬂexibility is provided by

dependent long and short delay adjust-

ments that are based on continuous

amperes (Ir) selection.

Dependent curve shaping offers the

user additional system coordination

possibilities as well as closer thermal

protection of the system. Dependent

curve shaping adjustments are shown

by the blue portion of the graphic

time-current curve on the front of

the trip unit.

Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 trip

units offer programmable dependent

curve shaping via ten curve shaping

choices that are programmed electron-

ically into the trip unit. OPTIM also

offers virtual inﬁnite settings to allow

the user to optimize coordination for

a selectively coordinated distribution

system. In addition, time-current set

points can be downloaded via a

communication system from a central

personal computer. Digitrip OPTIM is

normally applied to systems where

system integrity is very important.

Time

Current in Multiples

Home

TOC

Index

21.4-6

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Microprocessor Trip Units

General Description — Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units Sheet 0686

Zone Selective Interlocking

Zone selective interlocking capabilities

are available with Digitrip RMS 510,

610, 810 and 910 trip units as well

as Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and

1050 trip units.

Note: Optional accessory on the OPTIM 550.

Zone selective interlocking provides

positive system coordination by allowing

the breaker closest to the fault to trip

without any preset time delays. This is

achieved by setting up the distribution

system as shown in the adjacent

diagram. The hardwired connection

between the trip units sends a restraining

signal upstream allowing the breaker

closest to the fault to act instantaneously.

Zone selective interlocking also reduces

stress on the distribution system by

isolating faults without time delays.

Figure 21.4-2. Zone Selective Interlocking

Fault 1

There are no interlocking signals.

The main breaker trip unit will initiate

the trip instantaneously.

Fault 2

The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate

the trip instantaneously to clear the

fault; and Zone 2 will send an inter-

locking signal to the Zone 1 trip unit.

The Zone 1 trip unit will begin to time

out, and in the event that the feeder

breaker in Zone 2 would not clear

the fault, the main breaker in Zone 1

will clear the fault in 0.5 seconds.

Fault 3

The branch breaker trip unit will initiate

the trip instantaneously to clear the

fault; and Zone 3 will send an interlock-

ing signal to the Zone 2 trip unit; and

Zone 2 will send an interlocking signal

to Zone 1.

Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip units will

begin to time out, and in the event

that the branch breaker in Zone 3

would not clear the fault, the feeder

breaker in Zone 2 will clear the fault

in 0.3 seconds. Similarly, in the event

that the feeder breaker in Zone 2

would not clear the fault, the main

breaker in Zone 1 will clear the fault

in 0.5 seconds.

oad

Ground Fault Settin

300 A Picku

me Dela

ect

Interlockin

Wirin

Ground Fault Settin

eco

ela

Ground Fault Settin

eco

ela

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.4-7

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Microprocessor Trip Units

General Description — Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units

Sheet 0687

Digitrip OPTIM

Description

Digitrip OPTIM is a programmable

communicating microprocessor-based

low voltage electronic trip unit system

for Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Molded

Case Circuit Breakers and Low Voltage

DSII Power Breakers. Digitrip OPTIM

trip units are available in three models:

Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050, for

the K-, L-, N- and R-Frames (70 through

2500 amperes), as well as Digitrip

OPTIM 550, Digitrip OPTIM 750 and

Digitrip OPTIM 1050 for the SPB

Insulated Case Circuit Breakers and

DSII Power Circuit Breakers.

Digitrip OPTIM trip units are fully

programmable and can be applied as

a standalone breaker with a hand-held

Digitrip OPTIMizer programmer for

conﬁguring the trip unit, displaying

information and testing. In addition,

OPTIM can be applied as a low voltage

assembly with a panel-mounted Breaker

Interface Module (BIM) to conﬁgure,

display and test. Alternatively, OPTIM

can be applied as part of a fully inte-

grated IMPACC/PowerNet system.

(See Section 2).

Features

■Fully programmable, rms sensing

trip unit.

■Available in K, L, N and R Series C

breakers and DSII power breakers.

■Available in 80% and 100%

rated breakers.

■Available in LSI, LSIG or LSIA

conﬁgurations.

Note: Ground fault alarm only.

■Available in three models OPTIM

550, OPTIM 750 and OPTIM 1050.

■10 function time-current curve

shaping options, including a new

I4t long delay time or slope.

■Short delay and ground delay

Zone Selective Interlocking

(Optional on 550).

■Additional programmable

protection features including

thermal memory and

discriminator functions.

■Advanced warning systems

including high load alarm,

ground fault alarm.

■Full system diagnostics capability.

■System monitoring features including:

❑Load current

❑Power and energy

❑Power factor

❑Power quality — harmonics

■PowerNet communications saves

individual wiring of breakers.

Circuit Breaker Trip Units and Accessories

Hand-Held Programmer

The Digitrip OPTIMizer hand-held

programmer accesses, displays and

conﬁgures information from OPTIM

Trip Units. The OPTIMizer plugs into

the front of the trip unit and is powered

by a nine-volt battery, or an auxiliary

power module.

An operator can use the OPTIMizer to:

■Complete Initial System Setup:

❑Select breaker address

❑Select system frequency

(50/60 Hz)

❑Set system baud rate

❑Set system password

■Conﬁgure the System:

❑Change time-current set points

❑Select protection options

❑Select alarm levels

■Display Information:

❑Breaker information

❑Time-current set points

❑Metered values

❑Trip event information

■Test Trip Unit Performance:

❑Phase and ground

❑Trip/no trip

Panel Mounted User Interface

The Breaker Interface Module can

be mounted directly on the assembly

or at a remote location and can be

used to access, conﬁgure and display

information from OPTIM Trip Units.

An operator can use the Breaker

Interface Module to:

■Complete Initial System Setup:

❑Select system frequency

(50/60 Hz)

❑Set system password

■Conﬁgure the System:

❑Change time-current set points

❑Select protection options

❑Select alarm levels

■Display Information:

❑Breaker information

❑Time-current set points

❑Metered values

❑Trip event information

■Test Trip Unit Performance:

❑Phase and ground

❑Trip/no trip

■Expanded Energy Monitoring:

❑Set addresses for group energy

monitoring

❑Group energy readings

■Common Alarm Contacts:

❑Three Form C contacts

❑Saves wiring to each breaker

■Local and Remote Indication:

❑Remote indication/alarming

❑Breaker status LED indication

■Expanded Communications:

❑Communicate with:

– OPTIM Trip Units

– Digitrip RMS 810

and 910 Trip Units

– IQ Energy Sentinels

and Universal

– IQ Energy Sentinels

–A total of 50 devices

Home

TOC

Index

21.4-8

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Microprocessor Trip Units

Technical Data — Molded Case, SPB, and DSII Trip Units Selection Guide Sheet 0688

Table 21.4-2. Molded Case and DSII Digitrip Selection Guide

J250 Frame adjustments are not by rating

plug. Ground fault version not available yet.

Adjust by rating plug.

LS/LSG only.

Not to exceed 1200 amperes.

L and N Frames *20 – 100% x Is.

R-Frame *25 – 100% x In.

By OPTIMizer/BIM.

Yes with addition of Energy Sentinel.

BIM = Breaker Interface Module

Is= Sensor Rating

In= Rating Plug

Ir= LDPU Setting x In

Trip Unit

Type Digitrip

RMS 310 Digitrip

RMS 310+ Digitrip

RMS 510 Digitrip

OPTIM 550 Digitrip

RMS 610 Digitrip

OPTIM 750 Digitrip

RMS 810 Digitrip

RMS 910 Digitrip

OPTIM 1050

rms Sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Breaker Type

Frame

Ampere Range

Interrupting Rating

at 480 V

J250



, K, L, M, N, R

15 – 2500 A

35, 65, 100 (kA)

JG, LG

20 – 600 A

35, 65, 100 (kA)

R, SPB, DSII,

DSLII

800 – 5000 A

65, 100 (kA)

K, L, N

70 – 1200 A

35, 65, 100 (kA)

R, SPB, DSII,

DSLII

800 – 5000 A

65, 100 (kA)

SPB, DSII,

DSLII



800 – 2500 A

35, 65, 100 (kA)

R, SPB, DSII,

DSLII

800 – 5000 A

65, 100 (kA)

R, SPB, DSII,

DSLII

800 – 5000 A

65, 100 (kA)

K, L, N, R,

DSII, DSLII

70 – 5000 A

35, 65, 100 (kA)

Protection

Ordering Options LS

LSG LSI

LSIG LS

LSG LSI

LSIG

LI, LS, LSI, LIG,

LSG, LSIG LSI, LSI (A),

LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG,

LSG, LSIG LSI(A), LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG,

LSG, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG,

LSG, LSIG LSI (A), LISG

Fixed Rated Plug (I

)

Overtemperature Trip Yes

Yes No

Yes

Yes Yes

Yes

Long Delay Protection (L)

Adjustable Rating

Plug (I

)

Long Delay Pickup

Long Delay Time I2t

Yes

0.5 – 1.0(I

)



10 Seconds

40 – 100% Frame

2 – 24 Seconds

0.5 – 1.0 x (I

)

2 – 24 Seconds

0.4 – 1.0 x (I

)

2 – 24 Seconds

0.5 – 1.0 x (I

)

2 – 24 Seconds

0.5 – 1.0 x (I

)

2 – 24 Seconds

0.5 – 1.0 x (I

)

2 – 24 Seconds

0.5 – 1.0 x (I

)

2 – 24 Seconds

0.4 – 1.0 x (I

)

2 – 24 Seconds

Long Delay Time I4t

Long Delay

Thermal Memory

High Load Alarm

Yes

1 – 5 Seconds

Yes

0.5 – 1.0 x I

Yes

0.85 x I

1 – 5 Seconds

Yes

0.5 – 1.0 x I

Yes

0.85 x I

Yes

0.85 x I

1 – 5 Seconds

Yes

0.5-1.0 x I

Short Delay Protection (S)

Short Delay Pickup 200 – 800% x (I

)— 200 – 600%

S1&S2 x (I

)150 – 800%

x (I

)200 – 600%

S1&S2 x (I

)150 – 800%

x (I

)200 – 600%

S1&S2 x (I

)200 – 600%

S1&S2 x (I

)150 – 800%

x (I

)

Short Delay Time I2t

Short Delay Time Flat 100

Inst – 300 ms Yes

No No

Inst – 300 ms 100 – 500 ms

100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms

100 – 500 ms

Short Delay Time Z.S.I. No No Yes Optional Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Instantaneous Protection (I)

Instantaneous Pickup No 200 – 800%

x (I

)No 200 – 600%

M1&M2 x (I

)200 – 800%

x (I

)200 – 600%

M1&M2 x (I

)200 – 800%

x (I

)200 – 600%

M1&M2 x (I

)200 – 600%

M1&M2 x (I

)200 – 800%

x (I

)

Discriminator

Instantaneous Override No

Yes No

Yes



Yes Yes



Yes Yes



Yes Yes



Yes Yes

Yes

Ground Fault Protection (G)

Ground Fault Alarm

Ground Fault Pickup

Ground Fault Delay I2t

Yes

Var/Frame



20 – 100% Frame

25 – 100% x I



100 – 500 ms

20/25 – 100%



20/25 – 100%



100 – 500 ms

25 – 100% x I



100 – 500 ms

20/25 – 100%



20/25 – 100%



100 – 500 ms

25 – 100% x I



100 – 500 ms

25 – 100% x I



100 – 500 ms

20/25 – 100%



20/25 – 100%



100 – 500 ms

Ground Fault Delay Flat

Ground Fault Z.S.I.

Ground Fault

Thermal Memory

Inst – 500 ms

Yes

—

Yes

100 – 500 ms

Yes

100 – 500 ms

Optional

Yes

100 – 500 ms

Yes

100 – 500 ms

Yes

100 – 500 ms

Yes

100 – 500 ms

Yes

100 – 500 ms

Yes

System Diagnostics

Cause of Trip LEDs

Magnitude of

Trip Information

Remote Signal

Contacts

Yes

System Monitoring

Digital Display

Current

Voltage

Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes

Power and Energy

Power Quality-

Harmonics

Power Factor



Yes

Yes (Over

PowerNet Only)

Yes

Communications

PowerNet No No No Optional No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Testing

Testing Method Test Set Test Kit Integral OPTIMizer, BIM,

PowerNet (Optional) Integral OPTIMizer, BIM,

PowerNet Integral Integral OPTIMizer, BIM,

PowerNet

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.4-9

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Microprocessor Trip Units

General Description — Magnum DS Trip Units

Sheet 0689

Magnum DS Digitrip Trip Units

The next generation of proven Eaton’s

Cutler-Hammer Digitrip RMS trip

units is available exclusively on Cutler-

Hammer Magnum DS breakers. These

true rms sensing trip units provide

accurate coordination with the con-

ductors and equipment the breaker

is designed to protect.

Eaton introduced the ﬁrst micropro-

cessor-based trip unit and has advanced

the technology into a new family of UL

and CSA listed Digitrip RMS Electronic

and Programmable Trip Units designed

and engineered exclusively for

Magnum DS Breakers.

■Digitrip RMS 520 enables the user

as many as nine phase and ground

current protection settings for maxi-

mum ﬂexibility in trip-curve shaping

and multi-unit coordination, and adds

ground current protection settings.

■Digitrip RMS 520M adds metering

for phase, neutral and ground

current…with a four-character

LCD display window.

■Digitrip RMS 520MC adds commu-

nication of trip values and breaker

status (open, closed and tripped).

■Digitrip RMS 1150 provides

programmability for more

sophisticated distribution systems.

❑Increased protection and

coordination capabilities.

❑Systems monitoring information

including voltage, current, power,

energy, power factor, and harmonic

distortion values, viewed on a

three-line LED display.

❑Two programmable contacts

for customer use.

❑Time stamping of trip events for

improved troubleshooting and

diagnostics.

❑Accuracy of 1% on voltage

and current metered values,

and 2% on energy and power.

❑Systems diagnostic information.

❑PowerNet communications.

❑Waveform capture.

Zone Selective Interlocking

The Digitrip RMS Zone Selective

Interlocking capability provides positive

system coordination without time delays.

Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI) allows

the breaker closest to the fault to trip

without any preset time delay. The

breaker closest to the fault trips ﬁrst,

while the remainder of the distribution

system remains online, thus avoiding

unnecessary and costly downtime.

Digitrip RMS 1150 Programmable Trip Unit

This state-of-the-art trip unit with

true rms sensing can be programmed

at the faceplate or remotely with a

PC using the PowerNet communica-

tions system. All system parameters

as well as programming information

can be viewed on the easy-to-read

three-line digital display window.

Home

TOC

Index

21.4-10

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Microprocessor Trip Units

Technical Data — Magnum DS Digitrip Selection Guide Sheet 0690

Table 21.4-3. Magnum DS Digitrip Selection Guide

Not to exceed 1200 amperes on ground.

Cause of trip — L, S, I, G, and making

current release.

Optional GF only.

Tester for secondary injection.

Must utilize NT-based PowerNet software

to enable communications.

In= Sensor and plug rating.

Ir= LDPU setting.

Magnum DS Digitrip Trip Units

The next generation of proven Digitrip RMS Trip Units is

available exclusively on Magnum DS Breakers. These true

rms sensing trip units provide accurate coordination with the

conductors and equipment the breaker is designed to protect.

Trip Unit Type Digitrip 520 Digitrip 520M Digitrip 520MC Digitrip 1150

Ampere Range

rms Sensing 200 – 5000 A

Yes 200 – 5000 A

Yes

Protection and Coordination

Protection Ordering Options

Fixed Rating Plug (In)

Overtemperature Trip

LSI, LSIG 

Yes

LSI, LSIG, LSIA 

Yes

LSI, LSIG, LSIA 

Yes

LSI, LSIG, LSIA 

Yes

Long Delay Protection Adjustable Rating Plug (In)

Long Delay Setting

Long Delay Time I2t at 6 x Ir

0.4 – 1.0 x (ln)

2 – 24 Seconds

0.4 – 1.0 x (In)

2 – 24 Seconds

0.4 – 1.0 x (In)

2 – 24 Seconds

0.4 – 1.0 x (In)

2 – 24 Seconds

Long Delay Time I4t

Long Delay Thermal Memory

High Load Alarm

Yes

1-5 Seconds

Yes

0.5-1.0 x Ir

Short Delay Protection Short Delay Pick-Up

Short Delay Time I2t at 8 x Ir

Short Delay Time Flat

Short Delay Time ZSI

200 – 1000% M1 x (Ir)

100 – 500 ms

Yes

200 – 1000% M1 x (Ir)

100 – 500 ms

Yes

200 – 1000% M1 x (Ir)

100 – 500 ms

Yes

150% – 1000% x (Ir)

100 – 500 ms

Yes

Instantaneous Protection Instantaneous Pick-Up

Making Current Release

Off Position

200 – 1000% M1 x (In)

Yes

200 – 1000% M1 x (In)

Yes

200 – 1000% M1 x (In)

Yes

200% – 1000% x (In)

Yes

Ground Fault Protection Ground Fault Alarm

Ground Fault Pick-Up

Ground Fault Delay I2t at .625 x In

025 – 100% x (In) 

100 – 500 ms

Yes

025 – 100% x (In) 

100 – 500 ms

Yes

025 – 100% x (In) 

100 – 500 ms

Yes

025 – 100% x (In) 

100 – 500 ms

Ground Fault Delay Flat

Ground Fault ZSI

Ground Fault Thermal Memory

100 – 500 ms

Yes

100 – 500 ms

Yes

100 – 500 ms

Yes

100 – 500 ms

Yes

System Diagnostics

Cause of Trip LEDs

Magnitude of Trip Information

Trip Log (3 Events)

Yes 

Yes

Remote Signal Contacts

Programmable Contacts No

No Yes 

No Yes

System Monitoring

Digital Display

Electronic Operations Counter

Current (Accuracy — % FS Sensor)

4-Character LCD

Yes (2%)

4-Character LCD

Yes (2%)

24-Character LED

Yes

Yes (1%)

Voltage (Accuracy — %) L to L

Power and Energy (Accuracy – %)

Apparent Power kVA and Demand

Yes (1%)

Yes (2%)

Yes

Reactive Power kvar

Power Factor

Crest Factor

Yes

Power Quality — Harmonics

% THD

Waveform Capture

Yes

System Communications

IMPACC/PowerNet

Testing Method

Triplink

Test Set 

Yes 

Test Set 

Yes 

Integral and Test Set 

Yes

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.5-1

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Enclosed Circuit Breakers

General Description

Sheet 0691

NEMA 1 General Purpose

Surface or Flush Mounting

15 – 1200 A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc

NEMA 1

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer NEMA 1

enclosed breakers are designed for

indoor use in commercial buildings,

apartment buildings and other areas

where a general purpose enclosure is

applicable. The breaker is front opera-

ble and is capable of being padlocked in

the OFF position. (Padlocking not avail-

able on enclosures for QUICKLAG

breakers.) Ratings through 1200

amperes are listed with Underwriters

Laboratories as suitable for service

entrance application. Both surface and

ﬂush mounted enclosures are available.

UL File Number E7819

CSA File Number LR84319

NEMA 3R Rainproof

Surface Mounting

Interchangeable Hubs

(through 400 amperes)

15 – 1200 A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc

NEMA 3R

This general purpose outdoor service

center employs a circuit breaker inside

a weatherproof sheet steel enclosure

to serve as a main disconnect and

protective device for feeder circuits.

The operating handle can be padlocked

in the OFF position, and is interlocked

to prevent the door from opening when

the breaker is ON. Ratings through

1200 amperes are listed by Underwriters

Laboratories as suitable for service

entrance application.

UL File Number E7819

CSA File Number LR84319

NEMA 4/4X, 5 Water and Dustproof

Stainless Steel — Type 304,

Surface Mounting

15 – 1200 A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc

NEMA 4/4X, 5

This enclosure meets NEMA 4/4X and

5 requirements for water and dustproof

applications and has no knockouts or

other openings. It is particularly well

suited for use in dairies, borax mines,

breweries, paper mills and other process

industries. The operating handle can

be padlocked in the OFF position, and

is interlocked to prevent the door from

opening when the breaker is ON. Ratings

through 1200 amperes are Underwriters

Laboratories listed as suitable for

service entrance application.

UL File Number E7819

CSA File Number LR84319

NEMA 12 Dustproof

Surface Mounting

No Knockouts or Other Openings

15 – 1200 A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc

NEMA 12 Dustproof

The Cutler-Hammer Type 12 enclosure

is designed in line with speciﬁcations

for special industry application where

unusually severe conditions involving

oil, coolant, dust and other foreign

materials exist in the operating atmo-

sphere. The handle padlocks in the OFF

position and the cover is interlocked

with the handle mechanism to prevent

opening the cover with the circuit

breaker in the ON position. Ratings

through 1200 amperes are listed by

Underwriters Laboratories as suitable

for service entrance application. A

NEMA 12 semi-dust-tight design which

includes knockouts is available. These

units are rated 15 – 400 A, 600 Vac,

500 Vdc.

UL File Number E7819

CSA File Number LR84319

NEMA 7/9 Hazardous Location

Cast Aluminum, Explosion-proof

Surface Mounting

15 – 1200 A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc

NEMA 7/9 Hazardous Location

Hazardous location, Class I, Groups B,

C, D, Divisions 1, 2; Class II, Groups E,

F, G, Divisions 1, 2. This special service

cast aluminum enclosure is supplied

with a wide, machined ﬂanged cover to

prevent igniting outside atmospheres

by arcing from inside the enclosure.

Front operable, the handle padlocks in

the OFF position. Enclosures rated 600

amperes and above have lift-off hinges

for ease of assembly.

Note: XFDN050 is not Group B compliant.

UL File Number E84577 Enclosed

Circuit Breakers

Home

TOC

Index

21.5-2

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Enclosed Circuit Breakers

General Description — Enclosures Only Sheet 0692

Table 21.5-1. Enclosure Only Catalog Numbers Selection Guide

Suitable for use with one-pole breaker base mounting plate kit.

QCCBP required.

Maximum wire size: 4/0.

Table 21.5-2. Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable

Enclosure Only Catalog Numbers Selection Guide (Continued)

Requires additional adapter plate.

Table 21.5-3. Raintight Hubs — Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Table 21.5-4. Breather and Drain, Hazardous Enclosures — Dimensions

in Inches (mm)

Breaker

Frame Breaker

Ampere

Range

Enclosure

NEMA

Class Catalog

Number

Series C Breakers

GC, GHC, GD

2- and 3-Pole only

GHCGFEP

1-Pole Only

15 – 100 1 Surface

12K

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SGDN100 

RGDN100

JGDN100

DGDN100

WGDN100

EHD, FD, FDB,

HFD, FDC 15 – 100 1 Surface

1 Flush

12K

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SFDN100

FFDN100

RFDN100

JFDN100

DFDN100

WFDN100

EHD, FD, FDB

HFD, FDC 15 – 50

60 – 225 7/9 Cast Alum.

7/9 Cast Alum. XFDN050B

XFDN225B

FD, FDB, HFD, FDC,

ED, EDH, EDC 125 – 225 1 Surface

1 Flush

12K

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SFDN225

FFDN225

RFDN225

JFDN225

DFDN225

WFDN225

JD, JDB, HJD, JDC 125 – 250 1 Surface

1 Flush

12K

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SJDN250

FJDN250

RJDN250

JJDN250

DJDN250

WJDN250

JD, JDB, HJD, JDC 125 – 250 7/9 Cast Alum. XJDN250B

KD, KDB, HKD, KDC, DK 125 – 400 1 Surface

1 Flush

12K

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SKDN400

FKDN400

RKDN400

JKDN400

DKDN400

WKDN400

KD, KDB, HKD, KDC, DK 125 – 400 7/9 Cast Alum. XKDN400B

LD, LDB, HLD, LDC 300 – 600 1 Surface

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SLDN600

RLDN600

JLDN600

WLDN600

LD, LDB, HLD, LDC

MDL, HMDL 300 – 600

400 – 800 7/9 Cast Alum. XMCN800B

MDL, HMDL, ND,

NDC, HND 400 – 1200 1 Surface

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SNDN1200

RNDN1200

JNDN1200

WNDN1200

ND, HND, NDC 400 – 1200 7/9 Cast Alum. XNDN1200B

Maximum

Enclosure

Rating (Amperes)

Main Lug Size

Cu/Al Ground Lug Size

Cu/Al Catalog

Number

100 (RFDN100

and SFDN100) (1) 14 – 1/0 (1) 14 – 2 DH100NK

100 (All Others) (1) 14 – 1/0 (1) 14 – 1/0 INK100

250 (1) 6 – 350 kcmil (1) 4 – 300 kcmil INK250

400 (1) 4 – 750 kcmil or

(2) 1/0 – 250 kcmil (1) 4 – 300 kcmil INK400

600 (2) 250 – 500 kcmil (1) 4 – 300 kcmil INK600

1200 (3) 1/0 to 750 kcmil or

(4) 1/0 to 750 kcmil (1) #6 – 250 kcmil INK1200

Breaker

Frame Breaker

Ampere

Range

Enclosure

NEMA

Class Catalog

Number

Earth Leakage Breakers

ELFD, ELHFD & ELFDC

(3-Pole Only) 15 – 100 1 Surface

1 Flush

12K

4/4X

SFD100E

FFD100E

RFDN100E

JFDN100E

DFDN100E

WFDN100E

Current Limit-R Breakers

FCL 15 – 100 3R

12K

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

RFDN150

JFDN150

DFDN150

WFDN150

LCL 125 – 400 1 Surface

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SNDN1200

RNDN1200

JNDN1200

WNDN1200

TRI-PAC Breakers

FB-P 15 – 100 3R

12K

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

RFDN150

JFDN150

DFDN150

WFDN150

LA-P  70 – 400 1 Surface

4/4X

SNDN1200

RNDN1200

JNDN1200

WNDN1200

NB-P 500 – 800 12

4/4X, 5 St. Steel JNDPN800

WNDPN800

All rainproof enclosures

30 through 400 A are

shipped with plate over

cutout. Hubs are not

supplied with screws

on 30 through 400 A enclo-

sures. Use screws

from plate.

Hub Diameter

in Inches (mm) Catalog

Number

Small Hubs

For use with

RGDN and RFDN .75 (19.1)

1.00 (25.4)

1.25 (31.8)

1.50 (38.1)

2.00 (50.8)

DS075H1

DS100H1

DS125H1

DS150H1

DS200H1

Large Hubs

For use with

RJDN. RKDN

has two cutouts

2.00 (50.8)

2.50 (63.5)

3.00 (76.2)

R1H200

R1H250

R1H300

Required if using Type DS hubs

on RJDN and RKDN enclosures. R1HA

Description Compliance Conduit

Opening Catalog

Number

A Universal Breather/Drain

Fitting is installed in the top

of an enclosure to provide

ventilation to minimize

condensation and in the

bottom to allow drainage

of accumulated condensa-

tion while maintaining

explosion-proof integrity.

Type BD:

NEMA 7 – Class I,

Groups C, D;

Class I, Zone 1,

Group IIB

NEMA 9 – Class II,

Groups F, G

.50 (12.7) XPBD2

Type DBB:

NEMA 7 – Class I,

Groups B,

C, D; Class I, Zone 1,

Group IIB

+ Hydrogen

NEMA 9 – Class II,

Groups E, F, G

.50 (12.7) XPDBB50

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.5-3

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Enclosed Circuit Breakers

Dimensions and Weights — Enclosure Only

Sheet 0693

Figure 21.5-1. NEMA 1 Surface Mounted

Figure 21.5-2. NEMA 1 Flush Mounted

Not to be used for construction purposes

unless approved.

Table 21.5-5. NEMA 1 Surface Mounted — Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights.

Total width, due to door clip is 9.95 (252.7).

Single centered mounting hole provided.

Table 21.5-6. NEMA 1 Flush Mounted — Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights.

Catalog

Number Approximate 

Weight Lbs. (kg) Maximum

Amperes Box Dimensions

ABCDE

SGDN100 12 (5) 100 17.50

(444.5) 8.41

(213.5) 6.28

(159.5) 13.03

(331.0) 1.20

(30.6)

SFDN100 12 (5) 100 19.12

(485.6) 9.13 

(231.9) 5.20

(132.1) 17.00

(431.8) N/A 

SFDN150 15 (7) 150 23.25

(590.6) 8.41

(213.5) 6.28

(159.5) 18.75

(476.2) 1.20

(30.6)

SFDN225 15 (7) 225 23.25

(590.6) 8.41

(213.5) 6.28

(159.5) 18.75

(476.2) 1.20

(30.6)

SJDN250 31 (14) 250 34.70

(881.5) 10.92

(227.4) 7.20

(183.0) 30.00

(762.0) 1.88

(47.6)

SKDN400 53 (24) 400 38.81

(985.9) 11.01

(281.0) 10.94

(277.8) 34.00

(863.6) 2.28

(57.9)

SLDN600 81 (37) 600 45.88

(1165.2) 14.31

(363.6) 12.38

(314.3) 46.56

(1182.7) 1.91

(48.4)

SNDN1200 178 (81) 1200 61.22

(1555.0) 21.44

(544.5) 15.41

(391.3) 61.84

(1570.8) 1.97

(50.0)

Catalog

Number Approximate 

Weight Lbs. (kg) Maximum

Amperes Box Dimensions

AB CDE

FFDN100 12 (5) 100 18.81

(477.9) 9.72

(246.9) 6.28

(159.5) 13.03

(331.0) 1.86

(47.2)

FFDN150 15 (7) 150 24.56

(623.9) 9.72

(246.9) 6.28

(159.5) 18.75

(476.2) 1.86

(47.2)

FFDN225 15 (7) 225 24.56

(623.9) 9.72

(246.9) 6.28

(159.5) 18.75

(476.2) 1.86

(47.2)

FJDN250 32 (15) 250 36.02

(914.8) 12.23

(310.7) 7.20

(183.0) 30.00

(762.0) 1.88

(47.6)

FKDN400 53 (24) 400 40.13

(1019.2) 12.38

(314.3) 10.94

(277.8) 34.00

(863.6) 2.94

(74.6)

Home

TOC

Index

21.5-4

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Enclosed Circuit Breakers

Dimensions and Weights — Enclosures Only Sheet 0694

Figure 21.5-3. NEMA 12, 12K Dustproof

Figure 21.5-4. NEMA 3R Rainproof

Not to be used for construction purposes

unless approved.

OFF

Table 21.5-7. NEMA 12, 12K Dustproof — Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights.

Table 21.5-8. NEMA 3R Rainproof — Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights.

Single centered mounting hole provided.

Catalog

Number Approximate 

Weight Lbs. (kg) Maximum

Amperes Box Dimensions

AB CDE

JGDN100 14 (6) 100 19.91

(505.6) 8.84

(224.6) 9.31

(236.6) 18.53

(470.7) 1.70

(43.3)

JFDN100 14 (6) 100 19.91

(505.6) 8.84

(224.6) 9.31

(236.6) 18.53

(470.7) 1.70

(43.3)

JFDN150 18 (8) 150 25.66

(651.7) 8.84

(224.6) 9.31

(236.6) 24.28

(616.7) 1.70

(43.3)

JFDN225 18 (8) 225 25.66

(651.7) 8.84

(224.6) 9.31

(236.6) 24.28

(616.7) 1.70

(43.3)

JJDN250 37 (17) 250 37.53

(953.3) 11.56

(293.7) 10.22

(259.6) 35.77

(908.5) 1.94

(49.2)

JKDN400 58 (26) 400 41.69

(1058.9) 11.75

(298.4) 14.06

(357.2) 39.94

(1014.4) 1.97

(50.0)

JLDN600 81 (37) 600 48.31

(1227.2) 14.91

(378.6) 15.50

(393.7) 46.56

(1182.7) 1.92

(48.8)

JNDPN800 110 (50) 800 63.59

(1615.3) 22.00

(558.8) 17.63

(447.7) —1.97

(50.0)

JNDN1200 170 (77) 1200 63.59

(1615.3) 22.00

(558.8) 17.63

(447.7) 61.84

(1570.8) —

DGDN100 16 (7) 100 19.91

(505.6) 8.84

(224.6) 9.31

(236.6) ——

DFDN100 16 (7) 100 19.91

(505.6) 8.84

(224.6) 9.31

(236.6) ——

DFDN150 19 (9) 150 25.66

(651.7) 8.84

(224.6) 9.31

(236.6) ——

DFDN225 19 (9) 225 25.66

(651.7) 8.84

(224.6) 9.31

(236.6) ——

DJDN250 36 (16) 250 37.53

(953.3) 11.56

(293.7) 10.22

(259.6) ——

DKDN400 53 (24) 400 41.69

(1058.9) 11.75

(298.4) 14.06

(357.2) ——

Catalog

Number Approximate 

Weight Lbs. (kg) Maximum

Amperes Dimensions in Inches (mm)

ABCDE

RGDN100 14 (6) 100 19.91

(505.6) 8.84

(224.6) 9.31

(236.6) 18.53

(470.7) 1.70

(43.3)

RFDN100 14 (6) 100 19.12

(485.6) 9.95

(252.8) 5.14

(130.6) 17.00

(431.8) N/A 

RFDN150 19 (9) 150 25.66

(651.7) 8.84

(224.6) 9.31

(236.6) 24.28

(616.7) 1.70

(43.3)

RFDN225 19 (9) 225 25.66

(651.7) 8.84

(224.6) 9.31

(236.6) 24.28

(616.7) 1.70

(43.3)

RJDN250 40 (18) 250 37.50

(952.5) 11.56

(293.7) 10.22

(259.6) 35.77

(908.5) 1.94

(49.2)

RKDN400 60 (27) 400 41.69

(1058.9) 11.75

(298.4) 14.06

(357.2) 39.94

(1014.4) 1.97

(50.0)

RLDN600 84 (38) 600 48.31

(1227.2) 14.91

(378.6) 15.50

(393.7) 46.56

(1182.7) 1.92

(48.8)

RNDN1200 175 (79) 1200 63.59

(1615.3) 22.00

(558.8) 17.63

(447.7) 61.84

(1570.8) 1.97

(50.0)

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.5-5

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Enclosed Circuit Breakers

Dimensions and Weights — Enclosures Only

Sheet 0695

Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights.

Table 21.5-10. NEMA 7/9Cast Aluminum with Weather Resistant Seals — 15 – 250 Amperes

Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights.

Maximum wire size: 4/0.

Figure 21.5-6. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather Resistant Seals — Dual 3 and 4 Point Mounting Available as Standard on F-Frame 100 A and Below

Table 21.5-9. NEMA 4/4X, 5 Stainless Steel — Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Catalog

Number Approximate 

Weight Lbs. (kg) Maximum

Amperes Dimensions in Inches (mm)

ABCDE

WGDN100 16 (7) 100 19.91

(505.6) 8.84

(224.6) 9.31

(236.6) 18.53

(470.7) 1.70

(43.3)

WFDN100 16 (7) 100 19.91

(505.6) 8.84

(224.6) 9.31

(236.6) 18.53

(470.7) 1.70

(43.3)

WFDN150 20 (9) 150 25.66

(651.7) 8.84

(224.6) 9.31

(236.6) 24.28

(616.7) 1.70

(43.3)

WFDN225 20 (9) 225 25.66

(651.7) 8.84

(224.6) 9.31

(236.6) 24.28

(616.7) 1.70

(43.3)

WJDN250 39 (18) 250 37.50

(952.5) 11.56

(293.7) 10.22

(259.6) 35.77

(908.5) 1.94

(49.2)

Figure 21.5-5. NEMA 4/4X, 5 Stainless Steel WKDN400 60 (27) 400 41.69

(1058.9) 11.75

(298.4) 14.06

(357.2) 39.94

(1014.4) 1.97

(50.0)

WLDN600 88 (40) 600 48.31

(1227.2) 14.91

(378.6) 15.50

(393.7) 46.56

(1182.7) 1.92

(48.8)

WNDN1200 185 (84) 1200 63.59

(1615.3) 22.00

(558.8) 17.63

(447.7) 61.84

(1570.8) 1.97

(50.0)

AON

OFF

Catalog

Number Breaker

Size

Amperes

Number

Outlets

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Approximate

Weight 

Mounting Inside Outside K

Dim Standard

Conduit

Size

ABJCDEFGH Lbs. kg

XFDN050B 15 – 50 4 5.50

(139.7) 13.13

(333.5) 14.13

(358.9) 6.13

(155.7) 10.75

(273.1) 5.25

(133.4) 10.63

(270.0) 15.25

(387.4) 8.88

(225.6) 2.00

(50.8) 1.50

(38.1) 38 17.3

XFDN100B  60 – 100 4 6.00

(152.4) 18.00

(457.2) 19.00

(482.6) 6.50

(165.1) 16.00

(406.4) 5.50

(139.7) 11.00

(279.4) 20.50

(520.7) 9.00

(228.6) 2.31

(58.7) 2.00

(50.8) 57 25.9

XFDN225B 125 – 225 4 10.25

(260.4) 22.63

(574.8) —11.38

(289.1) 20.00

(508.0) 6.38

(162.1) 16.38

(416.1) 25.13

(638.3) 9.63

(244.6) 3.50

(88.9) 2.50

(63.5) 104 47.2

XJDN225B 70 – 225 4 8.50

(215.9) 27.13

(689.1) —11.25

(285.8) 29.88

(759.0) 7.38

(187.5) 16.00

(406.4) 29.50

(749.3) 12.31

(312.7) 4.00

(101.6) 3.00

(76.2) 145 65.8

XJDN250B 250 4 9.50

(241.3) 27.25

(692.2) —11.25

(285.8) 29.88

(759.0) 8.06

(204.7) 16.38

(416.1) 35.00

(889.0) 12.38

(314.5) 4.19

(106.4) 4.00

(101.6) 170 77.2

(2) 1/2-inch

(12.7 mm)

NPT

Home

TOC

Index

21.5-6

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage

Enclosed Circuit Breakers

Dimensions and Weights/Technical Data — Enclosures and Breakers Sheet 0696

Table 21.5-11. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather Resistant Seals — 400 – 1200 Amperes

Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights.

Maximum wire size: 500 kcmil.

Power cables must enter and leave from opposite ends (through-feed).

Figure 21.5-7. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather Resistant Seals

Table 21.5-13. Circuit Breaker Enclosure Interpretation Data

“N” in this position indicates enclosure complies with NEC gutter space requirement.

XFDN050 is not Group B compliant.

Cutler-Hammer is a federally registered trademark of

Eaton Corporation. UL is a federally registered trade-

mark of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ISO is the regis-

tered trademark and sole property of the International

Organization for Standardization. NEMA is the regis-

tered trademark and service mark of the National Elec-

trical Manufacturers Association. CSA is a registered

trademark of the Canadian Standards Association.

Uniform Building Code (UBC) is a trademark of the

International Conference of Building Ofﬁcials (ICBO).

National Electrical Code and NEC are registered trade-

marks of the National Fire Protection Association,

Quincy, Mass.

Catalog

Number Breaker

Size

Amperes

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Weight 

Overall

Enclosure Enclosure

Mounting Conduit Standard

Conduit

ABCEFHI Size Location Lbs. kg

XKDN400B  400 35.00

(889.0) 16.38

(416.1) 12.63

(320.8) 9.50

(241.3) 27.25

(692.2) 3.00

(76.2) 4.19

(106.4) 4.00

(101.6) 1, 3 & 6, 8 170 77

XLDN600B 600 37.88

(962.2) 23.88

(606.6) 14.25

(362.0) 16.00

(406.4) 45.38

(1152.7) 4.00

(101.6) 5.00

(127.0) 4.00

(101.6) 1, 3 & 6, 8 419 191

XKCN800B 800 47.88

(1216.2) 13.63

(346.2) 12.81

(325.4) 16.13

(409.7) 40.75

(1035.1) 4.00

(101.6) 4.00

(101.6) 1, 3 & 6, 8 228 104

XNDN1200B 1200 64.00

(1625.6) 26.00

(660.4) 21.38

(543.1) 27.56

(700.0) 38.63

(981.2) 6.50

(165.1) 4.38

(111.3) 4.00

(101.6) 1, 3 & 6, 8 567 257

Table 21.5-12. Typical Breaker Weights

Frame Lbs. kg

G20.9

E31.4

F52.3

J125.4

K135.9

L209.1

M3013.6

N4520.4

1st Field

Enclosure

Type

2nd Field

Breaker

Family

3rd Field

Maximum

Ampacity

NEMA

Enclosure

Type

Deﬁnitions

NEMA

Standard

NEMA 1 Flush F

Surface S

NEMA 3R R

NEMA 12 J

NEMA 12K D

NEMA 4/4X, 5 Stainless W

NEMA 7/9 Cast Al. X

G-Frame

F-Frame

J-Frame

K-Frame

L-Frame

M-Frame

N-Frame

100

150

225

250

400

600

1200

1Type 1 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of

protection against contact with the enclosed equipment.

3R Type 3R enclosures are intended for outdoor use primarily to provide a degree

of protection against falling rain, sleet, and external ice formation.

12 Type 12 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily

to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt,

and dripping noncorrosive liquids.

12K Type 12K enclosures with knockouts are intended for indoor use

primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt,

and dripping noncorrosive liquids other than at knockouts.

4/4X Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily

to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain,

splashing water, and hose-directed water, and corrosion; and will

be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure.

5Type 5 enclosures are used for indoor use primarily to provide a

degree of protection against dust and falling dirt.

7Type 7 enclosures are for use indoors in locations classiﬁed

as Class I, Groups B, C or D as deﬁned in the National Electrical Code. 

9Type 9 enclosures are for use in indoor locations classiﬁed as

Class II, Groups E, F or G as deﬁned in the National Electrical Code.

Conduit Position No. 123G-MTG.

Holes (4)

F-MTG.

8 7 6

E-MT

1st

Field

R FD N 150

2nd

Field 3rd

Field

NEMA

Enclosure Breaker

Frame NEMA

Enclosure

Home

TOC

Index

CA08104001E

115826-Attachment 115826-Attachment 115826-Attachment 786679 Batch7 unilog cesco-content

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation